Parameter Manual · Edition 10/2007

Control Units

CU240E
CU240S

sinamics
G120
s
s

1
Parameters

SINAMICS 2
Function diagrams

3
Faults and Alarms
SINAMICS G120
Control Units CU240E A
ASCII-Table
CU240S B
List of Abbreviations

C
Parameter Manual Index

This Parameter Manual is valid for the following Control

Units and Firmware versions:

Control Unit As from Firmware version:

CU240E V3.1
CU240S V3.0
CU240S DP V3.0
CU240S DP-F V3.0
CU240S PN V3.1
CU240S PN-F V3.1

Edition 10/2007
A5E00807461B AD
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to
prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual
by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These
notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of dan-
ger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning
relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning
and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of
the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to
commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety prac-
tices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and
only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens.
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as
well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights
of the owner.

Copyright Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved Disclaimer of Liability

The distribution and duplication of this document or the utilization and We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure
transmission of its contents are not permitted without express written consistency with the hardware and software described. Since
permission. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Standard Drives
Postfach 3269, 91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG 2007
Germany Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S

Contents

1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.1 Introduction to Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2 List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-290
1.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-290
1.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-292
1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-297
1.4.1 Binector Input Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-297
1.4.2 Connector Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-299
1.4.3 Binector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-300
1.4.4 Connector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-301
1.4.5 Connector/Binector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-304
1.5 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-305

2 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307

2.1 Contents: function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-308
2.2 Symbols in function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310
2.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312
2.4 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-315
2.5 Internal Setpoint Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328
2.6 Technology Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-335
2.7 Free Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-347
2.8 Setpoint Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352
2.9 V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358
2.10 Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-361

3 Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-375

3.1 Faults and Alarms – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-376
3.2 List of Fault and Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-377

A ASCII-Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-403

B List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-405

C Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-411

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved Contents-5

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Contents

Contents-6 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Parameters 1
Contents

1.1 Introduction to Parameters 1-8

1.2 List of Parameters 1-13

1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview 1-290

1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters 1-297

1.5 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1) 1-305

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-7

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Parameters
Introduction to Parameters

1.1 Introduction to Parameters

The layout of the parameter description is as follows.

%,&2LIH[LVW

U &2$GGLWLRQDOWRUTXHVHWSRLQW&2$GGWUTVHW
&86
$FFHVVOHYHO 3*URXS&ORVHGORRSFRQWURO 'DWDW\SH)ORDWLQJ3RLQW
8QLW'DWDVHW''6 
leseparameter.pdf

Fig. 1-1 Read-only parameter

,QGH[ %,&2LIH[LVW

3>@ 6HOFWLRQRIFRPPDQGVRXUFH&RPPDQGVRXUFHVH
&86'3
&86'3)
$FFHVVOHYHO 3*URXS&RPPDQGV 'DWDW\SH8QVLJQHG
4XLFNFRPP12 $FWLYH<(6 'DWDVHW&'6
&DQEHFKDQJHG7 8QLW
0LQ 0D[ )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
  

&830YDULDQWV 
schreibparameter.pdf

Fig. 1-2 Write parameter

Parameter number
Indicates the relevant parameter number. The numbers used are 4-digit numbers
in the range 0000 to 9999. Only for PROFINET there are a few parameters in the
range of 61.000. Numbers prefixed with an “r” indicate that the parameter is a
“read-only” parameter, which displays a particular value but cannot be changed
directly by specifying a different value via this parameter number.
All other parameters are prefixed with a “P”. The values of these parameters can
be changed directly in the range indicated by the “Min” and “Max” settings in the
header. If these values have a physical unit, it is shown in brackets.
[index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the
range of indices available.
.0...15 indicates that the parameter has several bits, which can be evaluated or
connected individually.

1-8 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Introduction to Parameters

Parameter text (Long name/Short name)

Indicates the name of the relevant parameter.
Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI,
CO and CO/BO followed by a colon.
These abbreviations have the following meanings:
P9999 Binector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of a
BI = (0) binary signal

r9999
Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as a binary
BO =
signal
r9999 Connector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of an
CI = (999:9) analog signal
Connector output, i.e. parameter connects as an analog
CO = r9999 [99]
signal

CO/BO =
r9999 Connector/Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as
r9999
an analog signal and/or as a binary signal
CoBo.pdf

To make use of BICO you will need access to the full parameter list. At this level
many new parameter settings are possible, including BICO functionality. BICO
functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and
output functions. It can be used in most cases in conjunction with the simple,
access level 2 settings.
The BICO system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and
mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial
etc.) and outputs (inverter current, frequency, analog output, relays, etc.).
At BI and CI parameters the parameter number is specified under Factory setting
with which this parameter is connected. In this case the Min and Max values have
dashes.

Access level (refers only to access via Operator Panel (OP))

Indicates the level of user access. There are four access levels: Standard,
Extended, Expert and Service. The number of parameters that appear in each
functional group depends on the access level set in P0003 (user access level).

P-Group (refers only to access via Operator Panel (OP))

Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs.

Note:
Parameter P0004 (parameter filter) acts as a filter and focuses access to param-
eters according to the functional group selected.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-9

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Parameters
Introduction to Parameters

Data type
The data types available are shown in the table below.

Table 1-1 Available data types

Notation Meaning
Unsigned8 (U8) 8-bit unsigned
Unsigned16 (U16) 16-bit unsigned
Unsigned32 (U32) 32-bit unsigned
Integer16 (I16) 16-bit integer
Integer32 (I32) 32-bit integer
Floating Point (Float) Floating point

The information of the data types for binector and connector inputs can be com-
posed of two specifications (discreated by a slash):
• First specification
data type of the parameter
• Second specification
data type of the signal source preferably to be connected (binector or connec-
tor output)

Quick Comm
Indicates whether or not (Yes or No) a parameter can only be changed during
quick commissioning, i.e. when P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) is
set to 1 (quick commissioning).

Active

• YES changes to the parameter values take effective immediately after

they have been entered.
• No the “P” button on the Operator Panel must be pressed before the
changes take effect.

1-10 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Introduction to Parameters

Data set
Parameters which are dependent on a data set are identified as follows:
• CDS (Command Data Set)
• DDS (Drive Data Set)
They are always indexed with [0...2].
For CDS is valid:
[0] = Command Data Set 0
[1] = Command Data Set 1
[2] = Command Data Set 2
For DDS is valid:
[0] = Drive Data Set 0
[1] = Drive Data Set 1
[2] = Drive Data Set 2

Can be changed
Inverter state in which the parameter is changeable. Three states are possible:
• Commissioning C
• Run U
• Ready to runt T

This indicates when the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states
may be specified. If all three states are specified, this means that it is possible to
change this parameter setting in all three inverter states.

Unit
Indicates the unit of measure applicable to the parameter values.

Min
Indicates the minimum value to which the parameter can be set.

Max
Indicates the maximum value to which the parameter can be set.

Factory setting
Indicates the default value, i.e. the value which applies if the user does not specify
a particular value for the parameter.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-11

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Parameters
Introduction to Parameters

Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter.

Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter.

Recommendation
Information about recommended settings.

Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed para-
meters, except indexed parameters which belong to a data set (see Data set).

Bit field
For parameters with bit fields, the following information is provided about each bit:
• Bit number and signal name
• Meaning with signal states 0 and 1
• Function diagram (optional). The signal is shown on this function diagram.

Dependency
Conditions which need to be fulfilled in connection with this parameter. Also
includes special effects which can occur between this parameter and others.

Seven-segment display
The seven-segment display of the OP is structured as follows:

Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Visio-7-Segment Display.pdf

Fig. 1-3 Seven-segment display

1-12 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

1.2 List of Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

r0000 Drive display / Drive display

Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays the user selected output. This value is defined in P0005.
Note: Pressing the "Fn" button on OP for 2 seconds allows the user to view the values of DC link voltage, output fre-
quency, output voltage, output current, and chosen r0000 setting (defined in P0005).

r0002 Drive state / Drive state

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN-F

Description: Displays actual drive state.

Values: 0: Commissioning mode (P0010 != 0)
1: Drive ready
2: Drive fault active
3: Drive starting (DC-link precharging)
4: Drive running
5: Stopping (ramping down)
6: Drive inhibited
7: Safety active
8: Safety reset/commissioning
9: Safety fault active
Dependency: State 3 visible only while precharging DC link.
It is only visible when an externally powered control unit is fitted.

r0002 Drive state / Drive state

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN

Description: Displays actual drive state.

Values: 0: Commissioning mode (P0010 != 0)
1: Drive ready
2: Drive fault active
3: Drive starting (DC-link precharging)
4: Drive running
5: Stopping (ramping down)
6: Drive inhibited
7: Safety active
8: Safety reset/commissioning
9: Safety fault active
Dependency: State 3 visible only while precharging DC link.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-13

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0003 User access level / User access level

Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 1
Description: Defines user access level to parameter sets. The default setting (standard) is sufficient for most simple applications.
Values: 0: User defined parameter list - see P0013 for details on use
1: Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters.
2: Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions
3: Expert: For expert use only.
4: Service: Only for use by authorized service, password protected
Note: Only valid for control units with OP.

p0004 Parameter filter / Parameter filter

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN

Min Max Factory setting

0 22 0
Description: Filters parameters according to functionality to enable a more focussed approach to commissioning.
Values: 0: All parameters
2: Inverter
3: Motor
4: Speed sensor
5: Technol. application / units
7: Commands, binary I/O
8: AI and AO
10: Setpoint channel / RFG
12: Drive features
13: Motor control
19: Motor identification
20: Communication
21: Warnings / faults / monitoring
22: Technology controller

p0004 Parameter filter / Parameter filter

CU240S DP-F Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 22 0
Description: Filters parameters according to functionality to enable a more focussed approach to commissioning.
Values: 0: All parameters
2: Inverter
3: Motor
4: Speed sensor
5: Technol. application / units
7: Commands, binary I/O
8: AI and AO
10: Setpoint channel / RFG
11: Safety functions
12: Drive features
13: Motor control
19: Motor identification
20: Communication
21: Warnings / faults / monitoring
22: Technology controller

1-14 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0005[0...2] Display selection / Display selection

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

2 4000 21
Description: Selects display for parameter r0000 on OP (drive display).
Example: P0005 = 21: Actual filtered frequency (r0021)
P0005 = 25: Actual output voltage (r0025)
P0005 = 26: Actual filtered DC link voltage (r0026)
P0005 = 27: Actual output current (r0027)
Notice: These settings refer to read only parameter numbers ("rxxxx").

p0006 Display mode / Display mode

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 2
Description: Defines mode of display on OP for r0000 (drive display).
Values: 0: Ready state: setpoint/output frequency. Run: output frequency
1: Ready state: setpoint. Run: output frequency.
2: Ready state: P0005/r0020 value. Run: P0005 value
3: Ready state: r0002/r0020 value. Run: r0002 value
4: In all states just display P0005
Note: When inverter is not running, the display alternates between the values for "Not Running" and "Running".
Per default, the setpoint and actual frequency values are displayed alternately.

p0007 Backlight delay time / Backl. delay time

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2000 0
Description: Defines time period after which the backlight of the OP display turns off if no operator keys have been pressed.
Note: P0007 = 0:
Backlight always on (default state).
P0007 = 1 - 2000:
Number of seconds after which the backlight will turn off.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-15

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0010 Commissioning parameter / Commissioning par.

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: T
CU240S PN

Min Max Factory setting

0 95 0
Description: Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected.
Values: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Inverter
29: Download
30: Factory setting
95: Safety commissioning (only on safety CU)
Dependency: Reset to 0 for inverter to run.
P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters.
Note: • P0010 = 1
The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P0010 = 1. After that only the important
parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after the
other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900 = 1 - 3.
Afterwards parameter P0010 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically.
• P0010 = 2
For service purposes only.
• P0010 = 29
To transfer a parameter file via PC tool (e.g.: STARTER) parameter P0010 will be set to 29 by the PC tool.
When download has been finished PC tool resets parameter P0010 to zero.
• P0010 = 30
When resetting the parameters of inverter P0010 must be set to 30.
Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 1.
The inverter will automatically reset all its parameters to their default settings.
This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to start again.
Duration of factory setting will take about 60 s.

p0010 Commissioning parameter / Commissioning par.

CU240S DP-F Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 95 0
Description: Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected.
Values: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Inverter
29: Download
30: Factory setting
95: Safety commissioning (only on safety CU)
Dependency: Reset to 0 for inverter to run.
P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters.

1-16 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Note: • P0010 = 1
The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P0010 = 1. After that only the important
parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after the
other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900 = 1 - 3.
Afterwards parameter P0010 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically.
• P0010 = 2
For service purposes only.
• P0010 = 29
To transfer a parameter file via PC tool (e.g.: STARTER) parameter P0010 will be set to 29 by the PC tool.
When download has been finished PC tool resets parameter P0010 to zero.
• P0010 = 30
When resetting the parameters of inverter P0010 must be set to 30.
Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 1.
The inverter will automatically reset all its parameters to their default settings.
This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to start again.
Duration of factory setting will take about 60 s.
• P0010 = 95
For changing the safety parameters select access level 3 and set the safety password. Only then P0010 can be
set to 95. The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 2 s. For finishing the safety
commissioning, see P3900.

p0011 Lock for user defined parameter / LockUserDefinedPar

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Note: See parameter P0013 (user defined parameter)

p0012 Key for user defined parameter / Key UserDefinedPar

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Note: See parameter P0013 (user defined parameter).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-17

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0013[0...19] User defined parameter / User-defined par

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user will have access.
Instructions for use:
1. Set P0003 = 3 (expert user).
2. Go to P0013 indices 0 to 16 (user list)
3. Enter into P0013 index 0 to 16 the parameters required to be visible in the user-defined list.
The following values are fixed and cannot be changed:
- P0013 index 17 = 3 (user access level)
- P0013 index 18 = 10 (commissioning parameter filter)
- P0013 index 19 = 12 (key for user defined parameter)
4. Set P0003 = 0 to activate the user defined parameter.
Index: [0] = 1st user parameter
[1] = 2nd user parameter
[2] = 3rd user parameter
[3] = 4th user parameter
[4] = 5th user parameter
[5] = 6th user parameter
[6] = 7th user parameter
[7] = 8th user parameter
[8] = 9th user parameter
[9] = 10th user parameter
[10] = 11th user parameter
[11] = 12th user parameter
[12] = 13th user parameter
[13] = 14th user parameter
[14] = 15th user parameter
[15] = 16th user parameter
[16] = 17th user parameter
[17] = 18th user parameter
[18] = 19th user parameter
[19] = 20th user parameter
Dependency: First, set P0011 ("lock") to a different value then P0012 ("key") to prevent changes to user-defined parameter.
Then, set P0003 to 0 to activate the user-defined list.
When locked and the user-defined parameter is activated, the only way to exit the user-defined parameter (and
view other parameters) is to set P0012 ("key") to the value in P0011 ("lock").
Note: The default values of P0011 ("lock") and P0012 ("key") are the same.

1-18 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0014[0...2] Store mode / Store mode

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Sets the store mode for parameters.
The store mode can be configured for all interfaces listed under "Index".
Values: 0: Volatile (RAM)
1: Nonvolatile (EEPROM)
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232
[2] = Fieldbus
Note: An independent store request may be part of the serial communications (e.g. PKE bits 15-12 of USS protocol), set
by a PLC or PC tools like STARTER. See the table below for an influence on the settings of P0014.

Value of p0014[x] Store request via USS/PROFIBUS Result

RAM EEPROM EEPROM
EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM
RAM RAM RAM
EEPROM RAM EEPROM

1. With the BOP the parameter will always be stored in the EEPROM.
2. P0014 itself will always be stored in the EEPROM.
3. P0014 will not be changed by performing a factory reset (P0010 = 30 and P0970 = 1).
4. P0014 can be transferred during a download (P0010 = 29).
When transferring parameter p0014, the inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communica-
tions - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

r0018 Firmware version / Firmware version

Access level: 1 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays version number of installed firmware.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-19

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0019.0...14 CO/BO: BOP control word / BOP CtrlWd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of operator panel commands.

The settings below are used as the "source" codes for keypad control when connecting to BICO input parameters.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
08 JOG right Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
Note: When BICO technology is used to allocate functions to panel buttons, this parameter displays the actual status of
the relevant command.

r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
Description: Displays actual frequency setpoint (input of ramp function generator). This value is available filtered (r0020) and
unfiltered (r1119).

JOG P1110 P1091 P1080 P1082 P1120 P1135

...

Setpoint Inhibit Skip IfI Motor

source Reverse neg. freq. frequency RFG control
setpoint

r1079 r1114 r0020 r1170

r1078 r1119

r0021 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt. freq.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual inverter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency
limitation.

r0022 Act. filtered rotor speed / Act fil rotorspeed

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [RPM] Data set: -

Description: Displays calculated rotor speed based on r0021 (filtered output frequency [Hz] x 120 / number of poles). The value
is updated every 128 ms.
Note: This calculation makes no allowance for load-dependent slip.

r0024 CO: Act. filt. output frequency / Act. outp. freq

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual filtered output frequency (slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation are
included). See also r0021.
This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).

1-20 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0025 CO: Act. output voltage / Act.outp. volt

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays filtered [rms] voltage applied to motor. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered (r0072).

r0026[0...1] CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. / Act. fil. Vdc

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays filtered DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
Index: [0] = Compensation DC voltage Channel
[1] = Measurement/Monitoring DC voltage Channel
Note: r0026[0] = Main DC-link voltage
r0026[1] = Decoupled DC-link voltage for internal supply (e.g. for CU). It depends on the drive topology. If it is not
available it shows the value 0.

r0027 CO: Act. output current / Act. outp. cur

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays rms value of motor current [A]. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered (r0068).

r0029 CO: Flux gen. current / Flux gen. cur.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays flux-generating current component. This value is available filtered (r0029) and unfiltered (r0076).
The flux-generating current component is based on the nominal flux, which is calculated from the motor parameters
(P0340 - Calculation of motor parameters).
Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.
Note: The flux-generating current component is generally constant up to the base speed of the motor; above base speed,
this component is weakened (field weakening) thus enabling an increase in motor speed but at reduced torque.

r0030 CO: Torque gen. current / Torque gen.cur

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays torque-generating current component. This value is available filtered (r0030) and unfiltered (r0078).
The torque-generating current component is calculated from the torque setpoint values delivered by the speed con-
troller.
Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.
Note: For asynchronous motors, a limit is calculated for the torque generating current component (in conjunction with the
maximum possible output voltage (r0071), motor leakage and current field weakening (r0377)) and this prevents
motor stalling.

r0031 CO: Act. filtered torque / Act fil torque

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays electrical torque. Output value will be zero at low speeds when current injection is active (r1751.4 = 1).
This value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).
Note: The electrical torque is not the same as the mechanical torque, which can be measured on the shaft. Due to wind-
age and friction a part of the electrical torque is lost in the motor.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-21

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0032 CO: Act. filtered power / Act fil. power

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays motor power.

Pmech = ω ⋅ M = 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ M
ω, M ⇒
1 r0022
Motor r0032 [kW] = ⋅2⋅π⋅ [1/min] ⋅ r0031 [Nm]
1000 60

r0032 [hp] = 0.75 ⋅ r0032 [kW]

Dependency: Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe / North America).

r0035[0...2] CO: Act. motor temperature / Act. mot.temp.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: DDS
Description: Displays measured motor temperature.

r0036 CO: Inverter overload utilization / Invert ovl util

Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays inverter overload utilization calculated via the I2t model.
The actual I2t value relative to the max. possible I2t value supplies utilization in [%].
If the current exceeds the threshold for P0294 (inverter I2t overload warning), warning A0505 (inverter I2t) is gener-
ated and the output current of the inverter reduced via P0290 (inverter overload reaction).
If 100 % utilization is exceeded, fault F0005 (inverter I2t) is tripped.
Example:
Normalized output current
r0027
r0207
100 %

Reaction via p0290

Default: "current reduction"
t
i2t [%]
r0036

p0294 (95 %)

t
A0505
1
0 t

Dependency: r0036 > 0:

If the nominal current (see r0207) of the inverter is exceed, utilization will be displayed, otherwise, 0 % utilization is
displayed.

1-22 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0037[0...1] CO: Inverter temperature [°C] / Inverter temp.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: -

Description: Displays measured heatsink temperature and calculated junction temperature of IGBTs based on thermal model.
Index: [0] = Measured heat sink temperature
[1] = Total Chip Junction Temperature
Note: The values are updated every 128 ms.

r0038 CO: Fil. power factor / Fil.power fact

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the filtered power factor.

r0039 CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kWh] / Energy meter

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [kWh] Data set: -

Description: Displays electrical energy used by inverter since display was last reset (see P0040 - reset energy consumption
meter).
Dependency: Value is reset when P0040 = 1 (reset energy consumption meter).

p0040 Reset energy consumption meter / Reset energy meter

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Resets value of parameter r0039 (energy consumption meter) to zero.
Values: 0: No reset
1: Reset r0039 to 0

r0050 CO/BO: Active Command Dataset / Active CDS

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays currently active Command Dataset (CDS).
Values: 0: Command Dataset 0 (CDS)
1: Command Dataset 1 (CDS)
2: Command Dataset 2 (CDS)
Note: See parameter P0810.

r0051[0...1] CO: Active Drive Dataset (DDS) / Active DDS

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays currently selected and active Drive Dataset (DDS).
Values: 0: Drive Dataset 0 (DDS0)
1: Drive Dataset 1 (DDS1)
2: Drive Dataset 2 (DDS2)
Index: [0] = Selected Drive Dataset
[1] = Active Drive Dataset
Note: See parameter P0820.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-23

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 / Act StatWd1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays first active status word of inverter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Drive ready Yes No -
01 Drive ready to run Yes No -
02 Drive running Yes No -
03 Drive fault active Yes No -
04 OFF2 active No Yes -
05 OFF3 active No Yes -
06 ON inhibit active Yes No -
07 Drive warning active Yes No -
08 Deviation setpoint / act. value No Yes -
09 PZD control Yes No -
10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No -
11 Warning: Motor current/torque limit No Yes -
12 Brake open Yes No -
13 Motor overload No Yes -
14 Motor runs right Yes No -
15 Inverter overload No Yes -
Dependency: r0052 Bit03 "Drive fault active": Output of Bit3 (Fault) will be inverted on digital output (Low = Fault, High = No
Fault).

r0053.0...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 / Act StatWd2

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays second status word of inverter (in bit format).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC brake active Yes No -
01 |f_act| > P2167 (f_off) Yes No -
02 |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) Yes No -
03 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Yes No -
04 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
05 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
06 f_act >= setpoint (f_set) Yes No -
07 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172 Yes No -
08 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172 Yes No -
09 Ramping finished Yes No -
10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) Yes No -
11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) Yes No -
14 Download Dataset 0 from OP Yes No -
15 Download Dataset 1 from OP Yes No -
Notice: r0053 Bit00 "DC brake active" ==> see parameter P1233

1-24 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0053.1...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 / Act StatWd2

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays second status word of inverter (in bit format).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 |f_act| > P2167 (f_off) Yes No -
02 |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) Yes No -
03 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Yes No -
04 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
05 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
06 f_act >= setpoint (f_set) Yes No -
09 Ramping finished Yes No -
10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) Yes No -
11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) Yes No -
14 Download Dataset 0 from OP Yes No -
15 Download Dataset 1 from OP Yes No -

r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Act. control word 1 / Act CtrlWd1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays first control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -
Notice: r0054 is identical to r2036 if USS is selected as command source via P0700.

r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Act. control word 2 / Act CtrlWd2

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays additional control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
09 Enable DC brake Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Notice: r0055 is identical to r2037 if USS is selected as command source via P0700.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-25

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Act. control word 2 / Act CtrlWd2

PM250 Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays additional control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Notice: r0055 is identical to r2037 if USS is selected as command source via P0700.

r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status of motor control / Stat MotCtrl

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of motor control (in bit format), which can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Init. control finished Yes No -
01 Motor demagnetizing finished Yes No -
02 Pulses enabled Yes No -
03 Voltage soft start select Yes No -
04 Motor excitation finished Yes No -
05 Starting boost active Yes No -
06 Acceleration boost active Yes No -
07 Frequency is negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Volts setpoint limited Yes No -
10 Slip frequency limited Yes No -
11 f_out > f_max Freq. limited Yes No -
12 Phase reversal selected Yes No -
13 Imax controller active/torque limit reached Yes No -
14 Vdc-max controller active Yes No -
15 KIB (Vdc-min control) active Yes No -
Notice: The I-max controller (r0056 Bit13) will be activated when the actual output current (r0027) exceeds the current limit
in r0067.

1-26 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0056.0...13 CO/BO: Status of motor control / Stat MotCtrl

PM250 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of motor control (in bit format), which can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Init. control finished Yes No -
01 Motor demagnetizing finished Yes No -
02 Pulses enabled Yes No -
03 Voltage soft start select Yes No -
04 Motor excitation finished Yes No -
05 Starting boost active Yes No -
06 Acceleration boost active Yes No -
07 Frequency is negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Volts setpoint limited Yes No -
10 Slip frequency limited Yes No -
11 f_out > f_max Freq. limited Yes No -
12 Phase reversal selected Yes No -
13 Imax controller active/torque limit reached Yes No -
Notice: The I-max controller (r0056 Bit13) will be activated when the actual output current (r0027) exceeds the current limit
in r0067.

r0061 CO: Act. rotor speed / Act rotor speed

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Description: Displays current speed detected by encoder.

Dependency: r0061 displays the value zero with P0400 = 0.

r0062 CO: Freq. setpoint / Freq. setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays speed setpoint in Hz of vector speed controller.

Dependency: r0062 = 0 in V/f control modes (P1300 = 0...19).

r0063 CO: Act. frequency / Act. frequency

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual motor frequency in Hz. This value is available filtered (r0021) and unfiltered (r0063).

60
Act. frequencies: r0313
Act. filtered speed
r0022
V/f 160 ms

P1300 Act. filtered frequency

r0021

SLVC <20 Act. frequency

(Observer 20,22 r0063
model)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-27

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0063 CO: Act. frequency / Act. frequency

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Displays actual motor frequency in Hz. This value is available filtered (r0021) and unfiltered (r0063).

60
Act. frequencies: r0313
Act. filtered speed
r0022
V/f 160 ms

P1300 Act. filtered frequency

r0021

SLVC <20 Act. frequency

(Observer 20,22 r0063
model) 21,23
r0313
P0400
60 ⋅ P0408
0 Act. encoder frequency
0
r0061
Encoder
1,2 ,12
P1300 = 21,23 and P0400 = 0 --> F0090

r0064 CO: Dev. frequency controller / Dev. freq ctrl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
Description: Displays actual deviation of speed controller.
This value is calculated from the speed setpoint (r0062) and the actual speed (r0063).
Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0065 CO: Slip frequency / Slip frequency

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays slip frequency of motor in [%] relative to the rated motor frequency (P0310).
Note: For V/f control, see also P1335 (slip compensation).

r0066 CO: Act. output frequency / Act. outp freq

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual output frequency in Hz. This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).
Note: The output frequency is limited by the values entered in P1080 (min. frequency) and P1082 (max. frequency).

1-28 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0067 CO: Act. output current limit / Outp cur limit

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays valid maximum output current of inverter.

Parameter r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors:
• Rated motor current P0305
• Motor overload factor P0640
• Motor protection in dependency of P0610
• r0067 is less than or equal to maximum inverter current r0209
• Inverter protection in dependency of P0290
Note: A reduction of r0067 may indicate an inverter overload or a motor overload.

r0067 CO: Act. output current limit / Outp cur limit

PM250 Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
PM260 Unit: [A] Data set: -
Description: Displays valid maximum output current of inverter.
Parameter r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors:
• Rated motor current P0305
• Motor overload factor P0640
• Motor protection in dependency of P0610
• r0067 is less than or equal to maximum inverter current r0209
• Inverter protection in dependency of P0290
• r0067 is affected by the regeneration power limit when regenerating
Note: A reduction of r0067 may indicate an inverter overload or a motor overload.

r0068 CO: Output current / Output current

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays unfiltered [rms] value of motor current [A]. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered (r0068).
Note: Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0027, which is filtered and used as display value).

r0069[0...5] CO: Act. phase currents / Act. phase cur

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays measured phase currents.

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
[3] = Offset U_phase
[4] = Offset V_phase
[5] = Offset W_phase

r0070 CO: Act. DC-link voltage / Act. Vdc

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
Note: Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0026 (actual DC-link voltage), which is filtered and used as dis-
play value).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-29

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0071 CO: Max. output voltage / Max. outp.volt

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays maximum output voltage.

Dependency: Actual maximum output voltage depends on the actual input supply voltage.

r0072 CO: Act. output voltage / Act. outp.volt

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays output voltage. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered (r0072).

r0074 CO: Act. modulation / Act modulation

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual modulation index.

The modulation index is defined as ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental component in the inverter
phase output voltage and half of the DC-link voltage.

r0075 CO: Current setpoint Isd / Cur. setp. Isd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays setpoint of flux generating current component.

Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0076 CO: Act. current Isd / Act. cur. Isd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays flux generating current component. This value is available filtered (r0029) and unfiltered (r0076).
Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0077 CO: Current setpoint Isq / Cur. setp. Isq

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays setpoint for component of torque generating current.

Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0078 CO: Act. current Isq / Act. cur. Isq

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays component of torque generating current. This value is available filtered (r0030) and unfiltered (r0078).

r0079 CO: Torque setpoint (total) / Total trq setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays total torque setpoint after limitation.

Dependency: Applies when vector control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

1-30 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0080 CO: Act. torque / Act. torque

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual torque. Output value will be zero at low speeds when current injection is active (r1751.4 = 1). This
value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).

r0084 CO: Act. air gap flux / Air gap flux

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays air gap flux in [%] relative to the rated motor flux.

r0085 CO: Act. re-active current / Act.re-active cur

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -
Description: Displays re-active (imaginary part) of motor current.
Dependency: Applies when V/f control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0086 CO: Act. active current / Act.active cur

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays active (real part) of motor current.

Dependency: Applies when V/f control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

r0087 CO: Act. power factor / Act.power fact

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the actual power factor.

r0090 CO: Act. rotor angle / Act rotor angle

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Unit: [°] Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Indicates the current angle of the rotor.

r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transf. angle

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°] Data set: -

Description: Displays the transformation angle (flux angle in VC mode or angle from frequency in Vf mode)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-31

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0095[0...9] CI: Display PZD signals / PZD signals

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects source of display for PZD signals.
Index: [0] = 1st PZD signal
[1] = 2nd PZD signal
[2] = 3rd PZD signal
[3] = 4th PZD signal
[4] = 5th PZD signal
[5] = 6th PZD signal
[6] = 7th PZD signal
[7] = 8th PZD signal
[8] = 9th PZD signal
[9] = 10th PZD signal

r0096[0...9] PZD signals / PZD signals

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays PZD signals in [%].

Index: [0] = 1st PZD signal
[1] = 2nd PZD signal
[2] = 3rd PZD signal
[3] = 4th PZD signal
[4] = 5th PZD signal
[5] = 6th PZD signal
[6] = 7th PZD signal
[7] = 8th PZD signal
[8] = 9th PZD signal
[9] = 10th PZD signal
Note: r0096 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p0100 Europe / North America / Europe / Nth Amer.

Access level: 1 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Determines whether power settings are expressed in [kW] or [hp] (e.g. Rated motor power P0307).
The default settings for the rated motor frequency P0310 and maximum frequency P1082 are also set automatically
here, in addition to reference frequency P2000.
Values: 0: Europe [kW], motor base frequency is 50 Hz
1: North America [hp], motor base frequency is 60 Hz
2: North America [kW], motor base frequency is 60 Hz
Dependency: Where:
• Stop drive first (i.e. disable all pulses) before you change this parameter.
• Parameter P0100 can only be changed with P0010 = 1 (Commissioning mode) via the respective interface (e.g.
USS on RS232).
• Changing P0100 resets all rated motor parameters as well as other parameters that depend on the rated motor
parameters (see P0340 - calculation of motor parameters).

1-32 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0191[0...2] Configuration Control Unit / Config CU

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the actual HW-configuration (SZL vector) of the Control Unit.
Index: [0] = SZL Vector CU and PM combined
[1] = SZL Vector CU
[2] = SZL Vector PM

p0199 Equipment system number / Equip. system no.

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 255 0
Description: Equipment system number.
This parameter has no operation effect (only for factory purposes).

p0201[0...2] Act. power module code number / Act.Pmod. code no

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Identifies hardware variant.
Index: [0] = Powerstack code
[1] = Functionality version - Last Digit of MLFB
[2] = Last used PS Id
Notice: Parameter P0201 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.

r0203 Act. inverter type / Act. inverter type

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Type number of actual inverter identified.

Values: 0: No PS Data/Module
1: reserved
2: reserved
3: reserved
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: reserved
7: reserved
110: SINAMICS G110
111: SINAMICS IPM25
114: SINAMICS PM240
115: SINAMICS PM250
125: SINAMICS ET200PRO
130: SINAMICS PM DCP

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-33

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0204 Power module features / Pmodule features

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned32
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays hardware features of power module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC input voltage Yes No -
01 RFI filter Yes No -
02 Active Line Module Yes No -
03 SLM Yes No -
04 BLM with thryistor Yes No -
05 BLM with Diode Yes No -
06 Water Cooled Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Yes No -
13 Saftey Enabled Yes No -
14 Integrated Output Filter Yes No -
Note: Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.

r0204 Power module features / Pmodule features

PM250 Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned32
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays hardware features of power module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 DC input voltage Yes No -
01 RFI filter Yes No -
02 Active Line Module Yes No -
03 SLM Yes No -
04 BLM with thryistor Yes No -
05 BLM with Diode Yes No -
06 Water Cooled Yes No -
07 F3E Powerstack Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Yes No -
13 Saftey Enabled Yes No -
14 Integrated Output Filter Yes No -
Note: Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.

1-34 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0205 Inverter application / Inverter appl.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Selects inverter application.
The inverter and motor requirements are determined by the speed range and torque requirements of the load. The
relationship between speed and torque for different loads (high overloads or light overloads) is shown in the follow-
ing figure:

1
Torque M~ M = const. M~f M ~ f2
f
Power p = const. p~f p ~ f2 p ~ f3
Characteristic
P M

M
M P
P M
P
f f f f

Application Winders Hoisting gear Calenders with Pumps

Facing lathes Belt conveyors viscous friction Fans
Rotary cutting Process machines Eddy-current brakes Centrifuges
machines Involving forming
Rolling mills
Planers
Compressors

• High overload (HO):

HO is used if the application needs a high overload on the whole frequency range.Many loads can be consid-
ered to be high overloads.Typical high overloads are conveyors, compressors and positve displacement
pumps.
• Light overload (LO):
LO is used if the application has a parabolic frequency/torque characteristic like many fans and pumps.Light
overload offers the following possibilities with the same inverter:
- Higher rated inverter current r0207
- Higher rated inverter power r0206
- Higher threshold for I2t protection
If P0205 is modified in quick commissioning it immediately calculates various motor parameters:
1. P0305 Rated motor current
2. P0307 Rated motor power
3. P0640 Motor overload factor
It is recommended to modify P0205 first. Afterwards motor parameter may be adapted.
Motor parameter will be overridden by changing this sequence.
Values: 0: High overload
1: Light overload
Notice: Use setting 1 (light overload) only for light-overload applications (e.g. pumps and fans).
If used for high-overload applications, I2t warning will be produced too late, causing overheating in the motor.
Note: The parameter value is not reset by the factory setting (see P0970).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-35

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0206 Rated inverter power [kW] / [hp] / Rated power[kW/hp]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays nominal rated motor power from inverter.

Dependency: Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe / North America).

r0207[0...2] Rated inverter current / Rated inverter cur

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays rated inverter current.

Index: [0] = Rated inverter current
[1] = Rated LO current
[2] = Rated HO current
Note: The rated light overload (LO) current r0207[1] and rated high overload (HO) current r0207[2] values correspond to
suitable 4-pole Siemens standard motors (IEC) for the selected load cycle (see diagram).
The parameters r0207[1], r0207[2] are the default value of P0305 in association with the HO/LO application (load
cycle).
If r0207[1] = r0207[2], then no differentiation is possible between HO/LO applications.

Inverter current/power
%
Short-time current
r0209 150 %
Rated inverter current (continuous)
r0207[0] 100 %
85 %
Base load current (with overload capability)

t
60 s
300 s

r0208 Rated inverter voltage / Rated voltage

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned32
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays nominal AC supply voltage of inverter.

Note: r0208 = 230 : 200 - 240 V +/- 10 %
r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/- 10 %
r0208 = 575 : 500 - 600 V +/- 10 %

r0209 Maximum inverter current / Max. inverter cur

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays maximum output current of inverter.

Dependency: Parameter r0209 depends on the derating which is affected by pulse frequency P1800, ambient temperature and
altitude.
The data of deration is given in the Operating Instructions.

1-36 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0210 Supply voltage / Supply voltage

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [V] 1000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Parameter P0210 defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon the type of inverter.
If P0210 does not correspond to the supply voltage, then it must be modified (see Dependency).
Dependency: Optimizes Vdc controller, which extends the ramp-down time if regenerative energy from motor would otherwise
cause DC-link overvoltage trips.
Reducing the value enables controller to cut in earlier and reduce the risk of overvoltage.
Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 0.
Cut-in levels for Vdc-controller and compound braking are then derived directly from P0210 (supply voltage).

Vdc_min switch-on level = p1245 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210

Vdc_max switch-on level = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
Compound braking switch-on level = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
Dynamic braking switch-on level = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210

p0230 Output filter / Output filter

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Shows the selected output filter.
Values: 0: No output filter
1: Output choke
2: du/dt-filter
3: Appropriate SiemensSinus-/LC-fil
4: Custom Sinus-/LC-filter
Dependency: If a sinus-/LC-filter [P0230 = 3 or (P0230 = 4 and P0234 > 0)] is selected:
• the modulation index is limited to 100 % (P1803 = 100) what limits the output voltage.
• -the modulation type is set to SVM (P1802 = 2).
• -the resultant max. output frequency r1084 is limited depending on the filter and motor specifications.
Caution: Inverter size and motor size (nominal power) should fit together.
Do not start the drive if a LC-filter is connected and no load is present.
This could damage the filter.
Note: If a filter type is not available for the used inverter, the option is not selectable.
The paramter is only changeable in quick commissioning. In case of an internal sinus-/LC- output filter it will be set
to LC-filter (P0230 = 3) and is not visible and changeable.

r0231[0...1] Max. cable length / Max. cable length

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: [m] Data set: -

Description: Indexed parameter to display maximum allowable cable length between inverter and motor.
Index: [0] = Max. allowed unscreened cable length
[1] = Max. allowed screened cable length
Notice: For full EMC compliance, the screened cable must not exceed 25 m in length when an EMC filter is fitted.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-37

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0233 Filter inductance / Filter inductance

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.00000 1000.00000 0.00000
Description: The inductance of the used output filter (phase value in mH).
Note: The paramter is only changable if a custom filter is selected (P0230 = 4).

p0234 Filter capacity / Filter capacity

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.00000 1000.00000 0.00000
Description: The capacity of the used output filter (phase value in µF, if connected in triangle 3*C
Note: The paramter is only changable if a custom filter is selected (P0230 = 4).

p0290 Inverter overload reaction / Overload reaction

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 2
Description: Selects reaction of inverter to an internal thermal overload condition.
Values: 0: Reduce output frequency and output current
1: No reduction, trip (F0004/ 5/ 6) when thermal limits reached
2: Reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency
3: Reduce pulse freq. only and trip (F0006), when overload too hig
Dependency: Following physical values influence the inverter overload protection (see diagram):
• Heat sink temperature (r0037.0); causes A0504 and F0004.
• IGBT Junction temperature (r0037.1); causes F0004 or F0006.
• Delta temperature between heat sink and junction temperature; causes A0504 and F0006.
• Inverter I2t (r0036); causes A0505 and F0005.

Inverter monitoring Inverter overload reaction

P0290
A0504
r0036 i2t i_max control
P0294 (U/f) A0505
Current control
(SLVC, VC)
Heat sink A0506
r0037
temperature
P0292 F0004
f_pulse
IGBT
control F0005
temperature
P0292
F0006

1-38 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Notice: P0290 = 0, 2:
• Reduction of output frequency is only effective if the load is also reduced.
This is for example valid for light overload applications with a quadratic torque characteristic as pumps or fans.
• For settings P0290 = 0 or 2, the I-max controller will act upon the output current limit (r0067) in case of overtem-
perature.
P0290 = 0:
• With pulse frequencies above nominal, pulse frequency will be reduced to nominal immediately in the event of
r0027 greater than r0067 (current limit).
P0290 = 2, 3:
• The pulse frequency P1800 is reduced only if higher than 2 kHz and if the operating frequency is below 2 Hz.
• The actual pulse frequency is displayed in parameter r1801.0 and the minimal pulse frequency for reduction is
displayed in r1801.1.
• Inverter I2t acts upon output current and output frequency, but not on pulse frequency.
A trip will always result, if the action taken does not sufficiently reduce internal temperatures.

p0291[0...2] Inverter protection / Inverter protect.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0001 bin
Description: Bit 00 for enabling/disabling automatic pulse frequency reduction at output frequencies below 2 Hz.
The benefit is to reduce the noises at frequencies below 2 Hz.
Bit 02 shows if phase loss detection (input phase) of 3 phase inverters is enabled after factory reset.
Default setting of phase loss is disabled for FSA - FSC. FSD and greater it is enabled.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 reserved Yes No -
02 Phase loss detection enable Yes No -
Note: See P0290 (inverter overload reaction)

p0292 Inverter temperature warning / Inv. temp. warn.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [°C] 25 [°C] 5 [°C]
Description: Defines the temperature difference (in °C) between the overtemperature trip threshold (F0004) and the warning
threshold (A0504) of the inverter.
The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be changed by the user.

p0294 Inverter I2t warning / Inv. I2t warn.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]
Description: Defines the [%] value at which warning A0505 (inverter I2t) is generated.
Inverter I2t calculation is used to determine a maximum tolerable period for inverter overload.
The I2t calculation value is deemed = 100 % when this maximum tolerable period is reached.
Dependency: • The output current of the inverter has been reduced.
• The value of I2t does not exceed 100 %.
Note: P0294 = 100 % corresponds to stationary nominal load.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-39

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0295 Inverter fan off delay time / Fan delay time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [s] 3600 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Defines inverter fan switch off delay time in seconds after drive has stopped.
Note: Setting to 0, inverter fan will switch off when the drive stops, that means no delay.

p0300[0...2] Select motor type / Select motor type

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

1 2 1
Description: Selects motor type.
This parameter is required during commissioning to select motor type and optimize inverter performance.
Most motors are asynchronous; if in doubt, use the following formula .
60 * P0310 / P0311 (the ratio of rated frequency (P0310) and rated motor speed (P0311)
If the result is a whole number, the motor is synchronous.
Values: 1: Asynchronous rotational motor
2: Synchronous rotational motor
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
P1233 DC braking
If synchronous motor is selected, the following functions are not available:
P0308 Power factor
P0309 Motor efficiency
P0346 Magnetization time
P0347 Demagnetization time
P1335 Slip compensation
P1336 Slip limit
P0320 Motor magnetizing current
P0330 Rated motor slip
P0331 Rated magnetization current
P0332 Rated power factor
P0384 Rotor time constant
P1200, P1202, P1203 Flying start
P1230, P1232, P1233 DC braking

1-40 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0300[0...2] Select motor type / Select motor type

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

1 2 1
Description: Selects motor type.
This parameter is required during commissioning to select motor type and optimize inverter performance.
Most motors are asynchronous; if in doubt, use the following formula .
60 * P0310 / P0311 (the ratio of rated frequency (P0310) and rated motor speed (P0311)
If the result is a whole number, the motor is synchronous.
Values: 1: Asynchronous rotational motor
2: Synchronous rotational motor
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
If synchronous motor is selected, the following functions are not available:
P0308 Power factor
P0309 Motor efficiency
P0346 Magnetization time
P0347 Demagnetization time
P1335 Slip compensation
P1336 Slip limit
P0320 Motor magnetizing current
P0330 Rated motor slip
P0331 Rated magnetization current
P0332 Rated power factor
P0384 Rotor time constant
P1200, P1202, P1203 Flying start

p0304[0...2] Rated motor voltage / Rated mot. voltage

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

10 [V] 2000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating plate.
Following diagram shows a typical rating plate with the locations of the relevant motor data.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-41

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

P0310 P0305 P0304

3~Mot EN 60034
1LA7130-4AA10
No UD 0013509-0090-0031 TICI F 1325 IP 55 IM B3

50 Hz 230/400 V Δ/Υ 60 Hz 460 V

P0307 5.5kW 19.7/11.A 6.5kW 10.9 A

Cos ϕ 0.81 1455/min Cos ϕ 0.82 1755/min

Δ/Υ 220-240/380-420 V Υ 440-480 95.75%

19.7-20.6/11.4-11.9 A 11.1-11.3 A 45kg

P0308 P0311 P0309

Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).

Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
Caution: The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star / delta).
This means, if delta wiring is used for the motor, delta rating plate data has to be entered.

IEC Motor

W2 U2 V2
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1

U1
U1

V1 V1
W1 W1
Delta connection Star connection

Note: Safety Integrated: If driving loads occur in the application, the motor must be dimensioned so that its slip in super-
synchronous operation always remains within the rated slip.

1-42 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0305[0...2] Rated motor current / Rated mot. current

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 [A] 10000.00 [A] 1.86 [A]
Description: Nominal motor current [A] from rating plate - see diagram in P0304.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Depends also on P0320 (motor magnetization current).
Note: The maximum value of P0305 depends on the maximum inverter current r0209 and the motor type:
Asynchronous motor : P0305_max = P0209
Synchronous motor : P0305_max = 2 * P0209 (for HO operation) and P0305_max = P0209 (for LO operation)
It is recommended that the ratio of P0305 (rated motor current) and r0207 (rated inverter current) should not be
lower than:

1 P0305
U/f : ≤
8 r0207

1 P0305
SLVC and VC : ≤
4 r0207
When the relation of the nominal motor current P0305 and half of the maximal inverter current (r0209) exceeds 1.5
an additional current derating is applied. This is necessary to protect the inverter from harmonic current waves.

Imax,Inv

r0209

0.7 ⋅ r0209

1.5 2.5 2 ⋅ P0305

r0209
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

p0307[0...2] Rated motor power / Rated motor power

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 2000.00 0.75
Description: Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from rating plate - see P0304.
Dependency: If P0100 = 1, values will be in [hp] - see P0304 (rating plate).
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Note: Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-43

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0308[0...2] Rated motor cosPhi / Rated mot. cosPhi

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Nominal motor power factor (cosPhi) from rating plate - see P0304.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2, (motor power entered in [kW]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.

p0309[0...2] Rated motor efficiency / Rated efficiency

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate - see P0304.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Visible only when P0100 = 1, (i.e. motor power entered in [hp]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.

p0310[0...2] Rated motor frequency / Rated motor freq.

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

12.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Nominal motor frequency [Hz] from rating plate - see P0304.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).

Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.

Note: Changes to P0310 can influence the maximum motor frequency. For further information see P1082.

p0311[0...2] Rated motor speed / Rated motor speed

Access level: 1 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 [RPM] 40000 [RPM] 1395 [RPM]
Description: Nominal motor speed [rpm] from rating plate - see P0304.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
Required for vector control and V/f control with speed controller.
Slip compensation in V/f control requires rated motor speed for correct operation.
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Note: Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

1-44 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0313[0...2] Motor pole pairs / Motor pole pairs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: DDS

Description: Displays number of motor pole pairs that the inverter is currently using for internal calculations.
Dependency: Recalculated automatically when P0310 (rated motor frequency) or P0311 (rated motor speed) is changed.
r0313 = 1 : 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2 : 4-pole motor
etc.

p0314[0...2] Motor pole pair number / Motor pole pair no

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Specifies number of pole pairs of motor.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Setting 0 causes r0313 (calculated motor pole pairs) to be used during operation. Setting to > 0 overrides r0313.
P0314 = 1 : 2-pole motor
P0314 = 2 : 4-pole motor
etc.

p0320[0...2] Motor magnetizing current / Motor magnet. cur.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 99.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Defines motor magnetization current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency: Setting 0 causes calculation by P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or by P3900 = 1 - 3 (end of quick com-
missioning). The calculated value is displayed in parameter r0331.

r0330[0...2] Rated motor slip / Rated motor slip

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays nominal motor slip in [%] relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency) and P0311 (rated motor speed).

p0311
p0310 − ⋅ r0313
r0330 [%] = 60 ⋅ 100 %
p0310

r0331[0...2] Rated magnetization current / Rated magnet. cur.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays calculated magnetizing current of motor in [A].

r0332[0...2] Rated power factor / Rated power factor

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: DDS
Description: Displays power factor for motor.
Dependency: Value is calculated internally if P0308 (rated motor cosPhi) set to 0; otherwise, value entered in P0308 is displayed.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-45

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0333[0...2] Rated motor torque / Rated motor torque

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays rated motor torque.

Dependency: Value is calculated from P0307 (rated motor power) and P0311 (rated motor speed).

p0307[kW ] ⋅ 1000
r 0333[Nm] =
p0311[1/ min]
⋅ 2π
60

p0335[0...2] Motor cooling / Motor cooling

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Selects motor cooling system used.
Values: 0: Self-cooled: Shaft mounted fan attached motor (IC410 or IC411)
1: Force-cooled: Separately powered cooling fan (IC416)
2: Self-cooled and internal fan
3: Force-cooled and internal fan

p0340[0...2] Calculation of motor parameters / Calc of mot.params

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Calculates various motor parameters (see table below):
Values: 0: No calculation
1: Complete parameterization
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit data
3: Calculation of V/f and vector control data
4: Calculation of controller settings only
Note: This parameter is required during commissioning to optimize inverter performance. If there is a large mismatch in
Power ratings of Inverter to Motor it is possible that r0384 and r0386 may not be calculated correct. In these cases
use P1910.
When transferring parameter p0340, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these
calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

1-46 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

P0340 = 1 P0340 = 2 P0340 = 3 P0340 = 4

P0341[3] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] x
P0342[3] Total/motor inertia ratio x
P0344[3] Motor weight x
P0346[3] Magnetization time x x
P0347[3] Demagnetization time x x
P0350[3] Stator resistance (line-to-line) x x
P0352[3] Cable resistance x x
P0354[3] Rotor resistance x x
P0356[3] Stator leakage inductance x x
P0358[3] Rotor leakage inductance x x
P0360[3] Main inductance x x
P0362[3] Magnetizing curve flux 1 x x
P0363[3] Magnetizing curve flux 2 x x
P0364[3] Magnetizing curve flux 3 x x
P0365[3] Magnetizing curve flux 4 x x
P0366[3] Magnetizing curve imag 1 x x
P0367[3] Magnetizing curve imag 2 x x
P0368[3] Magnetizing curve imag 3 x x
P0369[3] Magnetizing curve imag 4 x x
P0492[3] Allowed speed difference x
P0494[3] Delay speed loss reaction x
P0625[3] Ambient motor temperature x x
P1253[3] Vdc-controller output limitation x x
P1316[3] Boost end frequency x x
P1338[3] Resonance damping gain V/f x x x
P1341[3] Imax controller integral time x x x
P1345[3] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain x x x
P1346[3] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time x x x
P1460[3] Gain speed controller x x x
P1462[3] Integral time speed controller x x x
P1470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) x x x
P1472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) x x x
P1520[3] CO: Upper torque limit x
P1521[3] CO: Lower torque limit x
P1530[3] Motoring power limitation x
P1531[3] Regenerative power limitation x
P1715[3] Gain current controller x x x
P1717[3] Integral time current controller x x x
P1764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) x x x
P1767[3] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) x x x
P2002[3] Reference current x
P2003[3] Reference torque x
P2174[3] Torque threshold M_thresh x
P2178[3] Delay time for motor pulled out x x
P2185[3] Upper torque threshold 1 x
P2187[3] Upper torque threshold 2 x
P2189[3] Upper torque threshold 3 x

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-47

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0341[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] / Inertia [kg*m^2]

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00010 1000.00000 0.00180
Description: Sets no-load inertia of motor.
Together with P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) and P1496 (scaling factor acceleration), this value produces the
acceleration torque (r1518), which can be added to any additional torque produced from a BICO source (P1511),
and incorporated in the torque control function.
Note: The result of P0341 * P0342 is included in the speed controller calculation.
P0341 * P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) = total motor inertia
P1496 (scaling factor acceleration) = 100 % activates acceleration pre-control for the speed controller and calcu-
lates the torque from P0341 (motor inertia) and P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor).

p0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio / Tot/mot inert.rat.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1.000 400.000 1.000
Description: Specifies ratio between total inertia (load + motor) and motor inertia.

p0344[0...2] Motor weight / Motor weight

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1.0 [kg] 6500.0 [kg] 9.4 [kg]
Description: Specifies motor weight [kg].
Note: This value is used in the motor thermal model. It is normally calculated automatically from P0340 (motor parame-
ters) but can also be entered manually.
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

r0345[0...2] Motor start-up time / Mot. start-up time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [s] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays motor start-up time.

This time corresponds to the standardized motor inertia.
The start-up time is the time taken to reach rated motor speed from standstill at acceleration with rated motor torque
(r0333).

1-48 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0346[0...2] Magnetization time / Magnetization time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets magnetization time [s], i.e. waiting time between pulse enable and start of ramp-up.
Motor magnetization builds up during this time. Magnetization time is normally calculated automatically from the
motor data and corresponds to the rotor time constant.
Notice: An excessive reduction of this time can result in insufficient motor magnetization.
Note: If boost settings are higher than 100 %, magnetization time may be reduced.
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

p0347[0...2] Demagnetization time / Demagnet. time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Changes time allowed after OFF2 / fault condition, before pulses can be re-enabled.
Notice: Not active following a normally completed ramp-down, e.g. after OFF1, OFF3 or JOG.
Overcurrent trips will occur if the time is decreased excessively.
Note: The demagnetization time is approximately 2.5 x rotor time constant in seconds.
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

p0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line) / Stator res. (L)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00001 [Ohm] 2000.00000 [Ohm] 2.00000 [Ohm]
Description: Stator resistance value in [Ohms] for connected motor (line value).
The parameter value doesn't include the cable resistance.
There are three ways to determine the value for this parameter:
1. Calculate using
- P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or
- P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (end of quick commissioning).
2. Measure using P1900 = 2 (standard motor data identification - value for stator resistance is overwritten).
Measure using P1900 = 3 (compleate motor data identification - same like setting 2; additional detection of the
saturation curve)
3. Measure manually using an Ohmmeter.
Note: Since the manually measured resistor is a line-to-line value, which includes the cable resistors, the measured value
has to be divided by two and the cable resistor of a line has to be subtracted from that value.
The value entered in P0350 (stator resistance) is the one obtained by the method last used.
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-49

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0352[0...2] Cable resistance / Cable resistance

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Ohm] 120.0 [Ohm] 0.0 [Ohm]
Description: Describes cable resistance between inverter and motor for one phase.
The value corresponds to the resistance of the cable between the inverter and the motor, relative to the rated
impedance.

p0354[0...2] Rotor resistance / Rotor resistance

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Ohm] 300.0 [Ohm] 10.0 [Ohm]
Description: Sets rotor resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification).

p0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance / Stator leak.induct

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00001 1000.00000 10.00000
Description: Sets stator leakage inductance [mH] of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification).

p0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance / Rotor leak.induct.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 1000.0 10.0
Description: Sets rotor leakage inductance [mH] of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification).

p0360[0...2] Main inductance / Main inductance

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 10000.0 10.0
Description: Sets main inductance [mH] of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value), see diagram below.
Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification).
Caution: The data of equivalent circuit relates to the star equivalent circuit.
Any data of the delta equivalent circuit available, therefore must be transformed to the star equivalent circuit before
entering into the inverter.

1-50 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0362[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 1 / Magnet.curve flux1

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: Specifies first flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the y coordinate (flux) for the first value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: P0362 < P0363 < P0364 < P0365, otherwise a linear characteristic is
applied internally.
Note: P0362 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor flux.
Rated flux = rated EMF

p0363[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 2 / Magnet.curve flux2

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 85.0 [%]
Description: Specifies second flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the y coordinate (flux) for the second value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: P0362 < P0363 < P0364 < P0365, otherwise a linear characteristic is
applied internally.
Note: P0363 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor flux.
Rated flux = rated EMF

p0364[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 3 / Magnet.curve flux3

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: Specifies third flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the y coordinate (flux) for the third value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: P0362 < P0363 < P0364 < P0365, otherwise a linear characteristic is
applied internally.
Note: P0364 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor flux.
Rated flux = rated EMF

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-51

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0365[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 4 / Magnet.curve flux4

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
Description: Specifies fourth flux value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated motor voltage (P0304).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the y coordinate (flux) for the fourth value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values: P0362 < P0363 < P0364 < P0365, otherwise a linear characteristic is
applied internally.
Note: P0365 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor flux.
Rated flux = rated EMF

p0366[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 1 / Magnet.curve imag1

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Specifies first magnetizing current value of the saturation characteristic in [%] relative to the rated magnetizing cur-
rent (P0331).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the first value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current).
The following applies for the magnetizing currents: P0366 < P0367 < P0368 < P0369, otherwise a linear character-
istic is applied internally.

p0367[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 2 / Magnet.curve imag2

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: Specifies second magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current
(P0331).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the second value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current).
The following applies for the magnetizing currents: P0366 < P0367 < P0368 < P0369, otherwise a linear character-
istic is applied internally.

1-52 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0368[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 3 / Magnet.curve imag3

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 135.0 [%]
Description: Specifies third magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current
(P0331).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the third value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current).
The following applies for the magnetizing currents: P0366 < P0367 < P0368 < P0369, otherwise a linear character-
istic is applied internally.

p0369[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 4 / Magnet.curve imag4

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 170.0 [%]
Description: Specifies fourth magnetizing current value of saturation characteristic in [%] relative to rated magnetizing current
(P0331).
The saturation characteristic is defined using 4 points (P0362 - P0365, P0366 - P0369). This parameter specifies
the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the fourth value pair of the characteristic.
Dependency: Affects P0320 (motor magnetizing current).
The following applies for the magnetizing currents: P0366 < P0367 < P0368 < P0369, otherwise a linear character-
istic is applied internally.

r0370[0...2] Stator resistance [%] / Stator res. [%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays standardized stator resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].

r0372[0...2] Cable resistance [%] / Cable res. [%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays standardized cable resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value)in [%].
It is estimated to be 20 % of the stator resistance.

r0373[0...2] Rated stator resistance [%] / Rated stat.res.[%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays rated stator resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].

r0374[0...2] Rotor resistance [%] / Rotor res. [%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays standardized rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-53

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0376[0...2] Rated rotor resistance [%] / Rated rot. res.[%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays rated rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].

r0377[0...2] Total leakage reactance [%] / Tot.leak.react.[%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays standardized total leakage reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].
Note: If an output filter is selected the inductance of the filter (p0233) is added to the leakage inductance
(the value is not stored in p0233 for Siemens filters).

r0382[0...2] Main reactance [%] / Main reactance [%]

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays standardized main reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].

r0384[0...2] Rotor time constant / Rotor time const.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [ms] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays calculated rotor time constant [ms].

r0386[0...2] Total leakage time constant / Total leak. Tconst

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [ms] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays total leakage time constant of motor.

r0394 CO: Stator resistance IGBT [%] / Stat. res.IGBT

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays stator resistance calculated in [%] from IGBT ON voltage and current amplitude.

r0395 CO: Total stator resistance [%] / Total stat.res

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays stator resistance of motor as [%] of combined stator/cable resistance.

r0396 CO: Act. rotor resistance / Act rotor res.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays (adapted) rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].
Notice: Values greater than 25 % tend to produce excessive motor slip.
Check rated motor speed [rpm] value (P0311).

1-54 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0400[0...2] Select encoder type / Select enc. type

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 12 0
Description: Selects encoder type (number of encoder channels).
Values: 0: Disabled
2: Quadrature encoder without zero pulse
12: Quadrature encoder with zero pulse
Caution: When using Vector Control with encoder-feedback, the direction of rotation of the encoder and motor must be the
same. If this is not achieved, then the functional operation of the Vector Control will not be guaranteed (positive
instead of negative feedback).
Extreme care must therefore be taken with respect to the connection of the motor to the inverter as well as the cor-
rect connection of the encoder to the inverter. Motor and encoder must not be incorrectly wired up !
P0400 = 12 (quadrature encoder and zero pulse) will not detect encoder loss on Zero pulse. Zero pulse is only used
to synchronise measured angle.
Note: If the encoder is enabled (P0400 > 0) and the motor holding brake is enabled (P1215 > 0), then the following should
be observed in order to stop encoder loss trips when the brake is applied:
• The delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P0494 > P1216 and P0494 > P1217 )
• The delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P2178 > P1216 and P2178 > P1217 )
• The allowed speed difference P0492 should be > f_min P1080

r0403.0...4 CO/BO: Encoder status word / Enc. StatWd

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Displays status word of encoder (in bit format).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Encoder active Yes No -
01 Encoder error Yes No -
02 Signal o.k. Yes No -
03 Encoder Low Speed Loss Yes No -
04 Speed measurement using one encoder Yes No -
pulse edge

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-55

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0405[0...2] Enables selection of pulse types / Enables pulse type

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: Enables selection of various pulse types. Only bits 04 and 05 are used.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
04 invert Z-pulse Yes No -
05 Z-pulse = Z-pulse & A-pulse & B-pulse Yes No -

p0408[0...2] Encoder pulses per revolution / Enc pulses per rev

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

2 20000 1024
Description: Specifies the number of encoder pulses per revolution.
Note: The encoder resolution (pulses per revolution P0408) which may be entered will be limited by the max. pulse fre-
quency of the encoder circuits (f_max = 300 kHz).
The following equation calculates the encoder frequency depending on the encoder resoulution and the rotational
speed (rpm). The encoder frequency has to be less than the max. pulse frequency:

p0408 x rpm
fmax > f =
60

p0410[0...2] Reverses internal direction sense / Rev dir sense

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Reverses internal direction sense of the encoder signal. This does the same thing as switching the ENC_A and
ENC_B signals.
Values: 0: Encoder Normal Rotation
1: Encoder Reverse Rotation

r0485 CO: Encoder counter value / Encoder count val.

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S DP Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Shows the internal counter value of the encoder pulses.

1-56 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0491[0...2] Reaction on speed signal loss / Select enc. type

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Selects reaction on loss of speed signal.
Values: 0: Trip the drive
1: Warn and switch to SLVC if in VC

p0492[0...2] Allowed speed difference / Allowed speed dif

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 100.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz]
Description: Parameter P0492 is used for low and high speed encoder loss detection (fault: F0090).
High speed encoder loss detection:
This condition occurs when the allowed frequency and the allowed difference of the speed signals between sam-
ples, set in P0492 is exceeded.
• f_act and f(t_2) - f(t_1) > P0492
Low speed encoder loss detection:
This condition occurs when the actual frequency is < P0492 when encoder loss occurs.
• Condition 1:
- r0061 = 0 and torque limit and then
- r0061 = 0 with setpoint frequency > 0 for time > P0494
• Condition 2:
- Act. freq. < P0492 and f(t_2) < P0492 and ASIC detect channel B loss
Dependency: This parameter is updated when motor start-up time P0345 is changed or when a speedloop optimisation is per-
formed (P1960 = 1).
There is a fixed delay of 40 ms before acting upon loss of encoder at high speeds.
Caution: P0492 = 0 (disabled):
When allowed speed difference is set to 0, both the high speed and low speed encoder loss detection are disabled,
thus encoder loss will not be detected.
If encoder loss detection is disabled and encoder loss occurs, then operation of the motor may become unstable.
Consideration also needs to be given to drive operation when the drive is operating in vector speed control or vector
torque control mode (P1300 = 21, 23) and the drive attempts to start the motor while it has a failed encoder.
Under these circumstances, the drive uses parameters P1520 and P1521 (the upper and lower torque limits
respectively) to decide when to trip.
In the case of a very low frequency set point, it may take the drive a considerable period to reach this condition, dur-
ing which time the drive can lose orientation.
Note: If the encoder is enabled (P0400 > 0) and the motor holding brake is enabled (P1215 > 0) then in order to stop
encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, the allowed speed difference P0492 should be > f_min (P1080).
The Factory setting depends on motor power.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-57

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0494[0...2] Delay speed loss reaction / Dly speed loss rec

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Used for low speed encoder loss detection.
If the motor shaft speed is less than the value in P0492 then encoder loss is detected using a low speed encoder
loss detection algorithm.
This parameter selects the delay between loss of encoder at low speed and reaction to the encoder loss.
Dependency: This parameter is updated when motor start-up time P0345 is changed or when a speedloop optimisation is per-
formed (P1960 = 1).
Caution: P0494 = 0 (disabled):
When the delay in P0494 is set to 0, then low speed encoder loss detection is disabled and low speed encoder loss
cannot be detected (high speed encoder loss detection will still operate if P0492 > 0).
If low speed encoder loss detection is disabled and encoder should be lost at low speed, then operation of motor
may become unstable.
Note: If the encoder is enabled (P0400 > 0) and the motor holding brake is enabled (P1215 > 0), then in order to stop
encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, the delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e.
P0494 > P1216 and P494 > P1217).
The Factory setting depends on motor power.

p0500[0...2] Technological application / Techn. application

Access level: 3 P-Group: Applications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Selects technological application.
Sets control mode (P1300).
Values: 0: High overload
1: Pumps and fans
Dependency: See parameter P0205.

1-58 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0601[0...2] Motor temperature sensor / Motor temp. sensor

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Selects motor temperature sensor.
No sensor (P0601 = 0)
The motor temperature monitoring will be done based on the estimated value of the thermal motor model.
PTC thermistor (P0601 = 1)
The motor is monitored by the thermal motor model and additionally by the PTC thermistor, thus providing a redun-
dant system for monitoring the motor temperature.
Should the resistance value of 2000 Ohm be exceeded, the inverter trips with fault F0011 (motor overheating).
If the resistance value is below 10 Ohm, then the fault F0015 (motor temperature signal lost) is output.
This protects the motor from overheating and also from a sensor wire breakage.
KTY84 (P0601 = 2)
The temperature of the sensor (thus that of the motor windings) is written to parameter r0035. This motor tempera-
ture is then additionally calculated via the thermal motor model.
If the electric circuit to the KTY84 sensor is open or if a short circuit occurs, fault F0015 (motor temperature signal
lost) is generated.
Values: 0: No sensor
1: PTC thermistor
2: KTY84
4: ThermoClick sensor
Dependency: The motor overheating warning threshold needs to be assigned with parameter P0604 (factory setting: 130 °C).
This warning threshold depends on the motor's thermal class.
The motor overheating disturbance threshold is automatically set by the inverter at 10 % higher than the tempera-
ture declared in parameter P0604. In parameter P0610 is set, how the inverter reacts on overtemperature.

p0604[0...2] Threshold motor temperature / Thresh. mot. temp.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
Description: Enters warning threshold for motor temperature protection.
The trip temperature defined is always 10 % higher than the warning threshold P0604. When actual motor temper-
ature exeeds trip temperature then inverter trips as defined in P0610.
Dependency: This value should be at least 40°C higher than the motor ambient temperature P0625.
Note: Default value depends on P0300 (select motor type).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-59

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0610[0...2] Motor I2t temperature reaction / I2t temp. reaction

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 2
Description: Defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold.
Values: 0: No reaction, warning only
1: Warning and Imax reduction (result: red. freq., trip (F0011))
2: Warning and trip (F0011)
Dependency: Trip level = P0604 (motor temperature threshold) * 110 %
Note: The purpose of motor I2t is to calculate or measure (KTY84) the motor temperature and disable the inverter if the
motor is in danger of overheating.
I2t operation:
The measured motor current is displayed in r0027. The motor temperature in °C is displayed in r0035.
This temperature is derived either from a KTY84 temperature sensor mounted in the motor, or from a calculated
value. The value from the KTY84 is used only when P0601 = 2; in all other cases (including motor temperature sig-
nal lost) the calculated value is used.
The reaction to the warning can be changed from this default using P0610.
Parameter r0035 is particularly useful to monitor if the calculated motor temperature is rising excessively.

p0621[0...2] Motor temp. ident after restart / Mot.temp ident.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Starts the motor temperature identification after power on or start up.
Values: 0: No identification
1: Temperature identification only after power on
2: Temperature identification after every power on
Note: It is necessary to run the motor data identification before using the motor temperature identification. If that wasn't
done the results of the motor temperature identifications are wrong.

p0622[0...2] Magnetizing time for temp id after start up / Magnet. t temp id

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [ms] 20000.000 [ms] 0.000 [ms]
Description: Specifies the magnetization time for stator resistance identification.
Note: This parameter will be set as a result of the motor data identification according to the identified rotor time constant
r1913.

r0623[0...2] CO: Display for the identified stator resistance / Act. stator resist
Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Ohm] Data set: DDS

Description: Display of the actual identified stator resistance after temperature identification.

1-60 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0625[0...2] Ambient motor temperature / Ambient mot. temp.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-40.0 [°C] 80.0 [°C] 20.0 [°C]
Description: Ambient temperature of motor at time of motor data identification.
It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold.
A motor identification has to be made after changing the value.

p0626[0...2] Overtemperature stator iron / Overtemp.stat.iron

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 50.0 [°C]
Description: Overtemperature of stator iron.
Note: Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises).
Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered.

p0627[0...2] Overtemperature stator winding / Overtemp.stat.wind

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 80.0 [°C]
Description: Overtemperature of the stator winding.
It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold.
A motor identification has to be made after changing the value.
Note: Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises).
Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered.

p0628[0...2] Overtemperature rotor winding / Overtemp.rot. wind

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 100.0 [°C]
Description: Overtemperature of the rotor winding.
Note: Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises).
Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered.

r0630[0...2] CO: Motor model ambient temperature / Mot. model amb. te

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays ambient temperature of motor mass model.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-61

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0631[0...2] CO: Stator iron temperature / Stat.iron temp

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays iron temperature of motor mass model.

r0632[0...2] CO: Stator winding temperature / Stat.wind.temp

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays stator winding temperature of motor mass model.

r0633[0...2] CO: Rotor winding temperature / Rot. wind.temp

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°C] Data set: DDS

Description: Displays rotor winding temperature of motor mass model.

p0640[0...2] Motor overload factor [%] / Motor ovl fact [%]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 200.0 [%]
Description: Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency: Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower.

min (r0209, 4 ⋅ p0305)

p0640 max = ⋅ 100
p0305

Note: Changes to P640 will be effective only after the next off state.
See function diagram for current limitation.

p0700[0...2] Selection of command source / Command source sel

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 5 2
Description: Selects digital command source.
Values: 0: Factory default setting
1: BOP (keypad)
2: Terminal
4: USS on RS232
5: USS on RS485
Dependency: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P0701, ... (function of DI), P0731, P0732, P0733, P0800, P0801, P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849,
P0852, P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1074, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140,
P1141, P1142, P1230, P1477, P1501, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2200, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2226,
P2228, P2235, P2236
Caution: Be aware, by changing of parameter P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value.

1-62 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0700[0...2] Selection of command source / Command source sel

CU240S DP Access level: 1 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 6 6
Description: Selects digital command source.
Values: 0: Factory default setting
1: BOP (keypad)
2: Terminal
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus
Dependency: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P0701, ... (function of DI), P0731, P0732, P0733, P0800, P0801, P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849,
P0852, P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1074, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140,
P1141, P1142, P1230, P1477, P1501, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2200, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2226,
P2228, P2235, P2236
Caution: Be aware, by changing of parameter P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value.

p0701[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
PM240 Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 1
Description: Selects function of digital input 0.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
• P0700 command source or
• P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or
• P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
Note: "ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1).
Configuring DI1 with P0702 = 1 will disable DI0 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves as
a command source.
"ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another digital input.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-63

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0701[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 1
Description: Selects function of digital input 0.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
• P0700 command source or
• P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or
• P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
Note: "ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1).
Configuring DI1 with P0702 = 1 will disable DI0 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves as
a command source.
"ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another digital input.

1-64 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0701[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 0.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
• P0700 command source or
• P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or
• P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
Note: "ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1).
Configuring DI1 with P0702 = 1 will disable DI0 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves as
a command source.
"ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another digital input.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-65

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0701[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 0.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency: Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
• P0700 command source or
• P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or
• P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
Note: "ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1).
Configuring DI1 with P0702 = 1 will disable DI0 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves as
a command source.
"ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another digital input.

1-66 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0702[0...2] Function of digital input 1 / Function of DI1

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
PM240 Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 12
Description: Selects function of digital input 1.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input0).

p0702[0...2] Function of digital input 1 / Function of DI1

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
PM250, PM260 Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 12
Description: Selects function of digital input 1.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-67

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0702[0...2] Function of digital input 1 / Function of DI1

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 1.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input0).

p0702[0...2] Function of digital input 1 / Function of DI1

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 1.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input0).

1-68 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0703[0...2] Function of digital input 2 / Function of DI2

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 9
Description: Selects function of digital input 2.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0703[0...2] Function of digital input 2 / Function of DI2

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 9
Description: Selects function of digital input 2.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-69

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0704[0...2] Function of digital input 3 / Function of DI3

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 15
Description: Selects function of digital input 3.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0704[0...2] Function of digital input 3 / Function of DI3

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 15
Description: Selects function of digital input 3.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

1-70 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0705[0...2] Function of digital input 4 / Function of DI4

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 16
Description: Selects function of digital input 4.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0705[0...2] Function of digital input 4 / Function of DI4

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 16
Description: Selects function of digital input 4.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-71

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0706[0...2] Function of digital input 5 / Function of DI5

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 17
Description: Selects function of digital input 5.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0706[0...2] Function of digital input 5 / Function of DI5

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 17
Description: Selects function of digital input 5.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

1-72 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0707[0...2] Function of digital input 6 / Function of DI6

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 18
Description: Selects function of digital input 6.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0707[0...2] Function of digital input 6 / Function of DI6

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 18
Description: Selects function of digital input 6.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-73

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0708[0...2] Function of digital input 7 / Function of DI7

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 7.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0708[0...2] Function of digital input 7 / Function of DI7

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input 7.
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

1-74 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0709[0...2] Function of digital input 8 / Function of DI8

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

p0709[0...2] Function of digital input 8 / Function of DI8

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-75

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0712[0...2] Analog / digital input 0 / Ana/digi input 0

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input AI0 (via analog input)
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).
Signals above 4 V are active, signals below 1,6 V are inactive.

p0712[0...2] Analog / digital input 0 / Ana/digi input 0

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input AI0 (via analog input)
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).
Signals above 4 V are active, signals below 1,6 V are inactive.

1-76 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0713[0...2] Analog / digital input 1 / Ana/digi input 1

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input AI1 (via analog input)
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
25: DC brake enable
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).
Signals above 4 V are active, signals below 1,6 V are inactive.

p0713[0...2] Analog / digital input 1 / Ana/digi input 1

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Selects function of digital input AI1 (via analog input)
Values: 0: Digital input disabled
1: ON/OFF1
2: ON reverse /OFF1
3: OFF2 - coast to standstill
4: OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9: Fault acknowledge
10: JOG right
11: JOG left
12: Reverse
13: MOP up (increase frequency)
14: MOP down (decrease frequency)
15: Fixed frequency selector bit0
16: Fixed frequency selector bit1
17: Fixed frequency selector bit2
18: Fixed frequency selector bit3
27: Enable PID
29: External trip
33: Disable additional freq setpoint
99: Enable BICO parameterization
Note: See P0701 (function of digital input 0).
Signals above 4 V are active, signals below 1,6 V are inactive.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-77

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0719[0...2] Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. / Cmd.&freq.setp.sel

CU240E Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 57 0
Description: Central switch to select control command source for inverter.
Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/set-
point profiles.
Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently.
The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source.
Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232
5: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS485
7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
10: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
13: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency
14: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232
15: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS485
17: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter
41: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232
45: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS485
47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
50: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = BICO parameter
51: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS232
55: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = USS on RS485
57: Cmd = USS on RS485 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
Dependency: P0719 has higher priority than P0700 and P1000.
If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not the setpoint source), P0844 / P0848 (first source of OFF2 /
OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845 / P0849 (second source of OFF2 / OFF3) apply and the OFF commands
are obtained via the particular source defined.
BICO connections made previously remain unchanged.
Notice: Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2.
Settings in P0719 (contrary to P0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P0701, P0702, ...)

1-78 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0719[0...2] Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. / Cmd.&freq.setp.sel

CU240S DP Access level: 4 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 67 0
Description: Central switch to select control command source for inverter.
Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/set-
point profiles.
Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently.
The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source.
Values: 0: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on RS232
6: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fieldbus
7: Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
10: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
13: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency
14: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on RS232
16: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fieldbus
17: Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
40: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = BICO parameter
41: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = USS on RS232
46: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Fieldbus
47: Cmd = USS on RS232 Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
60: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = BICO parameter
61: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = MOP setpoint
62: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint
63: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fixed frequency
64: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = USS on RS232
66: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Fieldbus
67: Cmd = Fieldbus Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
Dependency: P0719 has higher priority than P0700 and P1000.
If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not the setpoint source), P0844 / P0848 (first source of OFF2 /
OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845 / P0849 (second source of OFF2 / OFF3) apply and the OFF commands
are obtained via the particular source defined.
BICO connections made previously remain unchanged.
USS on RS485 is not supported.
Notice: Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2.
Settings in P0719 (contrary to P0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P0701, P0702, ...)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-79

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0720 Number of digital inputs / Number of DI

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of digital inputs.

r0722.0...12 CO/BO: Binary input values / Bin.inp.val

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN-F
Description: Displays status of digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Digital input 0 Yes No -
01 Digital input 1 Yes No -
02 Digital input 2 Yes No -
03 Digital input 3 Yes No -
04 Digital input 4 Yes No -
05 Digital input 5 Yes No -
11 Digital input AI0 Yes No -
12 Digital input AI1 Yes No -
Note: Segment is lit when signal is active.

r0722.0...12 CO/BO: Binary input values / Bin.inp.val

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
Description: Displays status of digital inputs.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Digital input 0 Yes No -
01 Digital input 1 Yes No -
02 Digital input 2 Yes No -
03 Digital input 3 Yes No -
04 Digital input 4 Yes No -
05 Digital input 5 Yes No -
06 Digital input 6 Yes No -
07 Digital input 7 Yes No -
08 Digital input 8 Yes No -
11 Digital input AI0 Yes No -
12 Digital input AI1 Yes No -
Note: Segment is lit when signal is active.

p0724 Debounce time for digital inputs / Debounce time: DI

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 3
Description: Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs.
Values: 0: No debounce time
1: 2.5 ms debounce time
2: 8.2 ms debounce time
3: 12.3 ms debounce time

1-80 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0725 PNP / NPN digital inputs / PNP/NPN DI

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 1
Description: Switches between active high (PNP) and active low (NPN).
This is valid for all digital inputs simultaneously.
The following is valid by using the internal supply:
Values: 0: NPN mode ==> low active
1: PNP mode ==> high active

p0727[0...2] Selection of 2/3-wire method / 2/3-wire selection

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Determines the control method using the terminals. This parameter allows the selection of the control philosophy.
The control philosophies exclude each other.
Values: 0: Siemens (start/dir)
1: 2-wire (fwd/rev)
2: 3-wire (fwd/rev)
3: 3-wire (start/dir)
Note: Where:
• P denotes Pulse
• FWD denotes FORWARD
• REV denotes REVERSE
When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the setting for the digital inputs (P0701 - P0704) are
redefined as follows:

Redefined Digital Inputs

Settings P0727 = 0 P0727 = 1 P0727 = 2 P0727 = 3

P0701 - P0704 (Siemens Standard (2-wire Control) (3-wire Control) (3-wire Control)
Control)
1 ON/OFF1 ON_FWD STOP ON_PULSE
2 ON_REV/OFF1 ON_REV FWDP OFF1/HOLD
12 REV REV REVP REV

Regarding the use of fixed frequencies see P1000 and P1001.

r0730 Number of digital outputs / Number of DO

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of digital outputs (relays).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-81

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0731[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 0 / Fct. of DO0

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52.3
Description: Defines source of digital output 0.
Notice: An inverse logic can be realised by inverting the digital outputs in P0748.
Note: Output of fault bit 52.3 is inverted on digital output.
Monitor functions ==> see parameter r0052, r0053
Motor holding brake ==> see parameter P1215
DC-Brake ==> see parameter P1232, P1233

p0731[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 0 / Fct. of DO0

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
PM260 Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52.3
Description: Defines source of digital output 0.
Notice: An inverse logic can be realised by inverting the digital outputs in P0748.
Note: Output of fault bit 52.3 is inverted on digital output.
Monitor functions ==> see parameter r0052, r0053
Motor holding brake ==> see parameter P1215

p0732[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 1 / Fct. of DO1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52.7
Description: Defines source of digital output 1.

p0733[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 2 / Fct. of DO2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source of digital output 2.

1-82 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0747.0...2 CO/BO: State of digital outputs / State DOs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of digital outputs (also includes inversion of digital outputs via P0748).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Digital output 0 energized Yes No -
01 Digital output 1 energized Yes No -
02 Digital output 2 energized Yes No -
Dependency: Bit = 0 signal: Contacts open
Bit = 1 signal: Contacts closed

p0748 Invert digital outputs / Invert DOs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: Defines high and low states of relay for a given function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Invert digital output 0 Yes No -
01 Invert digital output 1 Yes No -
02 Invert digital output 2 Yes No -

r0750 Number of AIs / Number of AIs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of analog inputs available.

r0751.0...9 CO/BO: Status word of AI / AI status Wd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of analog input.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Signal lost on AI0 Yes No -
01 Signal lost on AI1 Yes No -
08 No signal lost on AI0 Yes No -
09 No signal lost on AI1 Yes No -

r0752[0...1] Act. input of AI [V] or [mA] / Act.AI inp.[V/mA]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays smoothed analog input value in volts or milliamps before the scaling block.
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)

p0753[0...1] Smooth time AI / Smooth time AI

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 3 [ms]
Description: Defines filter time (PT1 filter) in [ms] for analog input.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-83

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)

[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Note: Increasing this time (smooth) reduces jitter but slows down response to the analog input.
P0753 = 0 : No filtering

r0754[0...1] Act. AI value after scaling [%] / AI after scal.[%]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Shows smoothed value of analog input in [%] after scaling block.
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Dependency: P0757 to P0760 define range (AI scaling).

r0755[0...1] CO: Act. AI after scal. [4000h] / CO:AI scal[4000h]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Integer16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax (ASP = analog setpoint).
Analog setpoint (ASP) from the analog scaling block can vary from min. analog setpoint (ASPmin) to a max. analog
setpoint (ASPmax).
The largest magnitude (value without sign) of ASPmin and ASPmax defines the scaling of 16384.
By associating parameter r0755 with an internal value (e.g. frequency setpoint), a scaled value is calculated inter-
nally by the inverter.
The frequency value is calculated using the following equation:

ASPmax
AI
V
10 V
ASPmin

r0755 [Hex] r0755 [Hz]

r0755 [Hex] max ( ASPmax , ASP min )

r0755 [Hz] = ⋅ p2000 ⋅
4000 [Hex] 100%
Example: Case a:
ASPmin = 300 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 300 %.
This parameter will vary from 5461 to 16384.
Case b:
ASPmin = -200 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 200 %.
This parameter will vary from -16384 to +8192.

4000 h = max( ASPmax , ASPmin )

% %
4000 h 16384 dez
ASPmax 300 %
300 % a

ASPmin ASPmax
100 % 100 %
0 V 0 V
10 V mA 10 V mA
20 mA b 20 mA

-200 % ASPmin
-200 % 7FFF h -16383 dez

1-84 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)

[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Note: This value is used as an input to analog BICO connectors.
ASPmax represents the highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V).
ASPmin represents the lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V).
See parameters P0757 to P0760 (AI scaling)

p0756[0...1] Type of AI / Type of AI

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Defines type of analog input and also enables analog input monitoring.
To switch over from voltage to current analog input it is not sufficient to merely modify parameter P0756.
Rather, the general I/O DIP switches must also be set to the correct position.
The DIP settings are as follows:
• OFF = voltage input (10 V)
• ON = current input (20 mA)
Allocation of DIPs to analog inputs is as follows:
• DIP on left (DIP 1) = Analog input 0
• DIP on right (DIP 2) = Analog input 1
Values: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 to +10 V)
1: Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 to 20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V to +10 V)
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Dependency: Function disabled if analog scaling block programmed to output negative setpoints (see P0757 to P0760).
Notice: When monitoring is enabled and a deadband defined (P0761), a fault condition will be generated (F0080) if the ana-
log input voltage falls below 50 % of the deadband voltage.
It is not possible to select the bipolar voltage for analog input 1.
Note: See P0757 to P0760 (AI scaling).

p0757[0...1] Value x1 of AI scaling / Value x1:AI scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-20 20 0
Description: Parameters P0757 - P0760 configure the input scaling.
x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2 which determine the straight line.
The value x2 of AI scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of AI scaling P0757.
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Notice: • Analog setpoints represent a [%] of the normalized frequency in P2000.
• Analog setpoints may be larger than 100 %.
• ASPmax represents highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V or 20 mA).
• ASPmin represents lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V or 20 mA).
• Default values provide a scaling of 0 V or 0 mA = 0 %, and 10 V or 20 mA = 100 %.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-85

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0758[0...1] Value y1 of AI scaling / Value y1:AI scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.9 [%] 99999.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets value of y1 in [%] as described in P0757 (AI scaling)
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be gen-
erated.

p0759[0...1] Value x2 of AI scaling / Value x2:AI scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-20 20 10
Description: Sets value of x2 as described in P0757 (AI scaling).
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Notice: The value x2 of AI scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of AI scaling P0757.

p0760[0...1] Value y2 of AI scaling / Value y2:AI scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.9 [%] 99999.9 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets value of y2 in [%] as described in P0757 (AI scaling).
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be gen-
erated.

p0761[0...1] Width of AI deadband / AI deadband width

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 20 0
Description: Defines width of deadband on analog input.

1-86 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Example: The below example produces a 2 to 10 V, 0 to 50 Hz analog input (AI value 2 to 10 V, 0 to 50 Hz):
• P2000 = 50 Hz
• P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 %
• P0757 = 2 V P0758 = 0 %
• P0761 = 2 V
• P0756 = 0 or 1
The below example produces a 0 to 10 V analog input (-50 to +50 Hz) with center zero and a "holding point" 0.2 V
wide (0.1 V to each side of center, AI value 0 to 10 V, -50 to +50 Hz):
• P2000 = 50 Hz
• P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 %
• P0757 = 2 V P0758 = -75 %
• P0761 = 0.1 V
• P0756 = 0 or 1
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Notice: Deadband starts from 0 V to value of P0761, if both values of P0758 and P0760 (y coordinates of AI scaling) are
positive or negative respectively.
However, deadband is active in both directions from point of intersection (x axis with AI scaling curve), if sign of
P0758 and P0760 are opposite.
Note: P0761[x] = 0 : No deadband active.
Min. frequency P1080 should be zero when using center zero setup.
There is no hysteresis at the end of the deadband.

p0762[0...1] Delay for loss of signal action / Delay on sig. loss

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Defines time delay between loss of analog setpoint and appearance of fault code F0080.
Index: [0] = Analog input 0 (AI0)
[1] = Analog input 1 (AI1)
Note: Expert users can choose the desired reaction to F0080 (default is OFF2).

r0770 Number of AO / Number of AO

Access level: 3 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of analog outputs available.

p0771[0...1] CI: AO / AO
Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 21[0]
Description: Defines function of the analog output.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-87

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0773[0...1] Smooth time AO / Smooth time AO

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 2 [ms]
Description: Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal.
This parameter enables smoothing for AO using a PT1 filter.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)
Dependency: P0773 = 0: Deactivates filter.

r0774[0...1] Act. AO value [V] or [mA] / Act.AO val.[V/mA]

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Shows value of analog output after filtering and scaling.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

p0775[0...1] Permit absolute value / Enable ab. value

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Decides if the absolute value of the analog output is used. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute value to
be outputed. If the value was originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

1-88 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0776[0...1] Type of AO / Type of AO

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Defines type of analog output.
Values: 0: Current output
1: Voltage output
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)
Note: Analog Output 0 can be switched to a voltage output with a range 0...10 V.
Analog Output 1 is only a current output. By connecting an external resistor of 500 Ohm to the terminals a voltage
output with a range of 0...10 V can be created.

p0777[0...1] Value x1 of AO scaling / Value x1:AO scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.0 [%] 99999.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Defines x1 output characteristic in [%].
Scaling block is responsible for adjustment of output value defined in P0771 (AO connector input).
x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2 which determine the straight line. The two points P1
(x1, y1) and P2 (x2, y2) can be chosen freely.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)
Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (referency frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be gen-
erated.

p0778[0...1] Value y1 of AO scaling / Value y1:AO scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 20 0
Description: Defines y1 of output characteristic.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

p0779[0...1] Value x2 of AO scaling / Value x2:AO scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.0 [%] 99999.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Defines x2 of output characteristic in [%].
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)
Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (referency frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be gen-
erated.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-89

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0780[0...1] Value y2 of AO scaling / Value y2:AO scal.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 20 20
Description: Defines y2 of output characteristic.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

p0781[0...1] Width of AO deadband / AO deadband width

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 20 0
Description: Sets width of dead-band in [mA] for analog output.
Index: [0] = Analog output 0 (AO0)
[1] = Analog output 1 (AO1)

r0785.0...1 CO/BO: Status word of AO / AO stat Wd

Access level: 2 P-Group: Terminals Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of analog output.

Bit 0 indicates that the value of analog output 0 is negative.
Bit 1 indicates that the value of analog output 1 is negative.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Analog output 0 negative Yes No -
01 Analog output 1 negative Yes No -

p0800[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 0 / Dwnl.par.set 0

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source of command to start download of parameter set 0 from attached OP.
The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source, the last digit refers to the bit setting for
that parameter.
Note: Signal of digital input:
0 = No download
1 = Start download parameter set 0 from OP.

1-90 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0801[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 1 / Dwnl.par.set 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines sources of command to start download of parameter set 1 from attached OP.
The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source, the last digit refers to the bit setting for
that parameter.
Note: Signal of digital input:
0 = No download
1 = Start download parameter set 1 from OP.

p0802 Transfer data from EEPROM / Transf.Drive->Ext

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Transfers values from drive to External device when none 0.
Parameter P0010 must be set to 30 for this to be possible.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Start OP Transfer
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.

p0802 Transfer data from EEPROM / Transf.Drive->Ext

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Transfers values from drive to External device when none 0.
Parameter P0010 must be set to 30 for this to be possible.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Start OP Transfer
2: Start MMC Transfer
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.
Ensure that enough space exists on the MMC card before transferring data (8kb).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-91

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0803 Transfer data to EEPROM / Transf.Ext->Drive

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Transfers values from External to drive when none 0.
Parameter P0010 must be set to 30 for this to be possible.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Start OP Transfer
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.

p0803 Transfer data to EEPROM / Transf.Ext->Drive

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Transfers values from External to drive when none 0.
Parameter P0010 must be set to 30 for this to be possible.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Start OP Transfer
2: Start MMC Transfer
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.

p0804 Select Clone file / Select Clone file

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 99 0
Description: Select clone file to up/down load.
if P0804 = 0 then file name is clone00.bin
if P0804 = 1 then file name is clone01.bin
etc.

p0806 BI: Inhibit panel access / Inhibit panel acce

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Binector input to lock control panel access through external client.

1-92 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0807.0 BO: Displays client access / Displays client ac

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Binector output to display whether command and setpoint source is connected to an external client.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Master control active Yes No -

p0809[0...2] Copy Command Dataset (CDS) / Copy CDS

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Calls 'Copy Command Dataset (CDS)' function.
The list of all Command Datasets (CDS) parameters is shown in Section 1.3 of this Parameter List (PLI).
Example: Copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0809[0] = 0 Copy from CDS0
P0809[1] = 2 Copy to CDS2
P0809[2] = 1 Start copy
Index: [0] = Copy from CDS
[1] = Copy to CDS
[2] = Start copy
Note: Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function.

p0810 BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) / CDS bit 0

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Command Dataset (CDS).
The actual selected Command Dataset (CDS) is displayed in parameter r0054.15 (CDS bit 0) and r0055.15 (CDS
bit 1).
The actual active Command Dataset (CDS) is displayed in parameter r0050.
Example: Typical procedure for CDS switch-over:
• CDS0: Command source via terminal and setpoint source via analog input (AI)
• CDS1: Command source via USS on RS232 and setpoint source via MOP
• CDS switch-over takes place via digital input 3 (DI3)
Steps:
1. Commissioning of inverter / drive
2. CDS0 set parameters (P0700[0] = 2 and P1000[0] = 2)
3. Connect P0810 (P0811 if necessary) with the source of CDS switch-over (P0704[0] = 99, P0810 = 722.3)
4. Copy CDS0 to CDS1 (P0809[0] = 0, P0809[1] = 1, P0809[2] = 2)
5. Change CDS1 parameter as required (set parameters for CDS2 [P0700 = 4 and P1000 = 1])
Note: P0811 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) set selection.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-93

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0811 BI: CDS bit 1 / CDS bit 1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which to read Bit 1 for selecting a Command Dataset (see P0810).
Note: P0810 is also relevant for Command Dataset (CDS) selection.

p0819[0...2] Copy Drive Dataset (DDS) / Copy DDS

Access level: 2 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Calls 'Copy Drive Dataset (DDS)' function.
The list of all Drive Dataset (DDS) parameters is shown in Section 1.3 of the Parameter List (PLI).
Example: Copying of all values from DDS0 to DDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0819[0] = 0 Copy from DDS0
P0819[1] = 2 Copy to DDS2
P0819[2] = 1 Start copy
Index: [0] = Copy from DDS
[1] = Copy to DDS
[2] = Start copy
Note: Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function.

p0820 BI: DDS bit 0 / DDS bit 0

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a Drive Dataset (DDS).
The actual selected Drive Dataset (DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[0].
The actual active Drive Dataset (DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[1].
Dependency: When Standard Telegram 350 and Fieldbus is selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: P0821 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection.

p0821 BI: DDS bit 1 / DDS bit 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which Bit 1 for selecting a Drive Dataset is to be read in (see parameter P0820).
Dependency: When Standard Telegram 350 and Fieldbus selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: P0820 is also relevant for Drive Dataset (DDS) selection.

1-94 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.
Dependency: For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO).
The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0).
Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P0701) before changing value of
P0840.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.
Dependency: For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO).
The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0).
Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P0701) before changing value of
P0840.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.
Dependency: For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO).
The default setting (ON right) is digital input 0 (722.0).
Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 0 is changed (via P0701) before changing value of
P0840.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-95

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

CU240S PN-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0842[0...2] BI: ON reverse/OFF1 / ON reverse/OFF1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Allows ON/OFF1 reverse command source to be selected using BICO.
In general a positive frequency setpoint is run up counterclockwise (negative frequency).

p0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines first source of OFF2.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting.
OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :
0 = Pulse disabling.
1 = Operating condition.

p0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.1
Description: Defines first source of OFF2.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting.
OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :
0 = Pulse disabling.
1 = Operating condition.

1-96 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.1
Description: Defines first source of OFF2.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting.
OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :
0 = Pulse disabling.
1 = Operating condition.

p0845[0...2] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 19.1
Description: Defines second source of OFF2.
Dependency: In contrast to P0844 (first source of OFF2), this parameter is always active.
If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
Note: OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting.
OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :
0 = Pulse disabling.
1 = Operating condition.

p0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines first source of OFF3.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-97

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.2
Description: Defines first source of OFF3.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.

p0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.2
Description: Defines first source of OFF3.
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Note: OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.

p0849[0...2] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines second source of OFF3.
Dependency: In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active.
If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
Note: OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.

p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

1-98 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.3
Description: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.3
Description: Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p0918 PROFIBUS address / PROFIBUS address

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

1 125 3
Description: Defines PROFIBUS address.
There are two ways to set the bus address:
1. via DIP switches on the control unit
2. via a user-entered value
Note: Possible PROFIBUS settings:
1 ... 125
0, 126, 127 are not allowed
The following applies when PROFIBUS is used:
All PROFIBUS DIP switches = OFF --> Address defined in P0918 is valid otherwise the DIP switch setting has pri-
ority and P0918 indicates DIP switch setting.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-99

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0922 Selection of PROFIdrive Standard Telegram / Standard Telegram

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

1 999 1
Description: Selects the PROFIdrive Standard Telegram.
Values: 1: Standard Telegram 1
20: Standard Telegram 20
350: Standard Telegram 350
352: Standard Telegram 352
353: Standard Telegram 353
354: Standard Telegram 354
999: Free BICO connection
Dependency: Setting Standard Telegram has effect only when PROFIBUS is selected.
Note: With this parameter the type of Standard Telegram is selected and the corresponding BICO connections will be
freezed during Standard Telegram.
Setting P0922 from Standard Telegram to 999, the BICO connections are kept but BICO connection can be
changed freely.
Only Standard Telegram 350 has effect on control word 2.
Change of P0922 also resets all the BICO connections corresponding to settings in P0700.
Example:
P0700 = 4, P0922 = 1, P0840 = 2032.0
Change P0840 = 722.0
Now change P0922 to other Standard Telegram : the parameter P0840 will be reset to 2032.0 (due to P0700 = 4)
When P0922 is changed the following parameters can be modified :
• For the control word 1:
P0840, P0844, P0848, P0852, P1140, P1141, P1142, P2104, P1055, P1056, P1113, P1035, P1036, P0810,
P0820
• For the control word 2:
P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P0820, P0821, P2200, P1230, P1501, P2106.
Switching to / from Standard Telegran 20 (VIK/Namur) :
Changing P0922 to 20 (Telegram 20) automatically switches P2038 to 2 (VIK/Namur).
Changing P0922 to another value switches P2038 to 0 (PROFIdrive Profil).
Changing P0922 NEVER affects P2042 (Ident number).
P2042 must be switched manually, and a power cycle must be done after.

p0927 Parameter changeable via / Change par. via

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1111 bin
Description: Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters.
This parameter allows the user to easily protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters.
Annotation: Parameter P0927 is not password protected.
Example: Default: All bits are set:
The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 BOP Yes No -
02 USS on RS232 Yes No -
03 USS on RS485 Yes No -

1-100 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0927 Parameter changeable via / Change par. via

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S PN Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1111 bin
Description: Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters.
This parameter allows the user to easily protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters.
Annotation: Parameter P0927 is not password protected.
Example: Default: All bits are set:
The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fieldbus Yes No -
01 BOP Yes No -
02 USS on RS232 Yes No -

r0944 Total number of messages / Total nb Mes

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the total number of messages available

r0947[0...63] CO: Last fault code / Last fault code

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S DP
CU240S PN
Description: Displays fault history.
Index: [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault 1
[1] = Recent fault trip --, fault 2
[2] = Recent fault trip --, fault 3
[3] = Recent fault trip --, fault 4
[4] = Recent fault trip --, fault 5
[5] = Recent fault trip --, fault 6
[6] = Recent fault trip --, fault 7
[7] = Recent fault trip --, fault 8
[8] = Recent fault trip -1, fault 1
Note: See Chapter "Faults and Warnings".

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-101

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0947[0...63] CO: Last fault code / Last fault code

CU240S DP-F Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays fault history.

Index: [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault 1
[1] = Recent fault trip --, fault 2
[2] = Recent fault trip --, fault 3
[3] = Recent fault trip --, fault 4
[4] = Recent fault trip --, fault 5
[5] = Recent fault trip --, fault 6
[6] = Recent fault trip --, fault 7
[7] = Recent fault trip --, fault 8
[8] = Recent fault trip -1, fault 1
Notice: It is possible that this parameter is empty but a fault is still indicated by the drive. The reason for this is most likely
due to a SAFE condition still existing in the system. In this situation the alarm is cleared from this parameter and it
makes no sense to go back to a READY state. First remove the reason for the SAFE condition and then the drive
will be able to change to a READY state. (SAFE condition example is "safety function is activated").
Note: See Chapter "Faults and Warnings".

r0948[0...63] Fault time / Fault time

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Time stamp to indicate when a fault has occurred.

P2114 (run-time counter) or P2115 (real time clock) are the possible sources of the time stamp.
In case of PROFIdrive Profile 3.1 or higher configuration, P0969 (system run time counter) is used.
Index: [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 1
[1] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 2
[2] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 3
[3] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 4
[4] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 5
[5] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 6
[6] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 7
[7] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 8
[8] = Recent fault trip -1, fault time 1
Note: P2115 can be updated via Starter, DriveMonitor, etc.

r0948[0...63] Fault time / Fault time

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Time stamp to indicate when a fault has occurred.
P2114 (run-time counter) or P2115 (real time clock) are the possible sources of the time stamp.
In case of PROFIdrive Profile 3.1 or higher configuration, P0969 (system run time counter) is used.
Example: The time is taken from P2115 if this parameter has been updated with the real time.
If not, P2114 is used.
If P2038 is set to PROFIdrive or Namur, P0969 is used.
Index: [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 1
[1] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 2
[2] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 3
[3] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 4
[4] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 5
[5] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 6
[6] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 7
[7] = Recent fault trip --, fault time 8
[8] = Recent fault trip -1, fault time 1
Note: P2115 can be updated via Starter, DriveMonitor, etc.

1-102 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0949[0...63] CO: Fault value / Fault value

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays drive fault values. It is for service purposes and indicate the type of fault reported.
The values are not documented. They are listed in the code where faults are reported.
Index: [0] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 1
[1] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 2
[2] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 3
[3] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 4
[4] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 5
[5] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 6
[6] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 7
[7] = Recent fault trip --, fault value 8
[8] = Recent fault trip -1, fault value 1

p0952 Total number of faults / Total faults

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Displays number of faults stored in P0947 (last fault code).
Dependency: Setting 0 resets fault history.
(changing to 0 also resets parameter r0948 - fault time).

r0964[0...6] Firmware version data / FW version data

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Firmware version data.

Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Product type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware version

r0965 PROFIdrive Profile / PROFIdrive Profile

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Identification for PROFIdrive Profile number and version.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-103

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0967 Control word 1 / Control word 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 1.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -

r0968 Status word 1 / Status word 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays active status word of inverter (in binary) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Drive ready Yes No -
01 Drive ready to run Yes No -
02 Drive running Yes No -
03 Drive fault active Yes No -
04 OFF2 active No Yes -
05 OFF3 active No Yes -
06 ON inhibit active Yes No -
07 Drive warning active Yes No -
08 Deviation setpoint / act. value No Yes -
09 PZD control Yes No -
10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No -
11 Warning: Motor current/torque limit No Yes -
12 Brake open Yes No -
13 Motor overload No Yes -
14 Motor runs right Yes No -
15 Inverter overload No Yes -

p0969 Resetable system run time counter / Rst counter

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned32
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4294967295 0
Description: Resetable system run time counter.

1-104 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0970 Factory reset / Factory reset

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: -
CU240S PN

Min Max Factory setting

0 10 0
Description: P0970 = 1 resets all parameters to their default values.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Parameter reset
10: Safety reset
Dependency: First set P0010 = 30 (factory settings).
Stop drive (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values.
Note: The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset:
• r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kWh]
• P0014 Store mode
• P0100 Europe / North America
• P0918 PROFIBUS address
• P2010 USS baud rate
• P2011 USS address
When transferring parameter p0970, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these
calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-105

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p0970 Factory reset / Factory reset

CU240S DP-F Access level: 1 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 10 0
Description: P0970 = 1 resets all parameters to their default values.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Parameter reset
10: Safety reset
Dependency: First set P0010 = 30 (factory settings).
Stop drive (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values.
Note: The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset:
• r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kWh]
• P0014 Store mode
• P0100 Europe / North America
• P0918 PROFIBUS address
• P2010 USS baud rate
• P2011 USS address
On the safety module (F-CU) setting 10 is available to reset the safety parameters to their default values. Only the
safety parameters will be reset.
Select P0010 = 30 before and set the safety password.
The reset of safety parameters including safety dynamization will take about 5 s.
When transferring parameter p0970, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these
calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

p0971 Transfer data from RAM to EEPROM / Transf.RAM->EEPROM

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Transfers values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 1.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Start transfer
Note: All values in RAM are transferred to EEPROM.
Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after successful transfer.
The storage from RAM to EEPROM is accomplished via P0971. The communications are reset, if the transfer was
successful. During the reset process communications will be interrupted. This creates the following conditions:
• PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) enters Stop mode
• Starter automatically recovers communications once they are re-established.
• BOP displays "busy"
After completion of the transfer process, the communication between the inverter and the PC-tools (e.g. STARTER)
or BOP is automatically re-established.

1-106 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0975[0...10] DO identification / DO ident.

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Drive object identification

Index: [0] = Company
[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Profidrive drive object class
[6] = Profidrive drive object subclass 1
[7] = Drive Object ID (DO-ID)
[8] = unused
[9] = unused
[10] = Firmware path/hotfix

r0980[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 0 - 99.
Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0981[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 100 - 199.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-107

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0982[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 200 - 299.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0983[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 300 - 399.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0984[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 400 - 499.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

1-108 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0985[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 500 - 599.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0986[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 600 - 699.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0987[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 700 - 799.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-109

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r0988[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 800 - 899.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

r0989[0...99] List of avaiable parameter numbers / Paramter list

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains 100 parameter numbers index 900 - 999.

Index: [0] = Parameter 1
[1] = Parameter 2
[2] = Parameter 3
[3] = Parameter 4
[4] = Parameter 5
[5] = Parameter 6
[6] = Parameter 7
[7] = Parameter 8
[8] = Parameter 9
[9] = Parameter 10
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0-
99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the
number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list

1-110 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1000[0...2] Selection of frequency setpoint / Freq setp. select.

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 77 2
Description: Selects frequency setpoint source.
The selection of settings is detailed in the following table of values, in which the main setpoint is given by the least
significant digit (right-hand position) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand posi-
tion). Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
Values: 0: No main setpoint
1: MOP setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed frequency
4: USS on RS232
5: USS on RS485
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
11: MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint
12: Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
13: Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint
14: USS on RS232 + MOP setpoint
15: USS on RS485 + MOP setpoint
17: Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint
20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
21: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
23: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint
24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint
25: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint
27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint
30: No main setpoint + Fixed frequency
31: MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency
32: Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency
33: Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency
34: USS on RS232 + Fixed frequency
35: USS on RS485 + Fixed frequency
37: Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency
40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232
41: MOP setpoint + USS on RS232
42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232
43: Fixed frequency + USS on RS232
44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232
45: USS on RS485 + USS on RS232
47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232
50: No main setpoint + USS on RS485
51: MOP setpoint + USS on RS485
52: Analog setpoint + USS on RS485
53: Fixed frequency + USS on RS485
54: USS on RS232 + USS on RS485
55: USS on RS485 + USS on RS485
57: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS485
70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
71: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
73: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2
74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2
75: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P1070, P1071, P1075, P1076

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-111

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1000[0...2] Selection of frequency setpoint / Freq setp. select.

CU240S DP Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 77 6
Description: Selects frequency setpoint source.
The selection of settings is detailed in the following table of values, in which the main setpoint is given by the least
significant digit (right-hand position) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand posi-
tion). Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
Values: 0: No main setpoint
1: MOP setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed frequency
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
11: MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint
12: Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
13: Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint
14: USS on RS232 + MOP setpoint
16: Fieldbus + MOP setpoint
17: Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint
20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
21: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
23: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint
24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint
26: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint
27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint
30: No main setpoint + Fixed frequency
31: MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency
32: Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency
33: Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency
34: USS on RS232 + Fixed frequency
36: Fieldbus + Fixed frequency
37: Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency
40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232
41: MOP setpoint + USS on RS232
42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232
43: Fixed frequency + USS on RS232
44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232
46: Fieldbus + USS on RS232
47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232
60: No main setpoint + Fieldbus
61: MOP setpoint + Fieldbus
62: Analog setpoint + Fieldbus
63: Fixed frequency + Fieldbus
64: USS on RS232 + Fieldbus
66: Fieldbus + Fieldbus
67: Analog setpoint 2 + Fieldbus
70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
71: MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
73: Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2
74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2
76: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 2
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P1070, P1071, P1075, P1076

1-112 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1001[0...2] Fixed frequency 1 / Fixed frequency 1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 1.
There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
1. Direct selection (P1016 = 1):
- In this mode of operation 1 Fixed Frequency selector (P1020...P1023) selects 1 fixed frequency.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed.
E.g.: FF1 + FF2 + FF3 + FF4.
2. Binary coded selection (P1016 = 2):
- Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
- The fixed frequencies are selected according to FP3210.
Dependency: Select fixed frequency operation (using P1000).
Inverter requires ON command to start in the case of direct selection. Therefore r1025 must be connected to P0840
to start.
Note: Fixed frequencies can be selected using the digital inputs.

p1002[0...2] Fixed frequency 2 / Fixed frequency 2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 5.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1003[0...2] Fixed frequency 3 / Fixed frequency 3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 3.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1004[0...2] Fixed frequency 4 / Fixed frequency 4

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 15.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 4.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-113

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1005[0...2] Fixed frequency 5 / Fixed frequency 5

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 20.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 5.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1006[0...2] Fixed frequency 6 / Fixed frequency 6

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 25.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 6.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1007[0...2] Fixed frequency 7 / Fixed frequency 7

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 30.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 7.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1008[0...2] Fixed frequency 8 / Fixed frequency 8

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 35.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 8.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1009[0...2] Fixed frequency 9 / Fixed frequency 9

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 40.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 9.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

1-114 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1010[0...2] Fixed frequency 10 / Fixed frequency 10

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 45.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 10.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1011[0...2] Fixed frequency 11 / Fixed frequency 11

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 11.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1012[0...2] Fixed frequency 12 / Fixed frequency 12

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 55.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 12.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1013[0...2] Fixed frequency 13 / Fixed frequency 13

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 60.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 13.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1014[0...2] Fixed frequency 14 / Fixed frequency 14

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 65.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 14.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-115

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1015[0...2] Fixed frequency 15 / Fixed frequency 15

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 65.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines fixed frequency setpoint 15.
Note: See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).

p1016[0...2] Fixed frequency mode / FF mode

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

1 2 1
Description: Fixed frequencies can be selected in two different modes.
Parameter P1016 defines the mode.
Values: 1: Direct selection
2: Binary selection
Note: See P1001 (fixed frequency 1) for description of how to use fixed frequencies.

p1020[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 / FF sel. Bit 0

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.3
Description: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

p1021[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 1 / FF sel. Bit 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.4
Description: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

p1022[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 / FF sel. Bit 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.5
Description: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

1-116 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN-F Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

p1023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.6
Description: Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

r1024 CO: Act. fixed frequency / Act. FF

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays sum total of selected fixed frequencies.

r1025.0 BO: Fixed frequency status / FF Status

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the status of fixed frequencies.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Status of FF Yes No -

p1031[0...2] MOP mode / MOP mode

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: MOP mode specification.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Setpoint store activ Yes No -
01 No On-state for MOP necessary Yes No -
Note: Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer.
See P1040 (setpoint of MOP).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-117

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP / Inhib. MOP reverse

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 1
Description: Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the MOP.
Values: 0: Reverse direction is allowed
1: Reverse direction inhibited
Note: It is possible to change motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase / decrease frequency
either by using digital inputs or OP keypad up / down (e.g. BOP)).
The "reversing key" of the OP (e.g. BOP) is not affected by the settings of P1032. Use P1110 to fully prevent
change of motor direction.
Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease fre-
quency).

p1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP)

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 19.13
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P1047.

p1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP)

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.13
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P1047.

p1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP)

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.13
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P1047.

1-118 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN)

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 19.14
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P1048.

p1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN)

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.14
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P1048.

p1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN)

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.14
Description: Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz.
When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P1048.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-119

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1040[0...2] Setpoint of the MOP / MOP setpoint

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 5.00 [Hz]
Description: Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control (P1000 = 1).
Dependency: Motor potentiometer (P1040) must be chosen as main setpoint or additional setpoint (using P1000).
Note: If motor potentiometer setpoint is selected either as main setpoint or additional setpoint, the reverse direction will be
inhibited by default of P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP).
To re-enable reverse direction, set P1032 = 0.
A short press of the 'up' or 'down' keys (e.g.: BOP) will change the frequency setpoint in steps of 0.1Hz. A longer
press will cause an accelerated frequency setpoint change.
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. The parameter P1031 influences the
start value behaviour as follows:
• P1031=0:
P1040 gets immediately active in the OFF-state and when changed in the ON-state, it gets active after the next
OFF and ON cycle.
• P1031=1:
The last MOP output before stop is stored as starting value, since storing is selected, so a change of P1040
while in ON-state has no effect. In OFF-state P1040 can be changed.
• P1031=2:
The MOP is active every time, so the change of P1040 affects after the next power cycle or a change of P1031
to 0.
• P1031=3:
The last MOP output before power down is stored as starting value, since the MOP is active independent from
the ON-command, a change of P1040 has only effect in the case of a change of P1031.

p1041[0...2] BI: MOP select setpoint automatically/manually / Setp. auto/manu

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode.
If using the motorized potentiometer in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down
e.g. P1035 and P1036.
If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P1042).
0 : manually
1 : automatically
Notice: Refer to: P1035, P1036, P1042

p1042[0...2] CI: MOP auto setpoint / MOP auto setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P1041 is selected.
Notice: Refer to: P1041

1-120 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1043[0...2] BI: MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / MOP acc RFG setpo
Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. The
value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Notice: Refer to: P1044

p1044[0...2] CI: MOP rampgenerator setpoint / MOP RFG setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting
command.
Notice: Refer to: P1043

r1045 CO: MOP input frequency of the RFG / MOP RFG input
Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the MOP RFG.

p1047[0...2] MOP ramp-up time of the RFG / MOP ramp-up time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
Notice: Refer to: P1048, P1082

p1048[0...2] MOP ramp-down time of the RFG / MOP rampdown time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator.
The setpoint is changed from limit defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
Notice: Refer to: P1047, P1082

r1050 CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP / MOP outp.freq.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays output frequency of motor potentiometer setpoint ([Hz]).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-121

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG ->

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source of JOG right.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG ->

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.8
Description: Defines source of JOG right.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG ->

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.8
Description: Defines source of JOG right.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <-

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source of JOG left.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <-

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.9
Description: Defines source of JOG left.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

1-122 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <-

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.9
Description: Defines source of JOG left.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1057 JOG Enable / JOG Enable

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0000 bin 0001 bin 0001 bin
Description: While JOG Enable is '0' Jogging (p1056 and p1055) is disabled. When '1' Jogging is enabled.

p1058[0...2] JOG frequency / JOG frequency

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 5.00 [Hz]
Description: Jogging increases the motor speed by small amounts.
The JOG mode allows the operator to perform a specific number of revolutions and position the rotor manually.
The JOG buttons on OP use a non-latching switch on one of the digital inputs to control the motor speed. While the
JOG button is pressed, parameter P1058 determines the frequency at which the inverter will run.
The motor speed is increased as long as 'JOG left' or 'JOG right' are selected and until the left or right JOG fre-
quency is reached.
Dependency: P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.
Rounding times (P1130 - P1133), rounding type (P1134) and P2167 will also have influence on the JOG ramp.

p1059[0...2] JOG frequency left / JOG frequency <-

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 5.00 [Hz]
Description: While JOG left is selected, this parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter will run.
Dependency: P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-123

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time / JOG ramp-up time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets jog ramp-up time.
This is the time used while jogging is active.
Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
The rounding of P1130 - P1133 also applies to the JOG ramping.

p1061[0...2] JOG ramp-down time / JOG ramp-down time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets ramp-down time.
This is the time used while jogging is active.
Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active

p1070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer32
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Defines source of main setpoint.

p1070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer32
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2050[1]
Description: Defines source of main setpoint.

p1071[0...2] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines source of the main setpoint scaling.

1-124 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1074[0...2] BI: Disable additional setpoint / Disab.add.setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Disables additional setpoint

p1075[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint / Add. setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source of the additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).

p1076[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint scaling / Add. setp.scal

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines source of scaling for additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).

r1078 CO: Total frequency setpoint / Tot. freq.setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays sum of main and additional setpoints in [Hz].

r1079 CO: Selected frequency setpoint / Sel. freq.setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays selected frequency setpoint.

Following frequency setpoints are displayed:
• r1078 Total frequency setpoint
• P1058 JOG frequency right
• P1059 JOG frequency left
Dependency: P1055 (BI: Enable JOG right) or P1056 (BI: Enable JOG left) define command source of JOG right or JOG left
respectively.
Note: P1055 = 0 and P1056 = 0 ==> Total frequency setpoint is selected.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-125

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1080[0...2] Min. frequency / Min. frequency

Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint.
The minimum frequency P1080 represents a masking frequency of 0 Hz for all frequency target value sources e.g.
AI, MOP, FF, USS with the exception of the JOG target value source (analogous to P1091).
Thus the frequency band +/-P1080 is run through in optimum time by means of the acceleration/deceleration
ramps.
Dwelling in the frequency band is not possible.
Furthermore, an overshoot of the actual frequency f_act upper min. frequency P1080 is output by the signal func-
tion |f_act| > f_min.
Note: Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for anticlockwise rotation.
Under certain conditions (e.g. ramping, current limiting), motor can run below minimum frequency.

p1082[0...2] Max. frequency / Max. frequency

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint.
The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation.
Futhermore, the monitoring function |f_act| >= P1082 (r0052 Bit10, see example below) is affected by this parame-
ter.
Example:
⏐f_act⏐

p1082
p1082 - p2162

t
|f_act| ≥ p1082 (f_max)

r0052 1
Bit 10 0 t

Dependency: The maximum value of P1082 also depends on the nominal frequency: Max. P1082 = min(15*P0310, 650 Hz).
As consequence P1082 can be affected if P0310 is changed to a smaller value.
The maximum frequency and the pulse frequency depending on each other. The maximum frequency affects the
pulse frequency according to the following table.

p1800
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 - 16 kHz

fmax p1082 0 - 133.3 Hz 0 - 266.6 Hz 0 - 400 Hz 0 - 650 Hz

Example:
If P1082 is set to 350 Hz a pulse frequency from at least 6 kHz is necessary. If P1800 is smaller than 6 kHz the
parameter is changed P1800 = 6 kHz.

1-126 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active:

- p1335 ≠ 0 (Slip compensation active) :

p1336 r0330
fmax(p1335) = fmax + fslip,max = p1082 + ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100 100
- p1200 ≠ 0 (Flying restart active) :
r0330
fmax(p1200) = fmax + 2 ⋅ fslip,nom = p1082 + 2 ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100
The resultant value is displayed in r1084 (resultant maximum frequency).
Note: When using the setpoint source
• Analog Input
• USS
the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using
• a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754)
• a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r2018[1])
• and the reference frequency P2000.
If for example P1082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterised with P0757 = 0 V, P0758 = 0
%, P0759 = 10 V, P0760 = 100 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 10 V of the analog input.
Regeneration at rated frequncy is only possible, when the maximum frequency (p1082) is higher than the rated fre-
quency of the motor.
When Quick Commissioning is carried out P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.

p1082[0...2] Max. frequency / Max. frequency

CU240S DP Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint.
The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation.
Futhermore, the monitoring function |f_act| >= P1082 (r0052 Bit10, see example below) is affected by this parame-
ter.
Example:
⏐f_act⏐

p1082
p1082 - p2162

t
|f_act| ≥ p1082 (f_max)

r0052 1
Bit 10 0 t

Dependency: The maximum value of P1082 also depends on the nominal frequency: Max. P1082 = min(15*P0310, 650 Hz).
As consequence P1082 can be affected if P0310 is changed to a smaller value.
The maximum frequency and the pulse frequency depending on each other. The maximum frequency affects the
pulse frequency according to the following table.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-127

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1800
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 - 16 kHz

fmax p1082 0 - 133.3 Hz 0 - 266.6 Hz 0 - 400 Hz 0 - 650 Hz

Example:
If P1082 is set to 350 Hz a pulse frequency from at least 6 kHz is necessary. If P1800 is smaller than 6 kHz the
parameter is changed P1800 = 6 kHz.
The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active:

- p1335 ≠ 0 (Slip compensation active) :

p1336 r0330
fmax(p1335) = fmax + fslip,max = p1082 + ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100 100
- p1200 ≠ 0 (Flying restart active) :
r0330
fmax(p1200) = fmax + 2 ⋅ fslip,nom = p1082 + 2 ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100
The resultant value is displayed in r1084 (resultant maximum frequency).
Note: When using the setpoint source
• Analog Input
• USS
• Fieldbus
the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using
• a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754)
• a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r2018[1])
• and the reference frequency P2000.
If for example P1082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterised with P0757 = 0 V, P0758 = 0
%, P0759 = 10 V, P0760 = 100 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 10 V of the analog input.
Regeneration at rated frequncy is only possible, when the maximum frequency (p1082) is higher than the rated fre-
quency of the motor.
When Quick Commissioning is carried out P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.

r1084 Resultant max. frequency / Resultant max freq

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
Description: Displays resultant maximum frequency.

P1300 < 20
P1800
P1800 ≤ 6 kHz → r1084 = min (P1082, , 650.00)
15
P1800 ≥ 8 kHz → r1084 = min (P1082, 650.00)

p1300 ≥ 20
r1084 = min (p1082, 5 ⋅ p0310, 200.00)

1-128 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1091[0...2] Skip frequency / Skip frequency

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-
P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Notice: Stationary operation is not possible within the suppressed frequency range; the range is merely passed through (on
the ramp).
For example, if P1091 = 10 Hz and P1101 = 2 Hz, it is not possible to operate continuously between 10 Hz +/- 2 Hz
(i.e. between 8 and 12 Hz).
Note: The function is disabled if P1091 = 0.

p1092[0...2] Skip frequency 2 / Skip frequency 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines skip frequency 2 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-
P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Note: See P1091 (skip frequency 1).

p1093[0...2] Skip frequency 3 / Skip frequency 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines skip frequency 3 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-
P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Note: See P1091 (skip frequency 1).

p1094[0...2] Skip frequency 4 / Skip frequency 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines skip frequency 4 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-
P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Note: See P1091 (skip frequency 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-129

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1101[0...2] Skip frequency bandwidth / Skipfreq bandwidth

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] 2.00 [Hz]
Description: Delivers frequency bandwidth to be applied to skip frequencies (in [Hz]).
Note: See P1091 (skip frequency 1).

p1110[0...2] BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint / Inh. neg. setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: This parameter suppresses negative setpoints. Therefore, modification of the motor direction is inhibited to the set-
point channel.
If a min. frequency (P1080) and a negative setpoint are given, the motor is accelerated by a positive value in rela-
tionship to the min. frequency.

p1113[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.1
Description: Defines source of reverse command.

p1113[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.11
Description: Defines source of reverse command.

p1113[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.11
Description: Defines source of reverse command.

r1114 CO: Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl. / Setp<-dir.ctrl.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays setpoint frequency after change of direction.

1-130 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1119 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays frequency setpoint at the input to the ramp function generator after modification by other functions, e.g.:
• P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint,
• P1091 - P1094 skip frequencies,
• P1080 min. frequency,
• P1082 max. frequency,
This value is available filtered (r0020) and unfiltered (r1119).

p1120[0...2] Ramp-up time / Ramp-up time

Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is
used.
Setting the ramp-up time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F0001).
Dependency: Rounding times (P1130 - P1133) and rounding type (P1134) will also have influence on the ramp.
Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
Note: If an external frequency setpoint with set ramp rates is used (e.g. from a PLC), the best way to achieve optimum
drive performance is to set ramp times in P1120 and P1121 slightly shorter than those of the PLC.
Changes to P1120 will be immediately effective.

p1121[0...2] Ramp-down time / Ramp-down time

Access level: 1 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is
used.
Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F0001 / overvoltage F0002).
Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
Note: Changes to P1121 will be immediately effective.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-131

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1124[0...2] BI: Enable JOG ramp times / Enable JOG ramp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines source for switching between jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) and normal ramp times (P1120, P1121) as
applied to the RFG.
This parameter is valid for normal mode (ON/OFF) only.
Notice: P1124 does not have any impact when JOG mode is selected. In this case, jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) will be
used all the time.
Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active

p1130[0...2] Ramp-up initial rounding time / Ramp-up ini. Trnd

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 40.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines rounding time in seconds at start of ramp-up.
Notice: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the
mechanics.
Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/under-
shoot in the inverter response.
Note: If short or zero ramp times (P1120, P1121 < P1130, P1131, P1132, P1133) are set, the total ramp up time (t_up) or
ramp down time (t_down) will not depend on P1130.

p1131[0...2] Ramp-up final rounding time / Ramp-up final Trnd

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 40.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines rounding time at end of ramp-up.
Notice: Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/under-
shoot in the inverter response.
Note: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the
mechanics.

1-132 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1132[0...2] Ramp-down initial rounding time / Ramp-dwn ini. Trnd

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 40.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines rounding time at start of ramp-down.
Notice: Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/under-
shoot in the inverter response.
Note: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the
mechanics.

p1133[0...2] Ramp-down final rounding time / Ramp-dwn fin. Trnd

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 40.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines rounding time at end of ramp-down.
Notice: Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/under-
shoot in the inverter response.
Note: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the
mechanics.

p1134[0...2] Rounding type / Rounding type

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Defines the smoothing which is active by setpoint modifications during acceleration or deceleration (e.g. new set-
point, OFF1, OFF3, REV).
This smoothing is applied, if the motor is ramped-up or ramped-down and
• P1134 = 0,
• P1132 > 0, P1133 > 0 and
• the setpoint is not yet reached.
Values: 0: Continuous smoothing
1: Discontinuous smoothing
Dependency: Effect only when P1130 (Ramp-up initial rounding time) or P1131 (Ramp-up final rounding time) or P1132 (Ramp-
down initial rounding time) or P1133 (Ramp-down final rounding time) > 0 s.

p1135[0...2] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 ramp-dwn time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 5.00 [s]
Description: Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command.
Note: This time may be exceeded if the VDC_max. level is reached.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-133

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.4
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.4
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1141[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output is held at its present value.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1141[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.5
Description: Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output is held at its present value.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

1-134 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1141[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.5
Description: Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output is held at its present value.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will ramp-down to zero.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.6
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will ramp-down to zero.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.6
Description: Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator).
If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will ramp-down to zero.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

r1170 CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG / Setp. after RFG

Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays overall frequency setpoint after ramp generator.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-135

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1200 Flying start / Flying start

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 6 0
Description: Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the actual motor
speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time.
Values: 0: Flying start disabled
1: Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint
2: Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direc
3: Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of se
4: Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint
5: Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direct
6: Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of set
Notice: Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be
driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
Note: Useful for motors with high inertia loads.
Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions.
Settings 4 to 6 search only in direction of setpoint.

p1202[0...2] Motor-current: Flying start / Mot. cur: Flystart

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [%] 200 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Defines search current used for flying start.
Value is in [%] based on rated motor current (P0305).
Note: Reducing the search current may improve performance for flying start if the inertia of the system is not very high.

p1203[0...2] Search rate: Flying start / SrchRate: Flystart

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [%] 200 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets factor (in V/f mode only) by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning
motor.
This value is entered in [%]. It defines the reciprocal initial gradient in the search sequence.
Parameter P1203 influences the time taken to search for the motor frequency.
Example: For a motor with 50 Hz, 1350 rpm, 100 % would produce a maximum search time of 600 ms.
Note: A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time.
A lower value has the opposite effect.

1-136 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1204 Status word: Flying start V/f / Stat: Flystart V/f

Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Bit parameter for checking and monitoring states during search, if V/f control mode is selected (P1300 < 20).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Current applied Yes No -
01 Current could not be applied Yes No -
02 Voltage reduced Yes No -
03 Slope-filter started Yes No -
04 Current less threshold Yes No -
05 Current-minimum Yes No -
07 Speed could not be found Yes No -

r1205 Status word: Flying start SLVC / Stat Flystart SLVC

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Bit parameter for checking status of flying start performed with n-adaption of observer.
Parameter is only valid, if sensorless vector control (SLVC)) is selected (P1300 = 20, 22).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Transformation active Yes No -
01 Initialize n-adaption Yes No -
02 Current applying Yes No -
03 n-controller closed Yes No -
04 Isd-controller open Yes No -
05 RFG hold Yes No -
06 n-adaption set to zero Yes No -
07 reserved Yes No -
08 reserved Yes No -
09 reserved Yes No -
10 Direction Positive Yes No -
11 Search is started Yes No -
12 Current is applied Yes No -
13 Search is aborted Yes No -
14 Deviation is zero Yes No -
15 n-controller is active Yes No -

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-137

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1210 Automatic restart / Automatic restart

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 6 1
Description: Configures automatic restart function
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled
2: Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled
3: Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled
4: Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled
5: Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled
6: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 enabled
Dependency: Automatic restart requires constant ON command via a digital input wire link.
Caution: P1210 > 2 can cause the motor to restart automatically without toggling the ON command !

Notice: A "mains brownout" is where the power is interrupted and re-applied before the display on the BOP (if one is fitted
to the inverter) has gone dark (a very short mains break where the DC link has not fully collapsed).
A "mains blackout" is a long mains break, where the DC link has fully collapsed before the power is re-applied.
"Delay Time" is the time between attempts of quitting fault. The "Delay Time" of first attempt is 1 second, then it will
be doubled every next attempt.
The "Number of Restart Attempts" can be set in P1211. This is the number of restarts the inverter will try to quit
fault.
When faults are quit and after 4 seconds of no fault condition, "Number of Restart Attempts" will be reset to P1211
and "Delay Time" will be reset to 1 second.
P1210 = 0:
Automatic restart is disabled.
P1210 = 1:
The inverter will acknowledge (reset) faults i.e. it will reset a fault when the is re-applied. This means the inverter
must be fully powered down, a brownout is not sufficed. The inverter will not run until the ON command has been
toggled.
P1210 = 2:
The inverter will acknowledge the fault F0003 at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is necessary that
the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
P1210 = 3:
For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the faults
(F0003, etc.). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or bronwout. It is neces-
sary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
P1210 = 4:
For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the fault
(F0003). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or bronwout. It is necessary
that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
P1210 = 5:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults F0003 etc. at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is necessary
that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
P1210 = 6:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults (F0003 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the drive.
It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). Setting 6 causes the motor to restart immedi-
ately.
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be
driven by the load (P1200).

1-138 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1211 Number of restart attempts / Restart attempts

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 10 3
Description: Specifies number of times inverter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P1210 is activated.

p1215 Holding brake enable / MHB enable

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Enables/disables holding brake function.
The mechanical motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via the signal of status word 1 r0052 Bit12 "Brake open".
This signal can be issued via:
• status word of the serial interface (e.g. USS)
• digitial outputs (e.g. DO0: ==> P0731 = 52.C (r0052 Bit12))
Values: 0: Motor holding brake disabled
1: Motor holding brake enabled
Caution: It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as working brake, as it is generally only designed for a limited
number of emergeny braking operations.

Note: In V/f control (P1300 < 20) a typical value of min. frequency P1080 for motor holding brake is the slip frequency of
the motor r0330.

r0330 nsy n − nn
fSlip[Hz] = ⋅ P0310 = ⋅ fn
100 nsy n
In a vector control mode (P1300 = 20) the following should be valid:
• The value of the min. Frequency P1080 should be zero.
• The delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P0494 > P1216 and P0494 > P1217 )
• The delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P2178 > P1216 and P2178 > P1217 )
Otherwise there may be encoder loss trips (F0090) when the brake is applied and pulses are enabled.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-139

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1215 Holding brake enable / MHB enable

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Enables/disables holding brake function.
The mechanical motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via the signal of status word 1 r0052 Bit12 "Brake open".
This signal can be issued via:
• status word of the serial interface (e.g. USS)
• digitial outputs (e.g. DO0: ==> P0731 = 52.C (r0052 Bit12))
Values: 0: Motor holding brake disabled
1: Motor holding brake enabled
Caution: It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as working brake, as it is generally only designed for a limited
number of emergeny braking operations.

Note: In V/f control (P1300 < 20) a typical value of min. frequency P1080 for motor holding brake is the slip frequency of
the motor r0330.

r0330 nsy n − nn
fSlip[Hz] = ⋅ P0310 = ⋅ fn
100 nsy n
In a vector control mode (P1300 = 20 or P1300 = 21)
• The value of the min. Frequency P1080 should be zero.
• The delay speed loss reaction should be > brake holding times (i.e. P0494 > P1216 and P0494 > P1217 )
• The delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times (i.e. P2178 > P1216 and P2178 > P1217 )
Otherwise there may be encoder loss trips (F0090) when the brake is applied and pulses are enabled.

p1216 Holding brake release delay / MHB release delay

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 20.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Defines period during which inverter runs at min. frequency P1080 before ramping up.

p1217 Holding time after ramp down / Thold. <- ramp-dwn

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 20.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down.
Note: If P1217 > P1227, parameter P1227 will take precedence.

1-140 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1218[0...2] BI: MHB override / MHB override

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Enables the MHB output to be overridden, allowing the brake to be opened under seperate control.

p1227[0...2] Zero speed detection monitoring time / Zero speed time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 300.0 [s] 4.0 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below P2167. After this, the braking signal is started, the system waits for the closing time and then the
pulses are cancelled.
Note: P1227 = 300.0 : function is deactivated
P1227 = 0.0 : pulses are locked immediately
If P1217 > P1227, parameter P1227 will take precedence.

p1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk.

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S DP Can be changed: U, T
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source.
Function remains active while external input signal is active.
DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft sta-
tionary). When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not
applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized.
This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time).
If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur.
The level of DC braking is set in P1232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 100
% by default.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (p0700 = 6, p0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.
Caution: With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor.
The drive could overheat if it remains in this status for an exessive period of time !
DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-141

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1232[0...2] DC braking current / DC braking current

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [%] 250 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
The DC braking can be issued observing the following dependencies:
• OFF1 / OFF3 ==> see P1233
• BICO ==> see P1230

p1233[0...2] Duration of DC braking / DC brak. duration

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 250.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines duration for which DC braking is active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the drive, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in P1234, the drive injects a DC braking current P1232 for the
time duration set in P1233.
Caution: With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor.
The drive could overheat if it remains in this status for an exessive period of time !
DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2).
Notice: The DC braking function causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current.
When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current not applied until
the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized (demagnetization time is calculated automatically from motor data).
Note: P1233 = 0 means that DC braking is not activated.

p1234[0...2] DC braking start frequency / DC brk. start freq

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets start frequency for DC braking.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the drive, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in start frequency of DC braking P1234, the drive injects a DC
braking current P1232 for the time duration set in P1233.

1-142 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1236[0...2] Compound braking current / Compound brk. cur.

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [%] 250 [%] 0 [%]
Description: Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exeeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking.
The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).

If p1254 = 0 :
Compound braking switch-on level UDC_Comp = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vmains = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
otherwise :
Compound braking switch-on level U = 0.98 ⋅ r1242
DC_Comp

The Compound Brake is an overlay of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (effective braking at the
ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This enables braking with controlled motor frequency and a minimum of energy
returned to the motor. Through optimization of the ramp-down time and the compound braking an efficient braking
without additional HW components is possible.
Dependency: Compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold above).
This will happen on OFF1, OFF3 and any regenerative condition.
It is disabled, when:
• DC braking is active
• Flying start is active
• Vector mode (SLVC, VC) is selected
Notice: Increasing the value will generally improve braking performance; however, if you set the value too high, an overcur-
rent trip may result.
If used with dynamic braking enabled as well compound braking will take priority.
If used with the Vdc max controller enabled the drive behaviour whilst braking may be worsened particularly with
high values of compound braking.
Compound braking does not work when the drive is in vector control.
Note: P1236 = 0 means that compound braking is not activated.

p1237 Dynamic braking / Dynamic braking

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 5 0
Description: Dynamic braking absorbs the braking energy in a chopper resistor.
This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor (chopper resistor).
Dynamic braking is active when the function is enabled and DC-link voltage exeeds the dynamic braking switch-on
level.

Dynamic braking switch-on level

If p1254 = 0 :
VDC, Chopper = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vmains = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
otherwise :
VDC, Chopper = 0.98 ⋅ r1242
Values: 0: Disabled
1: 5 % duty cycle
2: 10 % duty cycle
3: 20 % duty cycle
4: 50 % duty cycle
5: 100 % duty cycle

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-143

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Dependency: If dynamic braking is used with DC braking enabled as well as compound braking, DC braking and compound brak-
ing will take priority.

DC braking Compound Dynamic

no no no
P1233 > 0 braking braking
? P1236 > 0 P1237 > 0
? ?

yes yes yes

DC braking Compound braking Dynamic braking

disabled
enabled enabled enabled

Notice: Initially the brake will operate at a high duty cycle dependant on the DC link level until the thermal limit is
approached.
The duty cycle specified by this parameter will then be imposed.
The resistor should be able to operate at this level indefinitely without overheating.

VDC, act 100 %

0
x x
tChopper, ON = ⋅t
– ΔV V 100 Chopper
1

VDC, Chopper ΔV = 17.0 V for 380 - 480 V

1

p1237

1
Duty cycle Alarm
monitoring 0 A0535

The threshold for the warning A0535 is equivalent to 10 seconds running at 95 % duty cycle.
The duty cycle will be limited when it was running 12 seconds at 95 % duty cycle.

p1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller / Vdc controller

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 1
Description: Enables / disables Vdc controller.
The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia systems.
Values: 0: Vdc controller disabled
1: Vdc-max controller enabled
2: Kinetic buffering (Vdc-min controller) enabled
3: Vdc-max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled
Caution: If P1245 increased too much, it may interfere with the drive normal operation.

Note: • Vdc-max controller:

Vdc-max controller automatically increases ramp-down times to keep the DC-link voltage (r0026) within limits
(r1242).
• Vdc-min controller:
Vdc-min is activated if DC-link voltage falls below the switch on level P1245.The kinetic energy of the motor is
then used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the drive. If the drive trips with F0003
immediately, try increasing the dynamic factor P1247 first. If still tripping with F0003 try then increasing the
switch on level P1245.

1-144 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1242 CO: Switch-on level of Vdc-max / Vdc-max ON lev

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays switch-on level of Vdc max controller.

Following equation is only valid, if p1254 = 0 :

r1242 = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vmains = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
otherwise :
r1242 is internally calculated

p1243[0...2] Dynamic factor of Vdc-max / Vdc-max dyn. fact.

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [%] 200 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Defines dynamic factor for DC link controller in [%].
Dependency: P1243 = 100 % means parameters P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used
as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1243 (dynamic factor of Vdc-max).
Note: Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data.

p1245[0...2] Switch on level kin. buffering / KIB ON level

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

65 [%] 115 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Enter switch-on level for kinetic buffering (KIB) in [%] relative to supply voltage (P0210).

p1245 [%]
r1246 [V] = ⋅ 2 ⋅ p0210
100

Warning: Increasing the value too much, may interfere with the drive normal operation.

Note: P1254 has no effect on the switch-on-level for KIB.

r1246[0...2] CO: Switch-on level kin buffering / KIB ON level

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: DDS
Description: Displays switch-on level of kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc min controller).
If the dc-link voltage drops below the value in r1246, kinetic buffering will be activated. That means the motor fre-
quency will be reduced in order to keep Vdc within the valid range.
If there is not enough regenerative energy, the converter trips with undervoltage.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-145

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1247[0...2] Dyn. factor of kinetic buffering / Dyn. factor of KIB

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [%] 200 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Enters dynamic factor for kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc-min controller).
P1247 = 100 % means parameters P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used
as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1247 (dynamic factor of Vdc-min).
Note: Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data.

p1250[0...2] Gain of Vdc-controller / Gain of Vdc ctrl.

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 10.00 1.00
Description: Enters gain for Vdc controller.

p1251[0...2] Integration time Vdc-controller / Int. time Vdc ctrl

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.1 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 40.0 [ms]
Description: Enters integral time constant for Vdc controller.

p1252[0...2] Differential time Vdc-controller / Diff.time Vdc ctrl

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 1.0 [ms]
Description: Enters differential time constant for Vdc controller.

p1253[0...2] Vdc-controller output limitation / Vdc ctrl outp. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz]
Description: Limits maximum effect of Vdc max controller.
Note: The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

1-146 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1254 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels / Autodet Vdc ON lev

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 1
Description: Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc max controller.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

p1256[0...2] Reaction of kinetic buffering / Reaction of KIB

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Enters reaction for kinetic buffering controller (Vdc-min controller).
Depending on the setting selected, the frequency limit defined in P1257 is used to either hold the speed or disable
pulses.
If not enough regeneration is produced, drive may trip with undervoltage.
Values: 0: Maintain DC-link until trip
1: Maintain DC-link until trip / stop
2: Control stop
Note: P1256 = 0:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or drive is tripped with undervoltage.
The frequency is kept above the frequency limit provided in P1257.
P1256 = 1:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or drive is tripped with undervoltage or pulses are disabled when
frequency falls below the limit in P1257.
P1256 = 2:
This option ramps down the frequency to standstill even when mains return.
If mains does not return, frequency brought down under the control of vdc-min controller until P1257 limit. Then
pulses are disabled or undervoltage has occurred.
If mains return, then an OFF1 is active until P1257 limit. Then pulses are disabled.

p1257[0...2] Freq limit for kinetic buffering / Freq limit for KIB
PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 2.50 [Hz]
Description: Frequency which kinetic buffering (KIB) either hold speed or disable pulses depending on P1256.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-147

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1300[0...2] Control mode / Control mode

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 22 0
Description: Parameter to select the control method.
Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage supplied by inverter as illustrated in the diagram below.

V
V Vmax
r0071
Vn
Vn
p0304
p1300 = 3
p1325
p1300 = 0
p1323

p1321
p1310
p1300 = 2

f f
0 fn f0 f1 f2 f3 fn fmax
0 Hz p1320 p1322 p1324 p0310 p1082

Values: 0: V/f with linear characteristic

1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Sensorless vector control
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
Dependency: See parameter P0205, P0500
Note: P1300 = 1 : V/f with FCC (flux current control)
• Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency.
• If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies.
P1300 = 2 : V/f with a quadratic characteristic
• Suitable for centrifugal fans / pumps
P1300 = 3 : V/f with a programmable characteristic
• User defined characteristic (see P1320)
• For synchronous motors (e.g. SIEMOSYN motors)
P1300 = 5,6 : V/f for textile applications
• Slip compensation disabled.
• Imax controller modifies the output voltage only.
• Imax controller does not influence the output frequency.
P1300 = 19 : V/f control with independent voltage setpoint

The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modified in relationship to P1300
dependencies:

1-148 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

ParNo. Parameter name Level V/f SLVC VC

p1300 =
0 1 2 3 5 6 19 20 22 21 23
p1300[3] Control mode 2 x x x x x x x x x x x
p1310[3] Continuous boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1311[3] Acceleration boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1312[3] Starting boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1316[3] Boost end frequency 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1320[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1321[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1322[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1323[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1324[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1325[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1330[3] CI: Voltage setpoint 3 − − − − − − x − − − −
p1333[3] Start frequency for FCC 3 − x − − − x − − − − −
p1335[3] Slip compensation 2 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1336[3] CO: U/f Slip limit 2 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1338[3] Resonance damping gain V/f 3 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1340[3] Imax freq. controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1341[3] Imax controller integral time 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1345[3] Imax controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1346[3] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1350[3] Voltage soft start 3 x x x x x x x − − − −

Sensorless vector control (SLVC, P1300 = 20,22):

SLVC can provide excellent performance for the following types of application:
• Applications which require high torque performance
• Applications which require fast respond to shock loading
• Applications which require torque holding while passing through 0 Hz
• Applications which require very accurate speed holding
• Applications which require motor pull out protection
Restrictions:
SLVC is dependent on the accuracy of the motor model being used and the measurements being performed by the
inverter. There are therefore certain restrictions on the use of SLVC:
fmax = min(200 Hz, 5 p0310) (max. frequency)

1 p0305 r0209
≤ ≤ (ratio of rated motor current to rated inverter current)
4 r0207 r0207
no synchronuos motor
Recommended means of commissioning:
For correct operation under SLVC control it is imperative that the name plate data of the motor (P0304 - P0310) is
correctly entered and that the motor data identification (P1900) must be carried out on a cold motor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the motor ambient temperature is correctly entered in P0625 if this is significantly
different from the default value of 20°C.
This must be done after the quick commissioning has been completed (P3900) but before the motor data identifica-
tion measurements are carried out.
Optimisation:
The following parameters can be adjusted by the user to improve performance.
• P0003 = 3
• P0342: Total / motor inertia ratio

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-149

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC):

• P1470: P gain (SLVC)
• P1472: I term (SLVC)
• P1610: Continuous torque boost (SLVC, open loop boost)
• P1750: Control word of motor model
The following table presents an overview of control parameters (SLVC) that can be modified in relationship to
P1300 dependencies:

Par No . Parameter name L e ve l V /f SL V C VC

P1300 =
0 1 2 3 5 6 19 20 22 21 23
P1400[3] Configuration of speed control 3 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1442[3] Filter time for act. speed 3 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1452[3] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1460[3] Gain speed controller 2 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1462[3] Integral time speed controller 2 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1477[3] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1478[3] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1488[3] Droop input source 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1489[3] Droop scaling 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1492[3] Enable droop 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1496[3] Scaling accel . precontrol 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1499[3] Scaling accel . torque control 3 − − − − − − − − x − −
P1500[3] Selection of torque setpoint 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1501[3] BI: Change to torque control 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1503[3] CI: Torque setpoint 3 − − − − − − − − x − x
P1511[3] CI: Additional torque setpoint 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1520[3] CO: Upper torque limit 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1521[3] CO: Lower torque limit 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1522[3] CI: Upper torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1523[3] CI: Lower torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1525[3] Scaling lower torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1530[3] Motoring power limitation 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1531[3] Regenerative power limitation 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1570[3] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1574[3] Dynamic voltage headroom 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1580[3] Efficiency optimization 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1582[3] Smooth time for flux setpoint 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1596[3] Int. time field weak. controller 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1610[3] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1611[3] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1740 Gain for oscillation damping 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1750[3] Control word of motor model 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1755[3] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1756[3] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1758[3] T(wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1759[3] T(wait) for n-adaption to settle 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1780[3] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P0400[3] Select encoder type 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0408[3] Encoder pulses per revolution 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0491[3] Reaction on speed signal loss 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0492[3] Allowed speed difference 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0494[3] Delay speed loss reaction 2 − − − − − − − − − x x

1) If the speed control (main setpoint) is selected a torque setpoint is available via the
additional setpoint channel.

1-150 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1300[0...2] Control mode / Control mode

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 23 0
Description: Parameter to select the control method.
Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage supplied by inverter as illustrated in the diagram below.

V
V Vmax
r0071
Vn
Vn
p0304
p1300 = 3
p1325
p1300 = 0
p1323

p1321
p1310
p1300 = 2

f f
0 fn f0 f1 f2 f3 fn fmax
0 Hz p1320 p1322 p1324 p0310 p1082

Values: 0: V/f with linear characteristic

1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Sensorless vector control
21: Vector control with sensor
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
23: Vector torque-control with sensor
Dependency: See parameter P0205, P0500
Caution: When commissioning Vector Control with encoder-feedback (VC), the drive should be configured for V/f mode (see
P1300) first.
Run the drive and compare r0061 with r0021 that should agree in
• sign and
• magnitude (with a deviation of only a few percent).
Only if both criteria are fullfilled, change P1300 and select VC (P1300 = 21 or 23).
P0400 = 1 (single channel encoder) will only allow operation in one direction.
If operation in both directions is required, connect an encoder with 2 channels (A and B) and select setting 2.
See the Operating Instructions of the encoder module for more information.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-151

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Note: P1300 = 1 : V/f with FCC (flux current control)

• Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency.
• If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies.
P1300 = 2 : V/f with a quadratic characteristic
• Suitable for centrifugal fans / pumps
P1300 = 3 : V/f with a programmable characteristic
• User defined characteristic (see P1320)
• For synchronous motors (e.g. SIEMOSYN motors)
P1300 = 5,6 : V/f for textile applications
• Slip compensation disabled.
• Imax controller modifies the output voltage only.
• Imax controller does not influence the output frequency.
P1300 = 19 : V/f control with independent voltage setpoint

The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modified in relationship to P1300
dependencies:

ParNo. Parameter name Le vel V/f SLVC VC

p1300 =
0 1 2 3 5 6 19 20 22 21 23
p1300[3] Control mode 2 x x x x x x x x x x x
p1310[3] Continuous boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1311[3] Acceleration boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1312[3] Starting boost 2 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1316[3] Boost end frequency 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1320[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1321[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1322[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1323[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1324[3] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1325[3] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 3 − − − x − − − − − − −
p1330[3] CI: Voltage setpoint 3 − − − − − − x − − − −
p1333[3] Start frequency for FCC 3 − x − − − x − − − − −
p1335[3] Slip compensation 2 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1336[3] CO: U/f Slip limit 2 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1338[3] Resonance damping gain V/f 3 x x x x − − − − − − −
p1340[3] Imax freq. controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1341[3] Imax controller integral time 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1345[3] Imax controller prop. gain 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1346[3] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time 3 x x x x x x x − − − −
p1350[3] Voltage soft start 3 x x x x x x x − − − −

Sensorless vector control (SLVC, P1300 = 20,22) and vector control (VC, P1300 = 21,23):
SLVC can provide excellent performance for the following types of application:
• Applications which require high torque performance
• Applications which require fast respond to shock loading
• Applications which require torque holding while passing through 0 Hz
• Applications which require very accurate speed holding
• Applications which require motor pull out protection
Restrictions:
SLVC /VC is dependent on the accuracy of the motor model being used and the measurements being performed by
the inverter.

1-152 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

There are therefore certain restrictions on the use of SLVC / VC:

fmax = min(200 Hz, 5 p0310) (max. frequency)

1 p0305 r0209
≤ ≤ (ratio of rated motor current to rated inverter current)
4 r0207 r0207
no synchronuos motor
Recommended means of commissioning:
For correct operation under SLVC / VC control it is imperative that the name plate data of the motor (P0304 -
P0310) is correctly entered and that the motor data identification (P1900) must be carried out on a cold motor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the motor ambient temperature is correctly entered in P0625 if this is significantly
different from the default value of 20°C.
This must be done after the quick commissioning has been completed (P3900) but before the motor data identifica-
tion measurements are carried out.
Optimisation:
The following parameters can be adjusted by the user to improve performance.
• P0003 = 3
• P0342: Total / motor inertia ratio
Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC):
• P1470: P gain (SLVC)
• P1472: I term (SLVC)
• P1610: Continuous torque boost (SLVC, open loop boost)
• P1750: Control word of motor model
Vector Control (VC):
• P1460: P gain
• P1462: I term
The following table presents an overview of control parameters (SLVC, VC) that can be modified in relationship to
P1300 dependencies:

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-153

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Par No . Parameter name L e ve l V /f SL V C VC

P1300 =
0 1 2 3 5 6 19 20 22 21 23
P1400[3] Configuration of speed control 3 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1442[3] Filter time for act. speed 3 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1452[3] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1460[3] Gain speed controller 2 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1462[3] Integral time speed controller 2 − − − − − − − − − x −
P1470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x − − −
P1477[3] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1478[3] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1488[3] Droop input source 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1489[3] Droop scaling 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1492[3] Enable droop 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1496[3] Scaling accel. precontrol 3 − − − − − − − x − x −
P1499[3] Scaling accel. torque control 3 − − − − − − − − x − −
P1500[3] Selection of torque setpoint 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1501[3] BI: Change to torque control 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1503[3] CI: Torque setpoint 3 − − − − − − − − x − x
P1511[3] CI: Additional torque setpoint 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1520[3] CO: Upper torque limit 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1521[3] CO: Lower torque limit 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1522[3] CI: Upper torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1523[3] CI: Lower torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1525[3] Scaling lower torque limit 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1530[3] Motoring power limitation 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1531[3] Regenerative power limitation 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1570[3] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1574[3] Dynamic voltage headroom 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1580[3] Efficiency optimization 2 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1582[3] Smooth time for flux setpoint 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1596[3] Int. time field weak. controller 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1610[3] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1611[3] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) 2 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1740 Gain for oscillation damping 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1750[3] Control word of motor model 3 − − − − − − − x x x x
P1755[3] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1756[3] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1758[3] T(wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1759[3] T(wait) for n-adaption to settle 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P1780[3] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption 3 − − − − − − − x x − −
P0400[3] Select encoder type 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0408[3] Encoder pulses per revolution 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0491[3] Reaction on speed signal loss 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0492[3] Allowed speed difference 2 − − − − − − − − − x x
P0494[3] Delay speed loss reaction 2 − − − − − − − − − x x

1) If the speed control (main setpoint) is selected a torque setpoint is available via the
additional setpoint channel.

1-154 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1310[0...2] Continuous boost / Continuous boost

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Defines boost level in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f curves.
At low output frequencies the output voltage is low to keep the flux level constant. However, the output voltage may
be too low for the following:
• magnetisation the asynchronous motor
• hold the load
• overcome losses in the system.
The inverter output voltage can be increased via P1310 for the compensation of losses, hold loads at 0 Hz or main-
tain the magnetization.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:

p1310
V ConBoost,100 = p0305 ⋅ p0350 ⋅
100
Dependency: Continous boost P1310 has no effect during vector operation.
Note: Increasing the boost levels increases motor heating (especially at standstill).
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost:

∑ V Boost ≤
P0640
P0305 ⋅ P0350 100
The boost values are combined when continuous boost (P1310) used in conjunction with other boost parameters
(acceleration boost P1311 and starting boost P1312). However priorities are allocated to these parameters as fol-
lows:
P1310 > P1311 > P1312
The total boost is limited by following equation:

∑ VBoost ≤ 3 ⋅ Rs ⋅ IMot = 3 ⋅ p0305 ⋅ p0350

p1311[0...2] Acceleration boost / Acceleration boost

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops back out
once the setpoint is reached.
P1311 will only produce boost during ramping, and is therefore useful for additional torque during acceleration and
deceleration.
As opposed to parameter P1312, which is only active on the first acceleration issued after the ON command,
parameter P1311 is always effect during an acceleration and deceleration when issued.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:

p1311
V AccBoost,100 = p0305 ⋅ P0350 ⋅
100
Dependency: Acceleration boost P1311 has no effect during vector operation.
Note: See parameter P1310.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-155

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1312[0...2] Starting boost / Starting boost

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Applies a constant linear offset (in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current)) to active V/f curve (either linear or
quadratic) after an ON command and is active until:
1. ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
2. setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output
This is useful for starting loads with high inertia. Setting the starting boost (P1312) too high will cause the inverter to
limit the current, which will in turn restrict the output frequency to below the setpoint frequency.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:

p1312
V StartBoost,100 = p0305 ⋅ p0350 ⋅
100

Dependency: Starting boost P1312 has no effect during vector operation.

Note: See parameter P1310.

r1315 CO: Total boost voltage / Total boost V

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -
Description: Displays total value of voltage boost (in volts).

p1316[0...2] Boost end frequency / Boost end freq.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 20.0 [%]
Description: Defines point at which programmed boost reaches 50 % of its value.
This value is expressed in [%] relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency).
The default frequency is defined as follows:

153
fBoost min = 2 ⋅ ( + 3)
Pmotor

Note: The expert user may change this value to alter the shape of the curve, e.g. to increase torque at a particular fre-
quency.
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

1-156 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1320[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 / V/f freq. coord. 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f characteristic.
These parameter pairs can be used to provide correct torque at correct frequency and is useful when used with
synchronous motors. Parameter P1320 defines the frequency of the first point of the characteristic.
Dependency: To set parameter, select P1300 = 3 (V/f with programmable characteristic).
The acceleration boost and starting boost defined in P1311 and P1312 are applied to V/f with programmable char-
acteristic.
Note: Linear interpolation will be applied between the individual data points.
V/f with programmable characteristic (P1300 = 3) has 3 programmable points and 2 non-programmable points.
The 2 non-programmable points are:
• Continuous boost P1310 at 0 Hz
• Rated motor voltage P0304 at rated motor frequency P0310

p1321[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 / V/f volt. coord. 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [V] 3000.0 [V] 0.0 [V]
Description: See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

p1322[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 / V/f freq. coord. 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

p1323[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 / V/f volt. coord. 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [V] 3000.0 [V] 0.0 [V]
Description: See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

p1324[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 / V/f freq. coord. 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-157

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1325[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 / V/f volt. coord. 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [V] 3000.0 [V] 0.0 [V]
Description: See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

p1330[0...2] CI: Voltage setpoint / Voltage setp.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: BICO parameter for selecting source of voltage setpoint for independent V/f control (P1300 = 19).

p1333[0...2] Start frequency for FCC / Start freq for FCC

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 10.0 [%]
Description: Defines start frequency at which FCC (flux current control) is enabled as [%] of rated motor frequency (P0310).
Notice: If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.

p1334[0...2] Slip compensation activation range / Slip c. act. range

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1.0 [%] 20.0 [%] 6.0 [%]
Description: To set the frequency activation range for slip compensation. The percentage value of P1334 refers to the motor
rated frequency P0310.
The upper threshold will always stay 4 % above P1334.

Range of slip compensation :

f out
% fN
with
slip compensation
P1335 without
slip compensation
f out f set
P1334 P1334+4 % 100 % fN P1334 P1334+4 % fN

Dependency: Slip compensation (P1335) active.

Note: See parameter P1335.
The starting frequency of the slip compensation is P1334 * P0310.

1-158 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1335[0...2] Slip compensation / Slip compensation

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor load.
In the V/f-control, the motor frequency will always be less than the inverter output frequency due to the slip fre-
quency. For a given output frequency, the motor frequency will drop as load is increased. This behavior, typical for
induction motors, can be compensated using slip compensation. P1335 can be used to enable and fine-tune the
slip compensation.
Dependency: Gain adjustment enables fine-tuning of the actual motor speed (see P1460 - gain speed control).
Notice: The applied value of the slip compensation (scaled by P1335) is limited by following equation:

P1336
f Slip_comp_ max = ⋅ r0330
100
Note: P1335 = 0 % :
Slip compensation disabled.
P1335 = 50 % - 70 % :
Full slip compensation at cold motor (partial load).
P1335 = 100 % (standard setting for warm stator) :
Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load).

p1336[0...2] Slip limit / Slip limit

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [%] 600 [%] 250 [%]
Description: Compensation slip limit in [%] relative to r0330 (rated motor slip), which is added to frequency setpoint.
Dependency: Slip compensation (P1335) active.

r1337 CO: V/f slip frequency / V/f slip freq.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual compensated motor slip as [%].

f_slip [Hz] = r1337 [%] * P2000 / 100
Dependency: Slip compensation (P1335) active.

p1338[0...2] Resonance damping gain V/f / Res.damp. gain V/f

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 10.00 0.00
Description: Defines resonance damping gain for V/f.
The di/dt of the acitve current will be scaled by P1338. If di/dt increases the resonance damping circuit decreases
the inverter output frequency.
Note: The resonance circuit damps oscillations of the active current which frequently occur during no-load operation. In
V/f modes (see P1300), the resonance damping circuit is active in a range from approx. 6 % to 80 % of rated motor
frequency (P0310). If the value of P1338 is too high, this will cause instability (forward control effect).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-159

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1340[0...2] Imax controller prop. gain / Imax ctrl prp gain

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 0.499 0.000
Description: Proportional gain of the I_max controller.
The Imax controller reduces inverter current if the output current exceeds the maximum motor current (r0067).
In linear V/f, parabolic V/f, FCC, and programmable V/f modes the I_max controller uses both a frequency controller
(see parameters P1340 and P1341) and a voltage controller (see parameters P1345 and P1346).
The frequency controller seeks to reduce current by limiting the inverter output frequency (to a minimum of the two
times nominal slip frequency).
If this action does not successfully remove the overcurrent condition, the inverter output voltage is reduced using
the I_max voltage controller.
When the overcurrent condition has been removed successfully, frequency limiting is removed using the ramp-up
time set in P1120.
In linear V/f for textiles, FCC for textiles, or external V/f modes only the I_max voltage controller is used to reduce
current (see parameters P1345 and P1346).
Note: The I_max controller can be disabled by setting the frequency controller integral time P1341 to zero. This disables
both the frequency and voltage controllers.
Note that when disabled, the I_max controller will take no action to reduce current but overcurrent warnings will still
be generated, and the drive will trip in excessive overcurrent or overload conditions.

p1341[0...2] Imax controller integral time / Imax ctrl int time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
Description: Integral time constant of the I_max controller.
• P1341 = 0 : I_max controller disabled
• P1340 = 0 and P1341 > 0 : frequency controller enhanced integral
• P1340 > 0 and P1341 > 0 : frequency controller normal PI control
Note: See parameter P1340 for further information.
The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

r1343 CO: Imax controller freq. output / Imax ctrl Foutp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays effective frequency limitation.

Dependency: If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.

r1344 CO: Imax controller volt. output / Imax ctrl Voutp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.

1-160 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1345[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain / Imax volt prp gain
Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 5.499 0.250
Description: If the output current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the frequency inverter is dynamically controlled
by reducing the output voltage. This parameter sets the proportional gain of this controller.
Note: See parameter P1340 for further information.
The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

p1346[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time / Imax volt int time
Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
Description: Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller.
• P1341 = 0 : I_max controller disabled
• P1345 = 0 and P1346 > 0 : I_max voltage controller enhanced integral
• P1345 > 0 and P1346 > 0 : I_max voltage controller normal PI control
Note: See parameter P1340 for further information.
The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

p1350[0...2] Voltage soft start / Voltage soft start

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Sets whether voltage is built up smoothly during magnetization time (ON) or whether it simply jumps to boost volt-
age (OFF).
Values: 0: OFF
1: ON
Note: The settings for this parameter bring benefits and drawbacks:
• P1350 = 0: OFF (jump to boost voltage)
Benefit: flux is built up quickly
Drawback: motor may move
• P1350 = 1: ON (smooth voltage build-up)
Benefit: motor less likely to move
Drawback: flux build-up takes longer

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-161

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1400[0...2] Configuration of speed control / Config. of n-ctrl.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0001 bin
Description: Configuration for speed control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp adaption Yes No -
01 Integral freeze (SLVC) Yes No -
Note: P1400 Bit 00 = 1:
Automatic gain adaption of speed controller (P1460 resp. P1470) is enabled. In the area of field weakening the gain
is reduced in dependence on flux.
P1400 Bit01 = 1:
The integrator of the speed controller is frozen if Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC) is selected and the control is
switched from closed-loop to open-loop operation.
Advantage:
The correct amount of slip compensation is calculated and applied to the open-loop function for a motor under load.

r1407.0...15 CO/BO: Status 2 of motor control / Stat 2 ctrl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of motor control, which can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 V/f control enabled Yes No -
01 SLVC enabled Yes No -
02 Torque control enabled Yes No -
05 Stop I-comp. speed control Yes No -
06 Set I-comp. speed controller Yes No -
08 Upper torque limit active Yes No -
09 Lower torque limit active Yes No -
10 Droop active Yes No -
15 DDS change active Yes No -
Note: See P0052 (CO/BO: Status word 1)

r1438 CO: Freq. setpoint to controller / Freq. setp ctl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays setpoint of speed controller.

p1442[0...2] Filter time for act. speed / Filter time n_act.

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

2 [ms] 32000 [ms] 2 [ms]
Description: Sets time constant of PT1 filter to smooth actual speed of speed controller.

1-162 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1445 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt freq

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays filtered actual speed at speed controller input.

p1452[0...2] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) / Act.spd.filt. SLVC

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

2 [ms] 32000 [ms] 2 [ms]
Description: Sets time constant of PT1 filter to filter the speed deviation of speed controller in operation mode SLVC (sensorless
vector control).

p1460[0...2] Gain speed controller / Gain of n-ctrl.

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 2000.0 3.0
Description: Enters gain of speed controller.

p1462[0...2] Integral time speed controller / Tn of n-ctrl.

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

25 [ms] 32001 [ms] 400 [ms]
Description: Enters integral time of speed controller.

p1470[0...2] Gain speed controller (SLVC) / Gain n-ctrl (SLVC)

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 2000.0 3.0
Description: Enters gain of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC).

p1472[0...2] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) / Tn of n-ctrl. SLVC

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

25 [ms] 32001 [ms] 400 [ms]
Description: Enters integral time of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-163

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1477[0...2] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. / Set integrator

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting.

p1478[0...2] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. / Set int. value

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects source for integral part of speed controller.
Notice: Neither function works after flying start.
Note: If the P1482 (integral component of speed controller) is connected and the setting command is not connected
(P1477=0), upon pulse enable the integral component of the controller is set once to the last value prior the pulse
inhibit.

r1482 CO: Integral output of n-ctrl. / Int.outp n-ctrl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays integral part of speed controller output.

p1488[0...2] Droop input source / Droop input source

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Selects source of droop input signal.
With mechanically coupled motors it is very important that an even load distribution is applied to each motor. The
load sharing can be achieved by enabling the droop function on both inverters.
1. Droop is applied as a frequency setpoint on each inverter. The droop increases the slip via the negative feedback
of the torque setpoint to the frequency setpoint. In a steady-state an even load distribution can be achieved if the
slip characteristics are identical.
- P1488 > 0
- P1489 > 0
- P1492 = 1
2. Droop can act as a setpoint or limitation for a group of inverters (i.e. master-slave inverters). By use of the master-
slave inverter technique an even load distribution is achieved across the whole application. This is accomplished
by setting the torque setpoint (r1490) on the master inverter which then controls the speed of the master inverter
and all connected slave inverters.
- P1488 > 0
- P1489 > 0
- P1492 = 0
Values: 0: Droop input disabled
1: Torque setpoint
2: Speed controller output
3: Speed controller integral output
Dependency: Droop scaling (P1489) must be > 0 for droop to be effective.

1-164 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1489[0...2] Droop scaling / Droop scaling

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 0.50 0.05
Description: Defines amount of droop in per unit at full load in [%].
Note: If 0 is entered as value, no droop is applied.
The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

r1490 CO: Droop frequency / Droop freq.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays output signal of droop function.

This result of droop calculation is subtracted from the speed controller setpoint.

p1492[0...2] BI: Enable droop / Enable droop

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Enables droop.
Dependency: Effective only if droop scaling P1489 > 0.

p1496[0...2] Scaling accel. precontrol / Scal acc. prectrl.

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Enters scaling of acceleration in [%].
The response of setpoint changes for the speed control loop can be improved using the precontrol function
(P1496).
Precontrol is derived from the differential frequency setpoint multiplied by the mass inertia P0341; P0342 is then
supplied as a torque setpoint to the current controller.
If the filter (SLVC: P1452) is applied in the correct manner, the derived speed controller is only required to control a
small deviation in the value of the corrected variable.
Note: P1496 = 0: ==> Precontrol disabled
P1496 > 0: ==> Precontrol enabled
P1496 = 100: ==> Standard setting for precontrol

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-165

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1496[0...2] Scaling accel. precontrol / Scal acc. prectrl.

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Enters scaling of acceleration in [%].
The response of setpoint changes for the speed control loop can be improved using the precontrol function
(P1496).
Precontrol is derived from the differential frequency setpoint multiplied by the mass inertia P0341; P0342 is then
supplied as a torque setpoint to the current controller.
If the filter (VC: P1442, SLVC: P1452) is applied in the correct manner, the derived speed controller is only required
to control a small deviation in the value of the corrected variable.
Note: P1496 = 0: ==> Precontrol disabled
P1496 > 0: ==> Precontrol enabled
P1496 = 100: ==> Standard setting for precontrol

p1496[0...2] Scaling accel. precontrol / Scal acc. prectrl.

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Enters scaling of acceleration in [%].
The response of setpoint changes for the speed control loop can be improved using the precontrol function
(P1496).
Precontrol is derived from the differential frequency setpoint multiplied by the mass inertia P0341; P0342 is then
supplied as a torque setpoint to the current controller.
If the filter (VC: P1442, SLVC: P1452) is applied in the correct manner, the derived speed controller is only required
to control a small deviation in the value of the corrected variable.
Note: P1496 = 0: ==> Precontrol disabled (necessary for robustness of safety applications with SS1 and SLS)
P1496 > 0: ==> Precontrol enabled
P1496 = 100: ==> Standard setting for precontrol

p1499[0...2] Scaling accel. torque control / Scal acc. trq ctrl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Enters scaling of acceleration in [%] for sensorless torque control (SLVC) at low frequencies.

1-166 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1500[0...2] Selection of torque setpoint / Torque setp. sel.

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 77 0
Description: Selects torque setpoint source.
The selection of settings is detailed in the following table of values, in which the main setpoint is given by the least
significant digit (right-hand position) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand posi-
tion). Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
Values: 0: No main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
5: USS on RS485
7: Analog setpoint 2
20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint
25: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint
27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint
40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232
42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232
44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232
45: USS on RS485 + USS on RS232
47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232
50: No main setpoint + USS on RS485
52: Analog setpoint + USS on RS485
54: USS on RS232 + USS on RS485
55: USS on RS485 + USS on RS485
57: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS485
70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2
75: USS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P1503, P1511

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-167

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1500[0...2] Selection of torque setpoint / Torque setp. sel.

CU240S DP Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 77 0
Description: Selects torque setpoint source.
The selection of settings is detailed in the following table of values, in which the main setpoint is given by the least
significant digit (right-hand position) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand posi-
tion). Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
Values: 0: No main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus
7: Analog setpoint 2
20: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
22: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
24: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint
26: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint
27: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint
40: No main setpoint + USS on RS232
42: Analog setpoint + USS on RS232
44: USS on RS232 + USS on RS232
46: Fieldbus + USS on RS232
47: Analog setpoint 2 + USS on RS232
60: No main setpoint + Fieldbus
62: Analog setpoint + Fieldbus
64: USS on RS232 + Fieldbus
66: Fieldbus + Fieldbus
67: Analog setpoint 2 + Fieldbus
70: No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72: Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
74: USS on RS232 + Analog setpoint 2
76: Fieldbus + Analog setpoint 2
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P1503, P1511

p1501[0...2] BI: Change to torque control / Change > torq ctrl

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which it is possible to change between master (speed control) and slave (torque
control).
Caution: The OFF1 command is not recognized when torque control is selected indirectly (P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 1).
However, if direct selection of torque control is used (P1300 = 22) the OFF1 command is recognized as OFF2.
If indirect selection of torque control is used, it is recommended to program an OFF2 command using, for example
a digital input or create a circuit using the Free Function Blocks (FFB):
Note: Speed control without encoder feedback see P1470.

1-168 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1501[0...2] BI: Change to torque control / Change > torq ctrl

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects command source from which it is possible to change between master (speed control) and slave (torque
control).
Caution: The OFF1 command is not recognized when torque control is selected indirectly (P1300 = 20, 21 and P1501 = 1).
However, if direct selection of torque control is used (P1300 = 22, 23) the OFF1 command is recognized as OFF2.
If indirect selection of torque control is used, it is recommended to program an OFF2 command using, for example
a digital input or create a circuit using the Free Function Blocks (FFB):
Note: Speed control with encoder feedback see P1460.
Speed control without encoder feedback see P1470.

p1503[0...2] CI: Torque setpoint / Torque setp.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control.

r1508 CO: Torque setpoint / Torque setp.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays torque setpoint before limitation.

p1511[0...2] CI: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control.

r1515 CO: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays additional torque setpoint.

r1518 CO: Acceleration torque / Accel. torque

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays acceleration torque.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-169

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1520[0...2] CO: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]
Description: Specifies fixed value for upper torque limitation.

P0640
p1520 def = r0333 ⋅
100 %
p1520 max = ± 4 ⋅ r0333

p1521[0...2] CO: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99999.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] -5.13 [Nm]
Description: Specifies fixed value of lower torque limitation.

P0640
p1521def = - r0333 ⋅
100 %
p1521max = ± 4 ⋅ r0333

p1522[0...2] CI: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1520[0]
Description: Selects source of upper torque limitation.

p1523[0...2] CI: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1521[0]
Description: Selects source of lower torque limitation.

p1525[0...2] Scaling lower torque limit / Scal. low trq. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-400.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Specifies scaling of lower torque limitation in [%].
Note: P1525 = 100 % = standard setting

1-170 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1526 CO: Upper torque limitation / Upper trq. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual upper torque limitation.

Resultant
torque limit
|M| Power Stall
limitation limitation

Torque limitation

1 1
r1526 ~ ~
f f2
r1527

p1530
p1531

|f act|
Constant Constant f stall Stall
torque power power

Dependency: The parameters r1526 and r1527 depend on P1520, P1521, P1522, P1523 and P1525.

r1527 CO: Lower torque limitation / Lower trq. lim

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual lower torque limitation.

Note: See parameter r1526.

p1530[0...2] Motoring power limitation / Motoring power lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 8000.0 0.75
Description: Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power (motoring power limitation).

p1530 def = 2.5 ⋅ P0307

p1530 max = 3 ⋅ P0307
Parameter P1530 limits the torque in addition to the act. frequency as displayed in the following characteristic.
Power limitation (motoring, regenerative)

P M
M=
2⋅π⋅f
p1530
p1531

p1531
p1530

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-171

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1531[0...2] Regenerative power limitation / Regener. power lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-8000.0 0.0 -0.75
Description: Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active power (regenerative power limitation).

p1531def = - 1 ⋅ P0307
p1531min = - 1 ⋅ P0307
Note: See parameter P1530.

r1536 CO: Max. trq. motoring current / Max trq mot cur
Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays maximum torque motoring current component.

r1537 CO: Max trq regenerative current / Max trq reg cur
Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Displays maximum torque of the regenerative current component.

r1538 CO: Upper torque limit (total) / Total up TrqLim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -
Description: Displays total upper torque limitation.

r1539 CO: Lower torque limit (total) / Total lw TrqLim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Nm] Data set: -

Description: Displays total lower torque limitation.

p1570[0...2] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint / Fval flux setp

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Defines fixed value of flux setpoint in [%] relative to rated motor flux.
Note: If P1570 > 100 %, the flux setpoint rises according to the load from 100 % to the value of P1570 between idling and
nominal load.

p1574[0...2] Dynamic voltage headroom / Dyn. volt headroom

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [V] 150 [V] 10 [V]
Description: Sets dynamic voltage headroom for vector control.

1-172 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1580[0...2] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency optimiz

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization for closed-loop vector control in [%]. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux set-
point is adapted as a function of the load.
Note: If P1580 > 0, the dynamics for speed control (P1470, P1472) are restricted to prevent vibration.
When no load is applied, a value of 100 % produces full flux reduction (i.e. to 50 % of rated motor flux).
When using optimization, it is necessary to increase the smoothing time of the flux setpoint (P1582).

p1582[0...2] Smooth time for flux setpoint / Flux setp. Tsmooth

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

4 [ms] 500 [ms] 15 [ms]
Description: Sets time constant of PT1 filter to smooth flux setpoint.

r1583 CO: Flux setpoint (smoothed) / Smoothed setp.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays smoothed flux setpoint in [%] relative to rated motor flux.

p1596[0...2] Int. time field weak. controller / Int.time weak.ctrl

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20 [ms] 32001 [ms] 50 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the field weakening controller.

r1597 CO: Outp. field weak. controller / Outp.weak. ctrl

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays output signal of field weakening controller in [%] relative to rated motor flux.

r1598 CO: Flux setpoint (total) / Total flux setp

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays total flux setpoint in [%] relative to the rated motor flux.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-173

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1610[0...2] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) / Cont. torque boost

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets continuous torque boost in lower speed range of SLVC (sensorless vector control).
Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333.

isd f

f(t)
p1755

isd(p1610, p1611) isd(t)

p1610 = p1611 = 0
r0331
t
p0346

Note: P1610 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor torque.

p1611[0...2] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) / Acc trq boost SLVC

Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets acceleration torque boost in lower speed range of SLVC (sensorless vector control).
Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333.
Note: P1611 = 100 % corresponds to rated motor torque.

p1654[0...2] Smooth time for Isq setpoint / Isq setp. Tsmooth

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

2.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms] 6.0 [ms]
Description: Sets time constant of PT1 filter to filter setpoint of torque generating current component in field weakening range.

p1715[0...2] Gain current controller / Gain current ctrl.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 5.00 0.25
Description: Enters gain of current controller.

1-174 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1717[0...2] Integral time current controller / Int.time cur. ctrl

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1.0 [ms] 50.0 [ms] 4.1 [ms]
Description: Enters integral time of current controller.

r1718 CO: Output of Isq controller / Outp. Isq ctrl

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual output of Isq current (torque current) controller (PI controller).
It contains the proportional and integral part of the PI controller.

r1719 CO: Integral output of Isq ctrl. / Int. outp. Isq

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -
Description: Displays integral output of Isq current (torque current) controller (PI controller).

r1723 CO: Output of Isd controller / Outp. Isd ctrl

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual output of Isd current (flux current) controller (PI controller).
It contains the proportional and integral part of the PI controller.

r1724 CO: Integral output of Isd ctrl. / Int. outp. Isd

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays integral output of Isd current (flux current) controller (PI controller).

r1725 CO: Integral limit of Isd ctrl. / Int. limit Isd

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays limit of integral output voltage setpoint of Isd current controller.

r1728 CO: Decoupling voltage / Decoupl. volt

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays actual output voltage setpoint of cross channel decoupling.

p1740 Gain for oscillation damping / Oscill. damp. gain

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 10.000 0.000
Description: Sets oscillation damping gain for sensorless vector control at low frequencies. The oscillation damping subtracts
the result of a delayed differential (DT1) from the setpoint frequency.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-175

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1745[0...2] Flux variance limit in stall / Flux var.lim.stall

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux variance limit.
With SLVC the variance between the flux setpoint and the actual flux is used to detect motor stall conditions.
Note: The function is active, with SLVC (P1300 = 20 or 22) and control in open loop mode (output frequency > P1755).

r1746 CO: Actual flux variance / Act. flux variance

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays the present percentage of flux variance. See P1745.

p1750[0...2] Control word of motor model / Motor model CtrlWd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: Control word of motor model.
This parameter controls the operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) at very low frequencies.
This therefore includes the following conditions:
• Operation directly after an ON command
• zero crossing.
SLVC open loop means that the speed controller does not get any speed feedback from the observer model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Start SLVC open loop Yes No -
01 Zero crossing SLVC open loop Yes No -

r1751.0...15 CO/BO: Status word of motor model / Motor model StatWd

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays status of transition from feed-forward to observer-control and vice versa.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Open loop operation Yes No -
01 RFG set by transition control Yes No -
02 Rs/Lh adaption stopped Yes No -
03 Observer feedback enabled Yes No -
04 Angle hold active Yes No -
05 Accelertation check enabled Yes No -
06 Sensor mode active Yes No -
14 Rs adapted Yes No -
15 Xh adapted Yes No -

1-176 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1752[0...2] Start-freq. speed adaption (VC with encoder) / Start-freq. (VC)

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: U, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.1 [Hz] 250.0 [Hz] 5.0 [Hz]
Description: Enters start frequency of the n adaption in vector control with encoder (VC, hysteresis like P1755).
The feature of speed-adaptation is an essential function to correct the torque (i.e. slip) in VC-mode. However, at low
frequencies the activated n-adaptation may cause some troubles. Therefore, below the limit of P1752 * P1756 / 100
% this feature is switched off.

p1755[0...2] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Start-freq. (SLVC)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.2 [Hz] 250.0 [Hz] 5.0 [Hz]
Description: Assigns in SLVC the frequency limit for switch over from closed-loop operation to open-loop operation and vice
versa.
Note: For detailed information see "Function manual", Section "Vector Control without Speed Encoder".

p1756[0...2] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Hyst. freq. (SLVC)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Hysterisis value for open-/closed-loop control (SLVC) and activation/deactivation of speed adaption (VC).
Note: For detailed information see "Function manual", Section "Vector Control without Speed Encoder".

p1758[0...2] T(wait) transit to open-loop / T(wait) trans.->OL

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

100 [ms] 2000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Sets waiting time for change from closed-loop to open-loop control mode.
Note: For detailed information see "Function manual", Section "Vector Control without Speed Encoder".

p1759[0...2] T(wait) transit to closed-loop / T(wait) trans.->CL

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets waiting time for change from open-loop to closed-loop control mode.
Note: For detailed information see "Function manual", Section "Vector Control without Speed Encoder".

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-177

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1764[0...2] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) / Kp n-adapt. (SLVC)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 2.5 0.2
Description: Enters gain of speed adaptation controller for sensorless vector control.

p1767[0...2] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) / Tn n-adapt. (SLVC)

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms] 4.0 [ms]
Description: Enters speed adaptation controller integral time.

r1770 CO: Prop. output of n-adaption / Prop outp n-ad

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays proportional part of speed adaptation controller.

r1771 CO: Int. output of n-adaption / Int. outp n-ad

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Displays integral part of speed adaptation controller.

r1778 CO: Flux angle difference / Flux angle diff

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [°] Data set: -

Description: Displays flux angle difference between motor model and current transformation before motor model is active.

p1780[0...2] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption / CtrlWd Rs/Rr adapt

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0111 bin
Description: Enables thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistance to reduce torque errors in speed/torque regulation with
speed sensor, or speed errors in speed/torque regulation without speed sensor.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt. Yes No -
01 Enable observer Rs-adapt. Yes No -
02 Enable observer Xm-adapt. Yes No -
Note: Only stator resistance adaptation is carried out for synchronous motors.

1-178 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1781[0...2] Tn of Rs-adaption / Tn of Rs-adaption

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [ms] 2000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Enters Rs-adaptation controller integral time.

r1782 CO: Output of Rs-adaptation / Output Rs-adaption

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays stator resistance adaptation from controller in [%] relative to rated motor resistance.
Note: The rated motor resistance is given by the formula:

Rated motor impedance:

VN p0304
ZN = = <=> 100 %
3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ p0305

p1786[0...2] Tn of Xm-adaption / Tn of Xm-adaption

Access level: 4 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [ms] 2000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Enters Xm-adaptation controller integral time.

r1787 CO: Output of Xm-adaption / Outp. Xm-adaption

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays main reactance adaptation from controller in [%] relative to rated impedance.
Note: The rated motor resistance is given by the formula:

Rated motor impedance:

VN p0304
ZN = = <=> 100 %
3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ p0305

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-179

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1800[0...2] Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency

Access level: 2 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

2 [kHz] 16 [kHz] 4 [kHz]
Description: Sets pulse frequency of power switches in inverter.
The frequency can be changed in steps of 2 kHz.
Dependency: The minimum/maximum/default values of the pulse frequency are determined by the used power module.
Furthermore the minimum pulse frequency depends on the parametrization of P1082 (maximum frequency) and
P0310 (rated motor frequency).
Note: If the pulse frequency is increased, max. inverter current r0209 can be reduced (derating). The derating character-
istic depends on the type and power of the inverter.
If silent operation is not absolutely necessary, lower pulse frequencies may be selected to reduce inverter losses
and radio-frequency emissions.
Under certain circumstances, the inverter may reduce the pulse frequency to provide protection against overtem-
perature (see P0290 and P0291 Bit00).

r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: [kHz] Data set: -

Description: Displays informations about pulse frequency of power switches in inverter.

r1801[0] Displays the actual inverter pulse frequency.
r1801[1] Displays the minimum inverter pulse frequency which can be reached when the functions "motor identifica-
tion" or "inverter overload reaction" are active. If no PM is plugged this parameter is set to 0 kHz.
Index: [0] = Actual pulse frequency
[1] = Minimum pulse frequency
Notice: Under certain conditions (inverter overtemperature, see P0290), this can differ from the values selected in P1800
(pulse frequency).

p1802 Modulator mode / Modulator mode

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1 3 3
Description: Selects inverter modulator mode.
Values: 1: Asymmetric SVM
2: Space vector modulation
3: SVM/ASVM controlled mode
Notice: • Asymmetric space vector modulation (ASVM) produces lower switching losses than space vector modulation
(SVM), but may cause irregular rotation at very low speeds.
• Space vector modulation (SVM) with over-modulation may produce current waveform distortion at high output
voltages.
• Space vector modulation (SVM) without over-modulation will reduce maximum output voltage available to
motor.
Note: If a LC-filter is selected (P0230 = 3 or (P0230 = 4 and P0234 > 0)), modulation is set to SVM (P1802 = 2) .
If an internal output filter is installed the modulation is foreced to SVM (P0230 = 3 and P1802 = 2).

1-180 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1803[0...2] Max. modulation / Max. modulation

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Description: Sets maximum modulation index.
Note: P1803 = 100 % : Limit for over-control (for ideal inverter without switching delay).
For vector control the modulation limit will be reduced automatically with 4 %.
If a LC-filter is selected (P0230 = 3 or (P0230 = 4 and P234 > 0)), the max. modulation index is set to 100 % if it is
greater than 100 %.
If an internal output filter is installed the modulation depth is limited to 100 % (p0230 = 3 and p1803 <= 100 %).

p1810 Control word Vdc control / Control word vdc c

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0010 bin
Description: Configures Vdc filtering and compensation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 enable Vdc average filter Yes No -
01 enable Vdc compensation Yes No -

p1820[0...2] Reverse output phase sequence / Rev.outp.phase seq

Access level: 2 P-Group: Modulation Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Changes direction of motor rotation without changing setpoint polarity.
Values: 0: Forward
1: Reverse the Motor
Dependency: If positive and negative revolution is enabled, frequency setpoint is directly used.
If both positive and negative revolution are disabled, reference value is set to zero.
Note: See P1000 (select frequency setpoint)

p1825 On-state voltage of IGBT / On-state voltage

Access level: 4 P-Group: Modulation Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [V] 20.0 [V] 0.9 [V]
Description: Corrects on-state voltage of the IGBTs.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-181

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1828 Gating unit dead time / Gating dead time

Access level: 4 P-Group: Modulation Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [µs] 3.98 [µs] 0.01 [µs]
Description: Sets compensation time of gating unit interlock.

p1860 Filter control word / Filter control wor

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: To control the Voltage-/current correction.
Voltage- and current correction can be enabled/disabled separately (output filter).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Filter correction on/off Yes No -
01 Voltage correction on/off Yes No -
02 Current correction on/off Yes No -

r1861 Filter correction voltage (alpha-component) / Filter correction

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Alpha component of the voltage correction value (output filter installed and vector control active).

r1862 Filter correction voltage (beta-component) / Filter correction

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Beta component of the voltage correction value (output filter installed and vector control active).

r1863 Filter correction current (alpha-component) / Filter correction

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Alpha component of the current correction (output filter installed and vector control active).

r1864 Filter correction current (beta-component) / Filter correction

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [A] Data set: -

Description: Beta component of the current correction (output filter installed and vector control active).

1-182 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1900 Select motor data identification / Sel.mot.data ident

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Performs a motor data identification.
Values: 0: Disabled
2: Identification of all parameters in standstill
3: Ident. of all param. in standstill incl. the saturation curve
Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor.
However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5 °C of the
measured ambient temperature stored in P0625.
If the motor identification is not within the 5 °C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (SLVC) cannot be
guaranteed.
The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (star or delta connection)
must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data.
The motor identification calculates this data based on a phase of a star equivalent circuit P0350 - P0360, irrespec-
tive of whether the motor is connected star or delta.
This must be considered when the motor data is inputed directly.
Notice: P1910 can't be changed while the motoridentification is active (P1900 = 2 or 3).
When the identification is finished P1900 and P1910 are set to 0.
Note: Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differ in a wide range the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough estimation.
Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifing the cable resistor before the start of the motor
identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1900 > 0), A0541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of
motor parameters.

Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make inter-
nal calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-183

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1900 Select motor data identification / Sel.mot.data ident

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: C, T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Performs a motor data identification.
Values: 0: Disabled
2: Identification of all parameters in standstill
3: Ident. of all param. in standstill incl. the saturation curve
Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor.
However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5 °C of the
measured ambient temperature stored in P0625.
If the motor identification is not within the 5 °C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (VC, SLVC) can-
not be guaranteed.
The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (star or delta connection)
must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data.
The motor identification calculates this data based on a phase of a star equivalent circuit P0350 - P0360, irrespec-
tive of whether the motor is connected star or delta.
This must be considered when the motor data is inputed directly.
Notice: P1910 can't be changed while the motoridentification is active (P1900 = 2 or 3).
When the identification is finished P1900 and P1910 are set to 0.
Note: Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differ in a wide range the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough estimation.
Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifing the cable resistor before the start of the motor
identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1900 > 0), A0541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of
motor parameters.

Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make inter-
nal calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

1-184 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1909[0...2] Ctrl. word of motor data ident. / Ctrl.mot.data id.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0101 1100 0000 0000 bin
Description: Control word of motor data identification.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Estimation of Xs Yes No -
02 Estimation of Tr Yes No -
03 Estimation of Lsigma Yes No -
05 Det. Tr meas. with 2 freq. Yes No -
06 Measurement of on voltage Yes No -
07 Deadtime detection from Rs measurement Yes No -
08 MotID with hw deadtime comp activ Yes No -
09 No deadtime detection with 2 freq Yes No -
10 Detect Ls with LsBlock method Yes No -
11 MotID adaption of magnetizing current Yes No -
12 MotID adaption of main reactance Yes No -
13 MotID switch off saturation curve optim. Yes No -
14 MotID saturation curve optim. all framesizes Yes No -
15 MotID saturation curve optim. big frame- Yes No -
sizes

p1910 Select motor data identification extended / Sel.mot.data ident

CU240E Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 23 0
Description: Performs a motor data identification with extended figures.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Identification of all parameters with parameter change
2: Identification of all parameters without parameter change
3: Identification of saturation curve with parameter change
4: Identification of saturation curve without parameter change
5: Identification of XsigDyn (r1920) without parameter change
6: Identification of Tdead (r1926) without parameter change
7: Identification of Rs (r1912 ) without parameter change
8: Identification of Xs (r1915) without parameter change
9: Identification of Tr (r1913) without parameter change
10: Identification of Xsigma (r1914) without parameter change
20: Set voltage vector
21: Set voltage vector without filtering in P69
22: Set voltage vector rectangle signal
23: Set voltage vector triangle signal
Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor.
However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5°C of the
measured ambient temperature stored in P0625.
If the motor identification is not within the 5°C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (SLVC) cannot be
guaranteed.
The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (Star or delta connection)
must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data.
The motor identification calculates this data based on a Phase of a Star equivalent circuit P0350 - P0360, irrespec-
tive of whether the motor is connected star or delta.
This must be considered when the motor data is inputed directly.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-185

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Notice: P1910 can't be changed while the motoridentification with P1900 is active (P1900 = 2 or 3).
When the identification is finished P1910 is set to 0.
When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:
1. "with parameter change"
means that the values are actually adopted as Pxxxx parameter settings (see common settings above) and ap-
plied to the controller as well as being shown in the read-only parameters below.
2. "without parameter change"
means that the values are only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameters r1912
(identified stator resistance), r1913 (identified rotor time constant), r1914 (ident. total leakage reactance),
r1915/r1916/r1917/r1918/r1919 (identified nominal stator reactance/identified stator reactance 1 to 4), r1925 (IG-
BT on-state voltage) and r1926 (identified gating unit dead time). The values are not applied to the controller.
Note: Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differ in a wide range the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough estimation.
Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifing the cable resistor before the start of the motor
identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1910 > 0), A0541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of
motor parameters.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make inter-
nal calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

p1910 Select motor data identification extended / Sel.mot.data ident

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 23 0
Description: Performs a motor data identification with extended figures.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Identification of all parameters with parameter change
2: Identification of all parameters without parameter change
3: Identification of saturation curve with parameter change
4: Identification of saturation curve without parameter change
5: Identification of XsigDyn (r1920) without parameter change
6: Identification of Tdead (r1926) without parameter change
7: Identification of Rs (r1912 ) without parameter change
8: Identification of Xs (r1915) without parameter change
9: Identification of Tr (r1913) without parameter change
10: Identification of Xsigma (r1914) without parameter change
20: Set voltage vector
21: Set voltage vector without filtering in P69
22: Set voltage vector rectangle signal
23: Set voltage vector triangle signal

1-186 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Caution: Motor identification should be performed on a cold motor.

However, the identification of the motor data should only be performed if the motor temperature is within 5°C of the
measured ambient temperature stored in P0625.
If the motor identification is not within the 5°C limit then the correct functioning of Vector Control (VC, SLVC) cannot
be guaranteed.
The motor rating plate information with respect to the connection of the motor windings (Star or delta connection)
must be correct in order to establish the correct equivalent circuit data.
The motor identification calculates this data based on a Phase of a Star equivalent circuit P0350 - P0360, irrespec-
tive of whether the motor is connected star or delta.
This must be considered when the motor data is inputed directly.
Notice: P1910 can't be changed while the motoridentification with P1900 is active (P1900 = 2 or 3).
When the identification is finished P1910 is set to 0.
When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:
1. "with parameter change"
means that the values are actually adopted as Pxxxx parameter settings (see common settings above) and ap-
plied to the controller as well as being shown in the read-only parameters below.
2. "without parameter change"
means that the values are only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameters r1912
(identified stator resistance), r1913 (identified rotor time constant), r1914 (ident. total leakage reactance),
r1915/r1916/r1917/r1918/r1919 (identified nominal stator reactance/identified stator reactance 1 to 4), r1925 (IG-
BT on-state voltage) and r1926 (identified gating unit dead time). The values are not applied to the controller.
Note: Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differ in a wide range the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough estimation.
Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifing the cable resistor before the start of the motor
identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1910 > 0), A0541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of
motor parameters.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make inter-
nal calculations.
This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

p1911 No. of phase to be identified / No.of phase for id

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

1 3 1
Description: Selects maximum number of motor phases to be identified.
Note: Because of averaging (measurement inprecisseness and variations in the phase) a measurement with 3 phases
delivers better results than a one phase measurement, but needs significant longer measurement time.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-187

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / Identif. stat. res

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Ohm] Data set: -

Description: Displays measured stator resistance value (line-to-line) in [Ohms]. This value also includes the cable resistances.
Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Notice: If the value identified (Rs = stator resistance) does not lie within the range 0.1 % < Rs [p. u.] < 100 % fault message
41 (motor data identification failure) is issued.
P0949 provides further information (fault value = 2 in this case).
Note: This value is measured using P1900 = 2 or 3 (P1910 = 1 or 2) , i.e., identification of all parameters with/without
change.

r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / Identif.rot.Tconst

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [ms] Data set: -

Description: Displays identified rotor time constant. [msec]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Notice: If the value identified (Tr = rotor time constant) does not lie within the range 10ms < Tr < 5s fault message 41 (motor
data identification failure) is issued.
P0949 provides further information (fault value = 6 in this case).

r1914[0...2] Ident. total leakage inductance / Tot.leak.induct.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified total leakage inductance. [mH]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Notice: If the value identified (Lsigma = leakage inductance) does not lie within the range 5 % < Xsigma [p. u.] < 50 % fault
message 41 (motor data identification failure) is issued.
P0949 provides further information (fault value = 7 in this case).

r1915[0...2] Ident. nom. stator inductance / Nom.stat.induct.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified stator inductance. [mH]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Notice: If the value identified (Ls = stator inductance) does not lie within the range 50 % < Xs [p. u.] < 500 % fault message
41 (motor data identification failure) is issued.
P0949 provides further information (fault value = 4 in this case).

1-188 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / Stator induct. 1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified stator inductance. [mH]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Note: See P1915 (identified nominal stator inductance).

r1917[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / Stator induct. 2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays identified stator inductance. [mH]
Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Note: See P1915 (identified nominal stator inductance)

r1918[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / Stator induct. 3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified stator inductance. [mH]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Note: See P1915 (identified nominal stator reactance)

r1919[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / Stator induct. 4

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified stator inductance. [mH]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Note: See P1915 (identified nominal stator inductance)

r1920[0...2] Identified dyn. leak. inductance / Dyn. leak. induct.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identified total dynamic leakage inductance.

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-189

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r1925[0...2] Identified on-state voltage / Id. on-state V.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [V] Data set: -

Description: Displays identified on-state voltage of IGBT. [V]

Index: [0] = U_phase
[1] = V_phase
[2] = W_phase
Notice: If the identified on-state voltage does not lie within the range 0.0V < 10V fault message 41 (motor data identification
failure) is issued.
P0949 provides further information (fault value = 20 in this case).

r1926 Ident. gating unit dead time / Id.gating deadtime

Access level: 2 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [µs] Data set: -

Description: Displays identified dead time of gating unit interlock. [usec]

p1930 Voltage setpoint for calibration / Volt setp. calibr.

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [V] 1000 [V] 0 [V]
Description: Specifies reference voltage for generation of a test voltage vector (e.g. used for shunt calibration). [V]

p1931 Phase / Phase

Access level: 4 P-Group: Motor identification Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

1 12 1
Description: Defines phase of voltage vector
1: u-axis
2: v-axis
3: w-axis
4: -u-axis
5: -v-axis
6: -w-axis
7: uv-axis (30°)
8: wu-axis (150°)
9: vw-axis (270°)
10: -uv-axis (210°)
11: -wu-axis (330°)
12: -vw-axis (90°)

1-190 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1960 Speed control optimisation / Speed control opt.

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: C, T
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
PM240

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: The drive should be set into a vector mode (P1300 = 20) to carry out speed controller optimisation.
When speed controller optimisation is enabled (P1960 = 1) the warning A0542 will become active.
When the drive is next started it will do the optimisation tests.
The drive will accelerate the motor to 20 % of P0310 (rated motor frequency) using the ramp up time P1120 and
then under torque control go to 50 % of P0310 (rated motor frequency). The drive will then ramp back down to 20 %
using the ramp down time P1121. This procedure is repeated several times and then average time taken.
From this an estimation of the inertia of the load on the motor can be derived.
From this the inertia ratio parameter (P0342) and the Kp gains for SLVC (P1470) are modified to give a response
suitable for the measured inertia.
Values: 0: Disable
1: Enable
Notice: If there is a problem due to instability the drive may trip with an F0042 fault if a stable value has not been obtained
on the ramp up within a reasonable time.
It should be noted that the DC link controller should be enabled whilst doing the test as otherwise overvoltage trips
may be experienced. This will however depend on the ramp down time and the system inertia.
The speed loop optimisation may not be suitable for some applications due to the nature of the test i.e. accelerating
under torque control from 20 % to 50 %.
Note: The speed-controller optimisation can only be carried out if:
• inverter is in vector control mode
• no torque control is active
• no flying start function active (P1200 = 0)
• without a load on the motor
The speed-controller optimisation changes always both parameters P1460 and P1470 undepending what mode
(P1300 = 20 or 21) is active. When the test is complete P1960 will be cleared to zero.
In SLVC (P1300 = 20) the drive will set the motor model to start in open loop (P1750.0 = 1) when the speed control
optimisation is selected (P1960 = 1) and will be set to its old state after the end of the optimisation (P1960 = 0).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-191

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p1960 Speed control optimisation / Speed control opt.

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Motor Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: C, T
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
PM250, PM260

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: The drive should be set into a vector mode (P1300 = 20) to carry out speed controller optimisation.
When speed controller optimisation is enabled (P1960 = 1) the warning A0542 will become active.
When the drive is next started it will do the optimisation tests.
The drive will accelerate the motor to 20 % of P0310 (rated motor frequency) using the ramp up time P1120 and
then under torque control go to 50 % of P0310 (rated motor frequency). The drive will then ramp back down to 20 %
using the ramp down time P1121. This procedure is repeated several times and then average time taken.
From this an estimation of the inertia of the load on the motor can be derived.
From this the inertia ratio parameter (P0342) and the Kp gains for SLVC (P1470) are modified to give a response
suitable for the measured inertia.
Values: 0: Disable
1: Enable
Notice: If there is a problem due to instability the drive may trip with an F0042 fault if a stable value has not been obtained
on the ramp up within a reasonable time.
The speed loop optimisation may not be suitable for some applications due to the nature of the test i.e. accelerating
under torque control from 20 % to 50 %.
Note: The speed-controller optimisation can only be carried out if:
• inverter is in vector control mode
• no torque control is active
• no flying start function active (P1200 = 0)
• without a load on the motor
The speed-controller optimisation changes always both parameters P1460 and P1470 undepending what mode
(P1300 = 20 or 21) is active. When the test is complete P1960 will be cleared to zero.
In SLVC (P1300 = 20) the drive will set the motor model to start in open loop (P1750.0 = 1) when the speed control
optimisation is selected (P1960 = 1) and will be set to its old state after the end of the optimisation (P1960 = 0).

1-192 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2000[0...2] Reference frequency / Reference freq.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

1.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency for frequency values which are displayed/transferred as a
percentage or a hexadecimal value.
Where:
• hexadecimal 4000 H ==> P2000 (e.g.: USS-PZD)
• percentage 100 % ==> P2000 (e.g.: AI)
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical
(i.e. Hz) values) may differ.
SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value.

p2016
r0021 [0]
USS-PZD r0021[Hz]
[1] y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
on RS232 p2000[Hz]
[2]
[3]
x[Hz] y[Hex]

r2015
[0] p1070
USS-PZD r2015[1]
[1] y[Hz] = ⋅ p2000
on RS232 4000[Hex]
[2]
[3]
x[Hex] y[Hz]

Dependency: When Quick Commissioning is carried out P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.
Caution: Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency of the above mentioned interfaces.
A maximum frequency setpoint of 2*P2000 can be applied via the corresponding interface.
Unlike parameter P1082 (Max. Frequency) this limits the inverter frequency internally independent of the reference
frequency.
By modification of P2000 it will also adapt the parameter to the new settings.

f (Hex) P1082
PZD

Setpoint Motor
f [Hz] channel f_act f_act,limit control
f (%)
Analog
Normalization Limitation

f(Hex) f(%)
f[Hz] = ⋅ p2000 = ⋅ P2000 f_act,limit = min(p1082, f_act)
4000(Hex) 100 %
Notice: Reference parameters are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and actual value signals in a uniform manner.
This also applies to fixed settings entered as a precentage.
A value of 100 % correspondes to a process data value of 4000H, or 4000 0000H in the case of double values.
In this respect, the following parameters are available:

p2000 Reference frequency Hz

p2001 Reference voltage V
p2002 Reference current A
p2003 Reference torque Nm
kW
p2004 Reference power hp f(p0100)

Note: Changes to P2000 result in a new calculation of P2004.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-193

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2001[0...2] Reference voltage / Reference voltage

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

10 [V] 2000 [V] 1000 [V]
Description: Full-scale output voltage (i.e. 100 % ) used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example:
r0026 p0771
r0026[V]
AI y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
p2001[V]

x[V] y[Hex]

Note: Changes to P2001 result in a new calculation of P2004.

p2002[0...2] Reference current / Reference current

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.10 [A] 10000.00 [A] 0.10 [A]
Description: Full-scale output current used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical
(i.e. A) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.

p2051
r0027 [0]
[1] r0027[A]
Fieldbus y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
[2] p2002[A]
[3]
x[A] y[Hex]

Note: Changes to P2002 result in a new calculation of P2004.

p2003[0...2] Reference torque / Reference torque

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.10 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 0.75 [Nm]
Description: Full-scale reference torque used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P1500, the 'unit' of the parameters
(standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Nm) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value
is made.

p2051
r0080 [0]
r0080[Nm]
[1] Fieldbus y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
[2] p2003[Nm]
[3]
x[Nm] y[Hex]

Note: Changes to P2003 result in a new calculation of P2004.

1-194 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2004[0...2] Reference power / Reference power

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 2000.00 0.75
Description: Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical
(i.e. kW / hp) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.

P2016
r0032 [0]
r0032
[1] USS RS232 y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
[2] P2004
[3]
x[kW] y[Hex]
or
x[hp]
depending on P0100

p2004[0...2] Reference power / Reference power

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 2000.00 0.75
Description: Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical
(i.e. kW / hp) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.

P2051
r0032 [0]
r0032
[1] Fieldbus y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
[2] P2004
[3]
x[kW] y[Hex]
or
x[hp]
depending on P0100

p2010[0...1] USS baudrate / USS baudrate

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

4 12 8
Description: Sets baud rate for USS communication.
Values: 4: 2400 baud
5: 4800 baud
6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud
11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-195

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Index: [0] = USS on RS485

[1] = USS on RS232

p2011[0...1] USS address / USS address

Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 31 0
Description: Sets unique address for inverter.
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232
Note: You can connect up to a further 30 inverters via the serial link (i.e. 31 inverters in total) and control them with the
USS serial bus protocol.

p2012[0...1] USS PZD length / USS PZD length

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 8 2
Description: Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram.
In this area, process data (PZD) are continually exchanged between the master and slaves.
The PZD part of the USS telegram is used for the main setpoint, and to control the inverter.
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232
Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P2012 and P2013
respectively.
USS telegram

Parameter Process data

STX LGE ADR BCC
PKW PZD

PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4

STX Start of text PKE Parameter ID

LGE Length IND Sub-index
ADR Address PWE Parameter value
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
BCC Block check character
PZD transmits a control word and setpoint or status word and actual values.
The number of PZD-words in a USS-telegram are determined by parameter P2012, where the first two words are
either:
a) control word and main setpoint or
b) status word and actual value.
When P2012 is greater or equal to 4 the additional control word is transferred as the 4th PZD-word (default setting).
STW HSW
ZSW HIW STW2

PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4

p2012

STW Control word HSW Main setpoint

ZSW Status word HIW Main actual value
PZD Process data

1-196 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2013[0...1] USS PKW length / USS PKW length

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 127 127
Description: Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.
The PKW area can be varied.
Depending on the particular requirement, 3-word, 4-word or variable word lengths can be parameterized.
The PKW part of the USS telegram is used to read and write individual parameter values.
Values: 0: No words
3: 3 words
4: 4 words
127: Variable
Example:
Data type
U16 (16 Bit) U32 (32 Bit) Float (32 Bit)
p2013 = 3 X Parameter access fault Parameter access fault
p2013 = 4 X X X
p2013 = 127 X X X

Index: [0] = USS on RS485

[1] = USS on RS232
Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P2012 and P2013
respectively.
Parameter P2013 determines the number of PKW-words in a USS-telegram.
Setting P2013 to 3 or 4 determines the length of the PKW words (3 = three words and 4 = four words).
When P2013 set to 127 automatically adjusts the length of the PKW words are required.

p2013 = 3 p2013
PKE IND PWE

1 word
each 16 Bit
p2013 = 4 p2013
PKE IND PWE

PKE Parameter ID
IND Sub-index
PWE Parameter value

If a fixed PKW length is selected only one parameter value can be transferred.
In the case of indexed parameter, you must use the variable PKW length if you wish to have the values of all indices
transferred in a single telegram.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-197

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

In selecting the fixed PKW length, it is important to ensure the value in question can be transferred using this PKW
length.
P2013 = 3, fixes PKW length, but does not allow access to many parameter values.
A parameter fault is generated when an out-of-range value is used, the value will not be accepted but the inverter
state will not be affected. Broadcast mode is not possible with this setting
P2013 = 4, fixes PKW length.
Allows access to all parameters, but indexed parameters can only be read one index at a time.
Word order for single word values are different to setting 3 or 127, see example below.
P2013 = 127, most useful setting.
PKW reply length varies depending on the amount of information needed.
Can read fault information and all indices of a parameter with a single telegram with this setting.
Example:
Set P0700 to value 5 (0700 = 2BC (hex))

p2013 = 3 p2013 = 4 p2013 = 127

Master → SINAMICS 22BC 0000 0006 22BC 0000 0000 0006 22BC 0000 0006 0000
SINAMICS → Master 12BC 0000 0006 12BC 0000 0000 0006 12BC 0000 0006

p2014[0...1] USS telegram off time / USS telegram T_off

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Index 0 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated ( F0072 ) if no telegram is received via the USS
channel RS485.
Index 1 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated ( F0071 ) if no telegram is received via the USS
channel RS232.
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232
Notice: By default (time set to 0), no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).

1-198 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2015[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS232 / PZD<-USS

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays process data received via USS on RS232.

r2015
[0] r2032
[1]
[2]
[3]
.
.
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1 . r2033
STW2 HSW STW1 [7]
p2012

STX Start of text

LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD PKW
BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX PZD Process data
BCC Block check character
STW Control word
USS telegram HSW Main setpoint

USS on RS232 PZD mapping to parameter r2015

Index: [0] = Received word 0

[1] = Received word 1
[2] = Received word 2
[3] = Received word 3
[4] = Received word 4
[5] = Received word 5
[6] = Received word 6
[7] = Received word 7
Note: The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2032 and r2033.
Restrictions:
• If the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700) then the 1st control word must be transferred in the 1st
PZD-word.
• If the setpoint source is selected via P1000, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the 2nd PZD-word,
• When P2012 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the
4th PZD-word, if the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-199

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2016[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS232 / PZD->USS

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52[0]
Description: Selects signals to be transmitted to serial interface via USS on RS232.

r0052 P2016
r0052 [0]
r0021 [1]
[2]
r0053 [3]
r0053 .
.
. PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
[7] ZSW2 HIW ZSW1
P2012
STX Start of text
LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
PZD PKW
BCC Block check character BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX
ZSW Status word
HIW Main actual value
USS telegram

PZD mapping from parameter P2016 USS on RS232

This parameter allows the user to define the source of the status words and actual values for the reply PZD.
Index 0 cannot be changed and contains always statusword 1.
Example: P2016[0] = 52.0 (default). In this case, the value of r0052 (CO/BO: Status word) is transmitted as 1st PZD to the
USS on RS232.
Index: [0] = Transmitted word 0
[1] = Transmitted word 1
[2] = Transmitted word 2
[3] = Transmitted word 3
[4] = Transmitted word 4
[5] = Transmitted word 5
[6] = Transmitted word 6
[7] = Transmitted word 7
Note: If r0052 not indexed, display does not show an index (".0" ).

1-200 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS485 / PZD<-COM(USS)

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays process data received via USS on RS485.

r2018
[0] r2036
[1]
[2]
[3]
.
.
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1 . r2037
STW2 HSW STW1 [7]
p2012

STX Start of text

LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD PKW
BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX PZD Process data
BCC Block check character
STW Control word
USS telegram HSW Main setpoint

USS on RS485 PZD mapping to parameter r2018

Index: [0] = Received word 0

[1] = Received word 1
[2] = Received word 2
[3] = Received word 3
[4] = Received word 4
[5] = Received word 5
[6] = Received word 6
[7] = Received word 7
Note: Restrictions:
• If the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700) then the 1st control word must be transferred in the 1st
PZD-word.
• If the setpoint source is selected via P1000, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the 2nd PZD-word,
• When P2012 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the
4th PZD-word, if the obove serial interface controls the inverter (P0700).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-201

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS485 (USS) / PZD->COM (USS)

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52[0]
Description: Displays process data received via USS on RS485.

r0052 p2019
r0052 [0]
r0021 [1]
[2]
r0053 [3]
r0053 .
.
. PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
[7] ZSW2 HIW ZSW1
p2012
STX Start of text
LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
PZD PKW
BCC Block check character BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX
ZSW Status word
HIW Main actual value
USS telegram

PZD mapping from parameterp2019 USS on RS485

Index: [0] = Transmitted word 0

[1] = Transmitted word 1
[2] = Transmitted word 2
[3] = Transmitted word 3
[4] = Transmitted word 4
[5] = Transmitted word 5
[6] = Transmitted word 6
[7] = Transmitted word 7
Note: See P2016 (PZD to USS on RS232)

r2024[0...1] USS error-free telegrams / USS error-free tel

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of error-free USS telegrams received.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2025[0...1] USS rejected telegrams / USS rejected tel.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of USS telegrams rejected.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

1-202 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2026[0...1] USS character frame error / USS char.frame err

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of USS character frame errors.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2027[0...1] USS overrun error / USS overrun error

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays number of USS telegrams with overrun error.
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2028[0...1] USS parity error / USS parity error

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays number of USS telegrams with parity error.
Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2029[0...1] USS start not identified / USS start unident.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of USS telegrams with unidentified start.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2030[0...1] USS BCC error / USS BCC error

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of USS telegrams with BCC error.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

r2031[0...1] USS length error / USS length error

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays number of USS telegrams with incorrect length.

Index: [0] = USS on RS485
[1] = USS on RS232

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-203

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2032.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd1 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd1 <- USS

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 1 from USS on RS232 (word 1 within USS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -

r2033.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd2 <- USS

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 2 from USS on RS232 (i.e. word 4 within USS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
09 Enable DC brake Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Dependency: P0700 = 4 (USS on RS232).

r2033.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd2 <- USS

PM250 Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 2 from USS on RS232 (i.e. word 4 within USS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Dependency: P0700 = 4 (USS on RS232).

1-204 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2036.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd1 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd 1 <- COM
CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 1 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 1 within USS = PZD1).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -
Dependency: See parameter P2012
Note: See r2033 (control word 2 from USS on RS232).

r2037.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd2 <- COM
CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -
PM240
Description: Displays control word 2 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 4 within USS = PZD4).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
09 Enable DC brake Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Dependency: See parameter P2012
Note: See r2033 (control word 2 from USS on RS232).
To enable the external fault (r2037 Bit 13) facility via USS, the following parameters must be set:
• P2012 = 4
• P2106 = 1

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-205

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2037.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd2 <- COM
CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Unit: - Data set: -
PM250, PM260
Description: Displays control word 2 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 4 within USS = PZD4).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
Dependency: See parameter P2012
Note: See r2033 (control word 2 from USS on RS232).
To enable the external fault (r2037 Bit 13) facility via USS, the following parameters must be set:
• P2012 = 4
• P2106 = 1

p2038 Selection of actual profile / Actual profile

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Values: 0: PROFIdrive Profile
2: Namur
3: reserved

p2038 Selection of actual profile / Actual profile

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Selects the profile which can be : PROFIdrive Profile or VIK/Namur.
Values: 0: PROFIdrive Profile
2: Namur
3: reserved
Dependency: Setting parameter P2038 to Namur by selecting Telegram 20 in P0922.
Setting parameter P0922 from Telegram 20 to other setting will reset P2038 to PROFIdrive Profile.

1-206 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Note: Changing P2038 also resets all the BICO connections corresponding to settings in P0700 and P0922.
Example:
P0700 = 4, P2038 = 0, P0922 = 999, P0840 = 2032.0
Set P0840 = 722.0
Now change P2038 : the parameter P0840 will be reset to 2032.0 (P0700 = 4)
By changing P0922 or P2038, following parameters can be modified :
• for the control word 1:
P0840, P0844, P0848, P0852, P1140, P1141, P1142, P2104, P1055, P1056, P1113, P1035, P1036, P0810,
P0820
• for the control word 2:
P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P0820, P0821, P2200, P1230, P1501, P2106
See also : Switching to / from Namur in the description of parameter P0922.

p2040 Fieldbus telegram off time / FB tel. off time

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 500 [ms]
Description: Defines time after which a fault will be generated (F0070) if no telegram is received via the link.
Dependency: Setting 0 = watchdog disabled

p2041[0...4] FB parameter / FB parameter

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Configures the communication.
2041.0: ever 0 (readonly)
2041.1: FB parameter volatile write access on S7 service (0 = non voilatile)
2041.2: ever 0 (readonly)
2041.3: selection of diagnose page
2041.4: ever 0 (readonly)
Index: [0] = FB parameter 0
[1] = S7 OP voilatile
[2] = FB parameter 2
[3] = Diagnose page
[4] = FB parameter 4
Note: See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings.

p2042 Selection of ident number / Ident nb

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Selects if native ident number (0) or NAMUR ident number (1) is sent to the PLC.
Values: 0: Native
1: Namur
Note: NAMUR ident number (P2042=1) is not available on ProfiNet.
After changing P2042, a power cycle must be done to have changes take effect.
See also : Switching to / from Namur in the description of parameter P0922.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-207

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2050[0...7] CO: PZD from Fieldbus / PZD from FB

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Displays PZD received from Fieldbus.

PZD Process data r2050

STW Control word [0] r2090
HSW Main setpoint [1]
[2]
[3]

...
[7]
...
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
depends on setting in P0922 STW1

Fieldbus PZD mapping to parameter r2050

Index: [0] = Received word 0
[1] = Received word 1
[2] = Received word 2
[3] = Received word 3
[4] = Received word 4
[5] = Received word 5
[6] = Received word 6
[7] = Received word 7
Note: The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2090 and r2091.

1-208 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2051[0...7] CI: PZD to Fieldbus / PZD to FB

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
CU240S PN Can be changed: T
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52[0]
Description: Connects PZD to Fieldbus.
This parameter allows the user to define the source of status words and actual values for the reply PZD.

r0052 P2051
r0052 [0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
...

[7]
PZD Process data ...
ZSW Status word PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
HIW Main actual value depends on setting in P0922 ZSW1

PZD mapping from parameter P2051 Fieldbus

Index: [0] = Transmitted word 0

[1] = Transmitted word 1
[2] = Transmitted word 2
[3] = Transmitted word 3
[4] = Transmitted word 4
[5] = Transmitted word 5
[6] = Transmitted word 6
[7] = Transmitted word 7
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (p0922) and Control from PROFIBUS, parameter cannot be changed except
Standard Telegram 20, index 5.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-209

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2053[0...7] FB identification / FB identification

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays identification data of the communication.

2053[0]: = 0 = No communication option available
2053[0]: = 1 = PROFIBUS DP
2053[0]: = 2 = DeviceNet
2053[0]: = 3 = CAN
2053[0]: = 4 = AS-i
2053[0]: = 5 = LON
2053[0]: = 6 = Modbus
2053[0]: = 10 = PROFINET IO
2053[0]: = 11 = ES bus (ET200pro)
2053[0]: = 4660 = ES bus (ET200s)
2053[0]: = 65535 = not defined
2053[1]: firmware version (major and minor each with 2 digits)
2053[2]: firmware version detail (release and build each with 2 digits)
2053[3]: firmware date (year with century)
2053[4]: firmware date (day and month each with 2 digits)
2053[5]: datastructure version
2053[6]: driver version
2053[7]: company ID (42 = SIEMENS)
Index: [0] = Fieldbus type (PROFIBUS = 1)
[1] = Firmware version
[2] = Firmware version detail
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = datastructure version
[6] = driver version
[7] = company ID

1-210 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2054[0...15] FB diagnosis / FB diagnosis

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays diagnostic information of communication.

Index: [0] = FB diagnosis 0
[1] = FB diagnosis 1
[2] = FB diagnosis 2
[3] = FB diagnosis 3
[4] = FB diagnosis 4
[5] = FB diagnosis 5
[6] = FB diagnosis 6
[7] = FB diagnosis 7
[8] = FB diagnosis 8
[9] = FB diagnosis 9
[10] = FB diagnosis 10
[11] = FB diagnosis 11
[12] = FB diagnosis 12
[13] = FB diagnosis 13
[14] = FB diagnosis 14
[15] = FB diagnosis 15
Note: Diagnose entries
2054[0]: state of PROFIBUS: 0=off, 1=baud search; 2=baud found; 3=data exchange
2054[1]: C0 master configuration info for cyclic data, combination of 5 digits pxxyy (decimal)
p : 0 no additional cyclic data (no PKW and no PROFIsafe)
1 PKW data configured (4 words input and 4 words output)
2 PROFIsafe data configured (3 words input and 3 words output)
3 PKW and PROFIsafe data configured
4..9 wrong configuration
xx: PZD input length (reference values)
yy: PZD output length (actual values)
The values for PZD input and output length (xx and yy) do not contain any additional data length.
2054[2]: count of C2 connections 0..2
2054[3]: parameter access error: internal error number
2054[4]: parameter access error: parameter number
2054[5]: parameter access error: subindex
2054[6]: remote publisher count and remote publisher ok (example: 11114, 4 publisher, each is ok)
2054[7]: address of remote publisher 1
2054[8]: address of remote publisher 2
2054[9]: address of remote publisher 3
2054[10]: address of remote publisher 4
2054[11]: empty (=0)
2054[12]: empty (=0)
2054[13]: empty (=0)
2054[14]: empty (=0)
2054[15]: empty (=0)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-211

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2058[0...15] FB rev config / FB rev config

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays reverse config data display communication.

Index: [0] = FB diagnosis 0
[1] = FB diagnosis 1
[2] = FB diagnosis 2
[3] = FB diagnosis 3
[4] = FB diagnosis 4
[5] = FB diagnosis 5
[6] = FB diagnosis 6
[7] = FB diagnosis 7
[8] = FB diagnosis 8
[9] = FB diagnosis 9
[10] = FB diagnosis 10
[11] = FB diagnosis 11
[12] = FB diagnosis 12
[13] = FB diagnosis 13
[14] = FB diagnosis 14
[15] = FB diagnosis 15

r2059[0...4] CO: Displays SOL link stats for Sol Master. / Disp SOL stats
CU240S DP Access level: 4 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Index: [0] = messages txd
[1] = valid messages rxd
[2] = crc errors
[3] = stx errors
[4] = reconfigurations

r2090.0...15 BO: Control word 1 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd1 <- FB

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Displays control word 1 received from Fieldbus.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -
Note: If P0700 = 6 (PROFIBUS) then P810 must be set to 2090.15 for correct operation.
This will not be cleared automatically when P0700 is no longer equal to 6.

1-212 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2091.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
PM240
Description: Displays control word 2 received from Fieldbus.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
09 Enable DC brake Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -

r2091.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP-F Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
PM250, PM260
Description: Displays control word 2 received from Fieldbus.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -

p2100[0...2] Alarm number selection / Alarm No selection

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Selects up to 3 faults or warnings for non-default reactions.
Example: If, for example, an OFF3 is to be carried out instead of an OFF2 for a fault, the fault number has to be entered in
P2100 and the desired reaction selected in P2101 (in this case (OFF3) P2101 = 3).
Index: [0] = Fault Number 1
[1] = Fault Number 2
[2] = Fault Number 3
Note: All fault codes have a default reaction to OFF2.
Some fault codes caused by hardware trips (e.g. overcurrent) cannot be changed from the default reactions.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-213

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2101[0...2] Stop reaction value / Stop reaction val.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Sets drive stop reaction values for fault selected by P2100 (alarm number stop reaction).
This indexed parameter specifies the special reaction to the faults/warnings defined in P2100 indices 0 to 2.
Values: 0: No reaction, no display
1: OFF1 stop reaction
2: OFF2 stop reaction
3: OFF3 stop reaction
4: No reaction warning only
Index: [0] = Stop reaction value 1
[1] = Stop reaction value 2
[2] = Stop reaction value 3
Note: Settings 1 - 3 are only available for fault codes.
Setting 4 is only available for warnings.
Index 0 (P2101) refers to fault/warning in index 0 (P2100).

p2103[0...2] BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement / 1. Faults ackn

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.2
Description: Defines first source of fault acknowledgement.

p2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn

CU240S DP Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 2090.7
Description: Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

1-214 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 8890.7
Description: Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = Standard Telegram), parameter cannot be changed.

p2106[0...2] BI: External fault / External fault

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1
Description: Selects source of external faults.
Dependency: When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.

r2110[0...3] CO: Warning number / Warning number

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays warning information.

A maximum of 2 active warnings (indices 0 and 1) and 2 historical warnings (indices 2 and 3) may be viewed.
Index: [0] = Recent Warnings --, warning 1
[1] = Recent Warnings --, warning 2
[2] = Recent Warnings -1, warning 3
[3] = Recent Warnings -1, warning 4
Notice: Indices 0 and 1 are not stored.
Note: The LED indicates the warning status in this case.
The keypad will flash while a warning is active.

p2111 Total number of warnings / Total no. warnings

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Displays number of warning (up to 4) since last reset.
Set to 0 to reset the warning history.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-215

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2114[0...1] Run time counter / Run time counter

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays run time counter.

It is the total time the drive has been powered up. When power is switched off, the value is saved, then restored on
powerup.
The run time counter will be calculate as followed:
Multiply the value in r2114[0], by 65536 and then add it to the value in r2114[1]. The resultant answer will be in sec-
onds.
This means that r2114[0] is not days.
Total powerup time = 65536 * r2114[0] + r2114[1] seconds.
Example: If r2114[0] = 1 and r2114[1] = 20864
We get 1 * 65536 + 20864 = 86400 seconds which equals 1 day.
Index: [0] = System Time, Seconds, Upper Word
[1] = System Time, Seconds, Lower Word
Note: When the real time is not given in P2115, the time in this parameter is used by r0948 to indicate when a fault has
occured.
See r0948 (fault time).

p2115[0...2] Real time clock / Real time clk

Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 257
Description: Displays real time.
All inverters require an on-board clock function with which fault conditions may be timestamped and logged.
However, they have no battery backed Real Time Clock (RTC). Inverters may support a software driven RTC which
requires synchronisation with the RTC supplied via a serial interface.
The time is stored in a word array parameter P2115. The time will be set by USS Protocol standard "word array
parameter write" telegrams. Once the last word is received in index 2, the software will start running the timer itself
using internal running 1 millisecond tic. Hence becoming like RTC.
If powercycle takes place, then the real time must be sent again to the inverter.
Time is maintained in a word array parameter and encoded as follows - the same format will be used in fault report
logs.

Index High Byte (MSB) Low Byte (LSB)

0 Seconds (0 - 59) Minutes (0 - 59)
1 Hours (0 - 23) Days (1 - 31)
2 Month (1 - 12) Years (00 - 250)

The values are in binary form.

Index: [0] = Real Time, Seconds+Minutes
[1] = Real Time, Hours+Days
[2] = Real Time, Month+Year
Note: See r0948 (fault time).

1-216 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2120 Indication counter / Indication counter

Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Indicates total number of alarm events.
This parameter is incremented whenever an alarm event occurs. It also gets incremented when a warning is
cleared or faults are cleared.
This parameter is used by the PC tools.

r2131 CO: Last fault number code / Last fault code

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

r2132 CO: First warning number code / First warning code

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

p2150[0...2] Hysteresis frequency f_hys / Hyst. freq. f_hys

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] 3.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines hysteresis level applied for comparing frequency and speed to threshold as illustrated in function diagram
4100.

p2151[0...2] CI: Speed setpoint for messages / n-Set for msg

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 1170[0]
Description: Selects the source of setpoint frequency, actual frequency is compared with this frequency to detect frequency
deviation (see monitoring bit r2197.7).

p2152[0...2] Delay time of f>fmax / Delay f>fmax

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Selects the delay time if actual frequency above maximum frequency.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-217

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2153[0...2] Time-constant speed filter / Tconst. speed filt

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 5 [ms]
Description: Specifies time constant of first-order speed filter.
The filtered speed is then compared to the thresholds. See function diagrams 4100 and 4120.

p2155[0...2] Threshold frequency f_1 / Threshold freq f_1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 30.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets a threshold for comparing actual speed or frequency to threshold values f_1 (see function diagram 4100).
This threshold controls status bits 4 and 5 in status word 2 (r0053).

p2156[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_1 / Delay time of f_1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets delay time prior to threshold frequency f_1 comparison (P2155).

p2157[0...2] Threshold frequency f_2 / Threshold freq f_2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 30.00 [Hz]
Description: Threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds as illustrated in function diagram 4120.

p2158[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_2 / Delay time of f_2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_2 (P2157) this is the time delay before status bits are cleared.

p2159[0...2] Threshold frequency f_3 / Threshold freq f_3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 30.00 [Hz]
Description: Threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds as illustrated in function diagram 4120.

1-218 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2160[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_3 / Delay time of f_3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_3 (P2159) this is the time delay before status bits are set.

p2161[0...2] Min. threshold for freq. setp. / Setp.min.threshold

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] 3.00 [Hz]
Description: Minimum threshold value for comparing speed or frequency setpoint (function diagram 4130).

p2162[0...2] Hysteresis freq. for overspeed / Overspd. hyst.freq

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 25.00 [Hz] 3.00 [Hz]
Description: Hysteresis speed (frequency) for overspeed detection.
For vector control modes, the hysteresis acts above the max. frequency (function diagram 4110).
For V/f control modes the hysteresis acts below the max. frequency.

p2163[0...2] Entry freq. for perm. deviation / Entry freq. deviat

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 20.00 [Hz] 3.00 [Hz]
Description: Threshold for detecting speed deviation from setpoint (see function diagram 4110).

p2164[0...2] Hysteresis frequency deviation / Hyster freq deviat

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] 3.00 [Hz]
Description: Hysteresis frequency for detecting permitted deviation (from setpoint) or frequency or speed.
This frequency controls bit 8 in status word 1 (r0052).

p2165[0...2] Delay time permitted deviation / Delay_T perm. dev.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Delay time for detecting permitted deviation of speed or frequency from setpoint.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-219

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2166[0...2] Delay time ramp up completed / Delay_T rampUpCmpl

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for signal that indicates completion of ramp-up (see function diagram 4130).

p2167[0...2] Switch-off frequency f_off / SwOff freq. f_off

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] 1.00 [Hz]
Description: Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| > P2167 (f_off) (see function diagram 4110).
P2167 influences following functions:
• If the actual frequency falls below this threshold and the time delay has expired, bit 1 in status word 2 (r0053) is
reset.
• If a OFF1 or OFF3 was applied and bit 1 is reset the inverter will disable the pulse (OFF2).

p2168[0...2] Delay time T_off / Delay time T_off

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Defines time for which the inverter may operate below switch-off frequency (P2167) before switch off occurs.
Dependency: Active if holding brake (P1215) not parameterized.

r2169 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt. freq

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [Hz] Data set: -

Description: Filtered speed (or frequency) for monitoring behind first-order lowpass filter.

p2170[0...2] Threshold current I_thresh / Threshold current

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Defines threshold current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to be used in comparisons of I_act and
I_Thresh as illustrated in function diagrams 4110 and 4130 .
This threshold controls bit 3 in status word 2 (r0053).

1-220 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2171[0...2] Delay time current / Delay time current

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Defines delay time prior to activation of current comparison.

p2172[0...2] Threshold DC-link voltage / Vdc threshold

PM240 Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [V] 2000 [V] 800 [V]
Description: Defines DC link voltage to be compared to actual voltage as illustrated in function diagram 4115. This voltage con-
trols bits 7 and 8 in status word 2 (r0053).

p2173[0...2] Delay time DC-link voltage / Vdc delay time

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Defines delay time prior to activation of threshold comparison.

p2174[0...2] Torque threshold M_thresh / Torque threshold

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]
Description: Defines torque threshold for comparing actual torque (see function diagram 4130).

p2176[0...2] Delay time for torque threshold / Delay time torque

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for comparing actual torque to threshold.

p2177[0...2] Delay time for motor is blocked / Delay_T MotBlocked

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for identification that motor is blocked.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-221

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2178[0...2] Delay time for motor pulled out / Delay_T MotPullOut

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for identification that motor is pulled out.
Note: If the Encoder is enabled (P0400 > 0) and the Motor Holding Brake is enabled (P1215 > 0), then in order to stop
encoder loss trips when the brake is applied, the delay time for motor pulled out should be > brake holding times
(i.e. P2178 > P1216 and P2178 > P1217).

p2179 Current limit for no load ident. / Cur.lim:no-load ID

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [%] 10.0 [%] 3.0 [%]
Description: Threshold current for A0922 (load missing) in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) as illustrated in function
diagram 4110.
Notice: If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P2179) is not exceeded, warning A0922 (no load
applied) is issued when delay time (P2180) expires.
Note: It may be that the motor is not connected (load missing) or a phase could be missing.

p2180 Delay time for load missing / Load missing delay

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 2000 [ms]
Description: Delay time load missing

p2181[0...2] Belt failure detection mode / Belt fail detect

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 6 0
Description: Sets belt failure detection mode.
This function allows detection of mechanical failure of the drive train, e.g. a broken drive belt.
It can also detect conditions which cause an overload, such as a jam. Parameters P2182-2190 are set to default
when this parameter is changed from 0.
This is achieved by comparing the actual frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (see P2182 -
P2190).
If the curve falls outside the envelope, a warning or trip is generated.
Values: 0: Belt failure detection disabled
1: Warning: Low torque / speed
2: Warning: High torque / speed
3: Warning: High / low torque / speed
4: Trip: Low torque / speed
5: Trip: High torque / speed
6: Trip: High / low torque / speed

1-222 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2182[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 1 / Belt threshold f_1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 5.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the lower frequency threshold f_1 for defining the area where the belt failure detection is effective.
The frequency torque envelope is defined by 9 parameters - 3 are frequency parameters (P2182 - P2184), and the
other 6 define the low and high torque limits (P2185 - P2190) for each frequency (see function diagram 4140).
Note: Below the the threshold in p2182 and above the threshold in p2184, belt failure detection mode is not active.
In this case the values for normal operation with the torque limits given in p1521 and p1520 are valid.

p2183[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 2 / Belt threshold f_2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 30.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the frequency threshold f_2 for defining the envelope in which the torque values are valid.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2184[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 3 / Belt threshold f_3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the upper frequency threshold f_3 for defining the area where the belt failure detection is effective.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 / Upper trq. thresh1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm]
Description: Upper limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2186[0...2] Lower torque threshold 1 / Lower trq. thresh1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 0.0 [Nm]
Description: Lower limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-223

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2187[0...2] Upper torque threshold 2 / Upper trq. thresh2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm]
Description: Upper limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2188[0...2] Lower torque threshold 2 / Lower trq. thresh2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 0.0 [Nm]
Description: Lower limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2189[0...2] Upper torque threshold 3 / Upper trq. thresh3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm]
Description: Upper limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2190[0...2] Lower torque threshold 3 / Lower trq. thresh3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [Nm] 99999.0 [Nm] 0.0 [Nm]
Description: Lower limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque.
Note: See P2182 (belt threshold frequency 1).

p2192[0...2] Time delay for belt failure / Belt fail delay_T

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [s] 65 [s] 10 [s]
Description: P2192 defines a delay before warning/trip becomes active.
It is used to eliminate events caused by transient conditions.
It is used for both methods of fault detection.

1-224 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2197.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word 1 / Monitor Wd1

PM240 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Monitoring word 1 which indicates the state of monitor functions.

Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) Yes No -
01 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
02 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
03 f_act > zero Yes No -
04 f_act >= setp. (f_set) Yes No -
05 |f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) Yes No -
06 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No -
07 f_act == setp. (f_set) Yes No -
08 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Yes No -
09 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172 Yes No -
10 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172 Yes No -
11 Load missing Yes No -
12 |f_act| > P1082 with delay Yes No -

r2197.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word 1 / Monitor Wd1

PM250 Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
PM260 Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Monitoring word 1 which indicates the state of monitor functions.

Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) Yes No -
01 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
02 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No -
03 f_act > zero Yes No -
04 f_act >= setp. (f_set) Yes No -
05 |f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) Yes No -
06 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No -
07 f_act == setp. (f_set) Yes No -
08 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Yes No -
11 Load missing Yes No -
12 |f_act| > P1082 with delay Yes No -

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-225

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2198.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word 2 / Monitor Wd2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Monitoring word 2 which indicates the state of monitor functions.

Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 |f_act| <= P2157 (f_2) Yes No -
01 |f_act| > P2157 (f_2) Yes No -
02 |f_act| <= P2159 (f_3) Yes No -
03 |f_act| > P2159 (f_3) Yes No -
04 |f_set| < P2161 (f_min_set) Yes No -
05 f_set > 0 Yes No -
06 Motor blocked Yes No -
07 Motor pulled out Yes No -
08 I_act |r0068| < P2170 Yes No -
09 |m_act| > P2174 & setpoint reached Yes No -
10 |m_act| > P2174 Yes No -
11 Belt failure warning Yes No -
12 Belt failure trip Yes No -

p2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller / Enab. PID ctrl

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller.
Setting to 1 enables the PID closed-loop controller.
Dependency: Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints.
Following an OFF1 or OFF3 command, however, the inverter frequency will ramp down to zero using the ramp time
set in P1121 (P1135 for OFF3).
When Standard Telegram 350 and PROFIBUS selected (P0700 = 6, P0922 = 350), parameter cannot be changed.
Notice: The minimum and maximum motor frequencies (P1080 and P1082) as well as the skip frequencies (P1091 to
P1094) remain active on the inverter output.
However, enabling skip frequencies with PID control can produce instabilities.
Note: The PID setpoint source is selected using P2253.
The PID setpoint and the PID feedback signal are interpreted as [%] values (not [Hz]).
The output of the PID controller is displayed as [%] and then normalized into [Hz] through P2000 (reference fre-
quency) when PID is enabled.
The reverse command is not active whilst PID is active.
Attention: p2200 and p2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same dataset cannot be
active at same time.

1-226 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2201[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 1 / Fixed PID setp. 1

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 1.
There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
1. Direct selection (P2216 = 1):
- In this mode of operation 1 Fixed Frequency selector (P2220...P2223) selects 1 fixed frequency.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed.
E.g.: PID-FF1 + PID-FF2 + PID-FF3 + PID-FF4.
2. Binary coded selection (P2216 = 2):
- Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
- The fixed frequencies are selected according to FP3310.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 required in user access level 2 to enable setpoint source.
Note: You may mix different types of frequencies; however, remember that they will be summed if selected together.
P2201 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2202[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 2 / Fixed PID setp. 2

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 2
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2203[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 3 / Fixed PID setp. 3

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 3
Note: See P2201 fixed PID setpoint 1 (FF-PID 1).

p2204[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 4 / Fixed PID setp. 4

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 4
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-227

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2205[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 5 / Fixed PID setp. 5

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 5
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2206[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 6 / Fixed PID setp. 6

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 6
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2207[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 7 / Fixed PID setp. 7

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 7
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2208[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 8 / Fixed PID setp. 8

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 8
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2209[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 9 / Fixed PID setp. 9

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 9
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

1-228 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2210[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 10 / Fixed PID setp. 10

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 10
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2211[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 11 / Fixed PID setp. 11

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 11
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2212[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 12 / Fixed PID setp. 12

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 12
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2213[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 13 / Fixed PID setp. 13

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 13
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2214[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 14 / Fixed PID setp. 14

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 14
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-229

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2215[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 15 / Fixed PID setp. 15

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
Description: Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 15
Note: See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).

p2216[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint mode / Fix.PID Mode

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

1 2 1
Description: Fixed frequencies for PID setpoint can be selected in two different modes. Parameter P2216 defines the mode.
Values: 1: Direct selection
2: Binary selection

p2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 / PID setp->Bit 0

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.3
Description: Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 0.

p2221[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1 / PID setp->Bit 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.4
Description: Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 1.

p2222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 / PID setp->Bit 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.5
Description: Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 2.

p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->Bit 3

CU240E Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN-F Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 3.

1-230 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->Bit 3

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
CU240S PN Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 722.6
Description: Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 3.

r2224 CO: Act. fixed PID setpoint / Fixed.PID setp

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays total output of PID fixed setpoint selection.

Note: r2224 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

r2225.0 BO: PID Fixed frequency status / PID FF Status

Access level: 3 P-Group: Commands Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays the status of PID fixed frequencies.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Status of FF Yes No -

p2231[0...2] PID-MOP mode / PID-MOP mode.

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: PID-MOP mode specification
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Setpoint store activ Yes No -
01 No On-state for MOP necessary Yes No -
Note: Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer.
See P2240 (setpoint of PID-MOP).

p2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP / Inhib. PID-MOD rev

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 1
Description: Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the PID-MOP.
Values: 0: Reverse direction is allowed
1: Reverse direction inhibited
Note: Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease fre-
quency).
The "reversing key" of the OP (e.g. BOP) is not affected by the settings of P2232. Use P1110 to fully prevent
change of motor direction.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-231

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) / PID-MOP (UP)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 19.13
Description: Defines source of UP command.
Dependency: To change setpoint:
- Configure a digital input as source
- Use UP / DOWN key on OP (e.g. BOP).
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.2 %
(P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P2247.

p2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) / PID-MOP (DWN)

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 19.14
Description: Defines source of DOWN command.
Dependency: To change setpoint:
- Configure a digital input as source
- Use UP / DOWN key on OP (e.g. BOP).
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.2 %
(P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P2248.

p2240[0...2] Setpoint of PID-MOP / Setp. of PID-MOP

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Setpoint of the motor potentiometer.
Allows user to set a digital PID setpoint in [%].
Note: P2240 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. The parameter P2231 influences the
start value behaviour as follows:
• P2231=0:
P2240 gets immediately active in the OFF-state and when changed in the ON-state, it gets active after the next
OFF and ON cycle.
• P2231=1:
The last MOP output before stop is stored as starting value, since storing is selected, so a change of P2240
while in ON-state has no effect. In OFF-state P2240 can be changed.
• P2231=2:
The MOP is active every time, so the change of P2240 affects after the next power cycle or a change of P2231
to 0.
• P2231=3:
The last MOP output before power down is stored as starting value, since the MOP is active independent from
the ON-command, a change of P2240 has only effect in the case of a change of P2231.

1-232 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2241[0...2] BI: PID-MOP select setpoint auto/manu / Setp. auto/manu

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode.
If using the motorized potentiometer in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down,
e.g. P2235 and P2236.
If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P2242).
0 : manually
1 : automatically
Notice: Refer to: P2235, P1036, P2242

p2242[0...2] CI: PID-MOP auto setpoint / PMOP auto setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P2241 is selected.
Notice: Refer to: P2241

p2243[0...2] BI: PID-MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP acc RFG setpo
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. The
value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Notice: Refer to: P2244

p2244[0...2] CI: PID-MOP rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP RFG setpoint

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer32
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting
command.
Notice: Refer to: P2243

r2245 CO: PID-MOP input frequency of the RFG / PMOP RFG input
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the PID-MOP RFG.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-233

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2247[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-up time of the RFG / PMOP ramp-up time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
Notice: Refer to: P2248, P1082

p2248[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-down time of the RFG / PMOP rampdown time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator.
The setpoint is changed from limit defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
Notice: Refer to: P2247, P1082

r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP / PMOP outp. setp

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays output setpoint of motor potentiometer in [%].

p2251 PID mode / PID mode

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Enables function of PID controller.
Values: 0: PID as setpoint
1: PID as trim
Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).

p2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint / PID setpoint

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input.
This parameter allows the user to select the source of the PID setpoint. Normally, a digital setpoint is selected either
using a fixed PID setpoint or an active setpoint.

1-234 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source / PID trim source

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects trim source for PID setpoint.
This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint.

p2255 PID setpoint gain factor / PID setp.gain fact

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 100.00 100.00
Description: Gain factor for PID setpoint.
The PID setpoint input is multiplied by this gain factor to produce a suitable ratio between setpoint and trim.

p2256 PID trim gain factor / PID trim gain fact

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 100.00 100.00
Description: Gain factor for PID trim.
This gain factor scales the trim signal, which is added to the main PID setpoint.

p2257 Ramp-up time for PID setpoint / PID setp. ramp-up

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disable normal ramp-up time (P1120). PID ramp time effective only on PID set-
point and only active when PID setpoint is changed or when RUN command is given (when PID setpoint uses this
ramp to reach its value from 0 %).
Notice: Setting the ramp-up time too short may cause the inverter to trip, on overcurrent for example.

p2258 Ramp-down time for PID setpoint / PID setp. ramp-dwn

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-down time (P1121). PID setpoint ramp effective only on
PID setpoint changes. P1121 (ramp-down time) and P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time) define the ramp times used
after OFF1 and OFF3 respectively.
Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip on overvoltage F0002 / overcurrent F0001.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-235

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG / PID setp <-RFG

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays total active PID setpoint after PID-RFG in [%].

Note: r2260 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant / PID setp.filt.Tcon

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Sets a time constant for smoothing the PID setpoint.
Note: p2261 = 0 = no smoothing.

r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG / Filt. PID setp
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays filtered PID setpoint after PID-RFG in [%].

r2262 is the result of the value in r2260, filtered with PT1-Filter and the time constant given in p2261.
Note: r2262 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2263 PID controller type / PID ctrl. type

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Sets the PID controller type.
Values: 0: D component on feedback signal
1: D component on error signal

p2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback / PID feedback

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Selects the source of the PID feedback signal.
Note: When analog input is selected, offset and gain can be implemented using parameters P0756 to P0760 (AI scaling).

p2265 PID feedback filter timeconstant / Fdbck.filt. Tconst

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Defines time constant for PID feedback filter.

1-236 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback / PID filt.fdbck

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays PID feedback signal in [%].

Note: r2266 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2267 Max. value for PID feedback / PID fdbck max. val
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%].
Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal rises above this value, the inverter will trip with F0222 .
Note: p2267 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2268 Min. value for PID feedback / PID fdbck min. val
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%].
Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal drops below this value, the inverter will trip with F0221.
Note: P2268 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2269 Gain applied to PID feedback / PID feedback gain

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 500.00 100.00
Description: Allows the user to scale the PID feedback as a percentage value [%].
A gain of 100.0 % means that feedback signal has not changed from its default value.

p2270 PID feedback function selector / PID fdbck fnct sel

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Applies mathematical functions to the PID feedback signal, allowing multiplication of the result by P2269 (gain
applied to PID feedback).
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Square root (root(x))
2: Square (x*x)
3: Cube (x*x*x)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-237

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2271 PID transducer type / PID trans. type

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Allows the user to select the transducer type for the PID feedback signal.
Values: 0: Disabled
1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
Notice: It is essential that you select the correct transducer type.
If you are unsure whether 0 or 1 is applicable, you can determine the correct type as follows:
1. Disable the PID function (P2200 = 0).
2. Increase the motor frequency while measuring the feedback signal.
3. If the feedback signal increases with an increase in motor frequency, the PID transducer type should be 0.
4. If the feedback signal decreases with an increase in motor frequency the PID transducer type should be set to 1.

r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback / PID scal fdbck

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays PID scaled feedback signal in [%].

Note: r2272 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

r2273 CO: PID error / PID error

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays PID error (difference) signal between setpoint and feedback signals in [%].
Note: r2273 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2274 PID derivative time / PID deriv. time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets PID derivative time.
P2274 = 0: The derivative term does not have any effect (it applies a gain of 1).

p2280 PID proportional gain / PID prop. gain

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 65.000 3.000
Description: Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller.
The PID controller is implemented using the standard model.
For best results, enable both P and I terms.
Dependency: P2280 = 0 (P term of PID = 0): The I term acts on the square of the error signal.
P2285 = 0 (I term of PID = 0): PID controller acts as a P or PD controller respectively.
Note: If the system is prone to sudden step changes in the feedback signal, P term should normally be set to a small
value (0.5) with a faster I term for optimum performance.

1-238 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2285 PID integral time / PID integral time

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets integral time constant for PID controller.
Note: See P2280 (PID proportional gain).

p2291 PID output upper limit / PID outp.upper lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%].
Dependency: If f_max (P1082) is greater than P2000 (reference frequency), either P2000 or P2291 (PID output upper limit) must
be changed to achieve f_max.
Note: P2291 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex (as defined by P2000 (reference frequency)).

p2292 PID output lower limit / PID outp.lower lim

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%].
Dependency: A negative value allows bipolar operation of PID controller.
Note: P2292 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

p2293 Ramp-up /-down time of PID limit / PID lim. ramp time
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets maximum ramp rate on output of PID.
When PI is enabled, the output limits are ramped up from 0 to the limits set in P2291 (PID output upper limit) and
P2292 (PID output lower limit). Limits prevent large step changes appearing on the output of the PID when the
inverter is started. Once the limits have been reached, the PID controller output is instantaneous.
These ramp times are used whenever a RUN command is issued.
Note: If an OFF1 or OFF 3 are issued, the inverter output frequency ramps down as set in P1121 (ramp-down time) or
P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time).

r2294 CO: Act. PID output / Act.PID output

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays PID output in [%].

Note: r2294 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-239

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2295 Gain applied to PID output / PID output scale

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-100.00 100.00 100.00
Description: Allows the user to scale the PID output as a percentage value [%].
A gain of 100.0 % means that output signal has not changed from its default value.

p2350 PID autotune enable / PID autotune

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 4 0
Description: Enables autotune function of PID controller.
Values: 0: PID autotuning disabled
1: PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
2: PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).
Note: • P2350 = 1
This is the standard Ziegler Nichols (ZN) tuning which should be a quarter damped response to a step.
• P2350 = 2
This tuning will give some overshoot (O/S) but should be faster than option 1.
• P2350 = 3
This tuning should give little or no overshoot but will not be as fast as option 2.
• P2350 = 4
This tuning only changes values of P and I and should be a quarter damped response.
The option to be selected depends on the application but broadly speaking option 1 will give a good respsonse,
whereas if a faster response is desired option 2 should be selected.
If no overshoot is desired then option 3 is the choice. For cases where no D term is wanted then option 4 can be
selected.
The tuning procedure is the same for all options. It is just the calculation of P and D values that is different.
After autotune this parameter is set to zero (autotune completed).

p2354 PID tuning timeout length / PID tuning t/o.

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

60 [s] 65000 [s] 240 [s]
Description: This parameter determines the time that the autotuning code will wait before aborting a tuning run if no oscillation
has been obtained.

1-240 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2355 PID tuning offset / PID tuning offset

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 5.00 [%]
Description: Sets applied offset and deviation for PID autotuning.
Note: This can be varied depending on plant conditions e.g. a very long system time constant might require a larger
value.

p2470[0...2] Encoder speed scaling factor / Encod speed scal

CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: DDS
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0.00 9999.99 1.00
Description: Scaling factor to be applied to the measured encoder speed.

r2477 CO: Act. scaled encoder speed / Act scal enc speed
CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Encoder Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Unit: - Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Scaled readout of the encoder speed.

r2478 CO: Act. scaled encoder frequency / Act scal enc freq
CU240S Access level: 2 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
CU240S DP Unit: [Hz] Data set: -
CU240S DP-F
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F
Description: Scaled readout of the encoder frequency (Hz).

p2480[0...2] BI: Enable positioning ramp down / Enable positioning

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines the source signal for enabling/disabling positioning.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-241

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2481[0...2] Gearbox ratio input / Gearbox ratio in

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 9999.99 1.00
Description: P2481 and P2482 define the gear box ratio for the positioning ramp down functionality. P2481 sets the motor shaft
side (gear box input).

Motor Gear Load

i
n Motor n Load

Motor revolutions P2481

i= =
Load revolutions P2482

p2482[0...2] Gearbox ratio output / Gearbox ratio out

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 9999.99 1.00
Description: P2481 and P2482 define the gear box ratio for the positioning ramp down functionality. P2482 sets the load side
(gear box output).

p2484[0...2] No. of shaft turns = 1 Unit / Position ref. unit

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 9999.99 1.00
Description: Sets the number of rotations of the motor shaft required to represent 1 unit of user selected units.

Distance s
Pulley radius r
Load

U
r
M oto
U No. of revolutions
P2484 = =
s 1 [unit]

The following equation determines the number of motor shaft revolutions to stop:

P2481
Revolutions Motor
= P2488 ⋅ P2484 ⋅
P2482

1-242 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2487[0...2] Positional error trim value / Positional trim / Positional error

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-99.00 200.00 0.00
Description: This parameter can be used to optimise the positioning ramp down.

When Encoder is DISABLED:

Offset errors due to mechanical errors or other reasons can so be corrected. The value is in measures of P2488.
Negative value entered when final position is before required end point.
Positive value entered when final postioin is after the required end point.

When Encoder is ENABLED:

The profile of the deceleration curve can be altered.
Negative value entered will result in a sharper deleration (Concave).
Positive value entered will result in a shallower deceleration (Convex).

p2488[0...2] Distance / No. of revolutions / Distance / No. rev

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: DDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.01 99999999.99 1.00
Description: Sets the required distance or number of revolutions (see P2484).

Motor Gear

f 1 .. t
s = P2488 = ⋅f
2 OFF1 P2488
OFF1
fOFF1

t
tP2488

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-243

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2489[0...2] CO: Tracking parameter / Track / Tracking parameter

Access level: 3 P-Group: Closed-loop control Data type: Floating Point
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: This parameter displays tracking values of the positioning ramp down functionality.
Index: [0] = Remaining number of shaft rotations since trigger.
[1] = Accumulated shaft rotations during the positioning ramp down.
[2] = Accumulated encoder increments during the positioning ramp down
Note: Index [0]:
The displayed value is in measures of P2488. Due to the open loop control mode of the positioning ramp down, the
value may show a residual difference between calculated and actually performed motor rotations. P2487 can be
used for trimming.
Index [1]:
The displayed value is in measures of P2488. The value is available only with P400 > 0.
Index [2]
The value is available only if an encoder is connected. The raw encoder counter value is shown in r0485.

p2800 Enable FFBs / Enable FFBs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps.
1. Parameter P2800 enables all free function blocks (P2800 = 1).
2. Parameters P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually. Additionally fast free
function blocks can be enabled via P2803 = 1.
Values: 0: Disable
1: Enable
Dependency: All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, fast free function blocks in every 8 ms.

p2801[0...16] Activate FFBs / Activate FFBs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 6 0
Description: Parameters P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P2801[x] > 0 or P2802[x] >
0). In addition, parameters P2801 and P2802 determine the chronological order of each function block by setting
the level in which the free function block will work.
The following table shows that the priority decreases from right to left and from top to bottom.

1-244 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

Priority 2
low high
Level 6

Priority 1
Fast FFBs
Level 5
p2803 = 1
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2

low
Level 1
Inactive 0

RS-FF 3
RS-FF 2
RS-FF 1
Timer 4
Timer 3
Timer 2
Timer 1

D-FF 2
D-FF 1
CMP 2
CMP 1

XOR 3
XOR 2
XOR 1
NOT 1
ADD 2
ADD 1

AND 3
AND 2
AND 1
NOT 3
NOT 2
MUL 2
MUL 1
SUB 2
SUB 1
DIV 2
DIV 1

OR 3
OR 2
OR 1
p2801 [16]
p2801 [15]
p2801 [14]
p2801 [13]
p2801 [12]
p2801 [11]
p2801 [10]
p2802 [13]
p2802 [12]
p2802 [11]
p2802 [10]

p2802 [3]
p2802 [2]
p2802 [1]
p2802 [0]

p2801 [9]
p2802 [9]
p2802 [8]
p2802 [7]
p2802 [6]

p2801 [5]
p2801 [4]
p2801 [3]
p2802 [5]
p2802 [4]

p2801 [8]
p2801 [7]
p2801 [6]

p2801 [2]
p2801 [1]
p2801 [0]
Values: 0: Not Active
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
4: Level 4
5: Level 5
6: Level 6
Example: P2801[3] = 2, P2801[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2
FFBs will be calculated in following order:
P2802[3], P2801[3] , P2801[4], P2802[4]
Index: [0] = Enable AND 1
[1] = Enable AND 2
[2] = Enable AND 3
[3] = Enable OR 1
[4] = Enable OR 2
[5] = Enable OR 3
[6] = Enable XOR 1
[7] = Enable XOR 2
[8] = Enable XOR 3
[9] = Enable NOT 1
[10] = Enable NOT 2
[11] = Enable NOT 3
[12] = Enable D-FF 1
[13] = Enable D-FF 2
[14] = Enable RS-FF 1
[15] = Enable RS-FF 2
[16] = Enable RS-FF 3
Dependency: Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, if set to level 1 ... 3. Fast free function blocks (level 4 ...
6) will be calculated in every 8 ms.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-245

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2802[0...13] Activate FFBs / Activate FFBs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 3 0
Description: Enables free function blocks (FFB) and determines the chronological order of each function block.
See parameter P2801. The table under P2801 shows that the priority decreases from right to left and from top to
bottom.
Values: 0: Not Active
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
Index: [0] = Enable timer 1
[1] = Enable timer 2
[2] = Enable timer 3
[3] = Enable timer 4
[4] = Enable ADD 1
[5] = Enable ADD 2
[6] = Enable SUB 1
[7] = Enable SUB 2
[8] = Enable MUL 1
[9] = Enable MUL 2
[10] = Enable DIV 1
[11] = Enable DIV 2
[12] = Enable CMP 1
[13] = Enable CMP 2
Dependency: Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks, enabled with P2802, will be calculated in every 128 ms.

p2803[0...2] Enable FastFFBs / Enable FastFFBs

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: CDS
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Fast free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps.
1. Parameter P2803 enables the use of fast free function blocks (P2803 = 1).
2. Parameter P2801 enables each fast free function block individually and determines the chronological order
(P2801[x] = 4 ... 6).
Values: 0: Disable
1: Enable
Dependency: All active fast function blocks will be calculated in every 8 ms.
Note: Attention: P2200 and P2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same dataset cannot be
active at same time.

1-246 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2810[0...1] BI: AND 1 / AND 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2810[0], P2810[1] define inputs of AND 1 element, output is P2811.

p2800 p2801[0]

A B C
p2810
A 0 0 0
Index0
Index1
B & C r2811 0
1
1
0
0
0
1 1 1
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[0] is active level for the AND element.

r2811.0 BO: AND 1 / AND 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of AND 1 element.

Displays and logic of bits defined in P2810[0], P2810[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[0] is active level for the AND element.

p2812[0...1] BI: AND 2 / AND 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2812[0], 2812[1] define inputs of AND 2 element, output is P2813.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[1] is active level for the AND element.

r2813.0 BO: AND 2 / AND 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of AND 2 element.

Displays and logic of bits defined in P2812[0], P2812[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[1] is active level for the AND element.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-247

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2814[0...1] BI: AND 3 / AND 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2814[0], P2814[1] define inputs of AND 3 element, output is P2815.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[2] is active level for the AND element.

r2815.0 BO: AND 3 / AND 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Output of AND 3 element.
Displays and logic of bits defined in P2814[0], P2814[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[2] is active level for the AND element.

p2816[0...1] BI: OR 1 / OR 1
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2816[0], P2816[1] define inputs of OR 1 element, output is P2817.

p2800 p2801[3]

A B C
p2816
A 0 0 0
Index0
Index1
B 1 C r2817 0
1
1
0
1
1
1 1 1

Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)

[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[3] is active level for the OR element.

r2817.0 BO: OR 1 / OR 1
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of OR 1 element.

Displays or logic of bits defined in P2816[0], P2816[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[3] is active level for the OR element.

1-248 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2818[0...1] BI: OR 2 / OR 2
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2818[0], P2818[1] define inputs of OR 2 element, output is P2819.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[4] is active level for the OR element.

r2819.0 BO: OR 2 / OR 2
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Output of OR 2 element.
Displays or logic of bits defined in P2818[0], P2818[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[4] is active level for the OR element.

p2820[0...1] BI: OR 3 / OR 3
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2820[0], P2820[1] define inputs of OR 3 element, output is P2821.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[5] is active level for the OR element.

r2821.0 BO: OR 3 / OR 3
Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of OR 3 element.

Displays or logic of bits defined in P2820[0], P2820[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[5] is active level for the OR element.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-249

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2822[0...1] BI: XOR 1 / XOR 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2822[0], P2822[1] define inputs of XOR 1 element, output is P2823.

p2800 p2801[6]

A B C
p2822
A 0 0 0
Index0
Index1
B =1 C r2823 0
1
1
0
1
1
1 1 0

Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)

[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[6] is active level for the XOR element.

r2823.0 BO: XOR 1 / XOR 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Output of XOR 1 element.
Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2822[0], P2822[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[6] is active level for the XOR element.

p2824[0...1] BI: XOR 2 / XOR 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2824[0], P2824[1] define inputs of XOR 2 element, output is P2825.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[7] is active level for the XOR element.

r2825.0 BO: XOR 2 / XOR 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of XOR 2 element.

Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2824[0], P2824[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[7] is active level for the XOR element.

1-250 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2826[0...1] BI: XOR 3 / XOR 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2826[0], P2826[1] define inputs of XOR 3 element, output is P2827.
Index: [0] = Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1] = Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[8] is active level for the XOR element.

r2827.0 BO: XOR 3 / XOR 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Output of XOR 3 element.
Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2826[0], P2826[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[8] is active level for the XOR element.

p2828 BI: NOT 1 / NOT 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2828 defines input of NOT 1 element, output is P2829.

p2800 p2801[9]

p2828
A C
Index0
1 r2829 A
0
C
1
1 0

Dependency: P2801[9] is active level for the NOT element.

r2829.0 BO: NOT 1 / NOT 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of NOT 1 element.

Displays not logic of bit defined in P2828.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[9] is active level for the NOT element.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-251

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2830 BI: NOT 2 / NOT 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2830 defines input of NOT 2 element, output is P2831.
Dependency: P2801[10] is active level for the NOT element.

r2831.0 BO: NOT 2 / NOT 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of NOT 2 element.

Displays not logic of bit defined in P2830.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[10] is active level for the NOT element.

p2832 BI: NOT 3 / NOT 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2832 defines input of NOT 3 element, output is P2833.
Dependency: P2801[11] is active level for the NOT element.

r2833.0 BO: NOT 3 / NOT 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Output of NOT 3 element.

Displays not logic of bit defined in P2832.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[11] is active level for the NOT element.

1-252 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2834[0...3] BI: D-FF 1 / D-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 1, outputs are P2835, P2836.

p2800 p2801[12]

p2834
SET (Q=1)
Index0
Index1 D Q r2835
Index2
Index3

STORE

Q r2836

RESET (Q=0)
SET RESET D STORE Q Q
1 0 x x 1 0
0 1 x x 0 1

POWER ON
1 1 1 x x Qn-1 Qn-1
0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
POWER-ON 0 1

Index: [0] = Binector input: Set

[1] = Binector input: D input
[2] = Binector input: Store pulse
[3] = Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[12] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

r2835.0 BO: Q D-FF 1 / Q D-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[12] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

r2836.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 1 / NOT-Q D-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[12] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-253

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2837[0...3] BI: D-FF 2 / D-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 2, outputs are P2838, 2839.
Index: [0] = Binector input: Set
[1] = Binector input: D input
[2] = Binector input: Store pulse
[3] = Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[13] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

r2838.0 BO: Q D-FF 2 / Q D-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[13] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

r2839.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 2 / NOT-Q D-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[13] is active level for the D-FlipFlop.

p2840[0...1] BI: RS-FF 1 / RS-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2840[0], P2840[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 1, outputs are P2841, P2842.

p2800 p2801[14]
SET RESET Q Q
p2840 0 0 Qn-1 Qn-1
SET
Index0 (Q=1) Q r2841 0 1 0 1
Index1
1 0 1 0

POWER ON 1 RESET
(Q=0) Q r2842 1 1 Qn-1 Qn-1
POWER-ON 0 1

Index: [0] = Binector input: Set

[1] = Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[14] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

1-254 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2841.0 BO: Q RS-FF 1 / Q RS-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[14] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

r2842.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 1 / NOT-Q RS-FF 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[14] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

p2843[0...1] BI: RS-FF 2 / RS-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2843[0], P2843[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 2, outputs are P2844, P2845.
Index: [0] = Binector input: Set
[1] = Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[15] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

r2844.0 BO: Q RS-FF 2 / Q RS-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[1]

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[15] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

r2845.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 2 / NOT-Q RS-FF 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[1]

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[15] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-255

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2846[0...1] BI: RS-FF 3 / RS-FF 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: P2846[0], P2846[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 3, outputs are P2847, P2848.
Index: [0] = Binector input: Set
[1] = Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[16] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

r2847.0 BO: Q RS-FF 3 / Q RS-FF 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[1]
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[16] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

r2848.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 3 / NOT-Q RS-FF 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[1]

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2801[16] is active level for the RS-FlipFlop.

1-256 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2849 BI: Timer 1 / Timer 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Define input signal of timer 1.
P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853.

p2850 (0.000) p2851(0)

p2800 p2802.0 Delay Time Mode

ON Delay
T 0 0 / 10

OFF Delay
0 T 1 / 11
p2849
In Out
Index0 ON/OFF Delay r2852
2 / 12
T T NOut
Pulse Gernerator
1 r2853

T 3 / 13

In
t
Out

p2851 = 0 (ON Delay)

t
p2850

p2851 = 1 (OFF Delay)

t
p2850

p2851 = 2 (ON-OFF Delay)

t
p2850 p2850

p2851 = 3 (Pulse Generator)

In
t
Out

t
p2850

In
t
Out

t
p2850

Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-257

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2850 Delay time of timer 1 / Delay time timer 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 9999.9 [s] 0.0 [s]
Description: Defines delay time of timer 1.
P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853.
Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer.

p2851 Mode timer 1 / Mode timer 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 13 0
Description: Selects mode of timer 1.
P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853.
Values: 0: ON delay (seconds)
1: OFF delay (seconds)
2: ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3: Pulse generator (seconds)
10: ON delay (minutes)
11: OFF delay (minutes)
12: ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13: Pulse generator (minutes)
Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer.

r2852.0 BO: Timer 1 / Timer 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of timer 1.

P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer.

r2853.0 BO: Nout timer 1 / Nout timer 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of timer 1.

P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2852, P2853.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[0] is active level for the timer.

1-258 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2854 BI: Timer 2 / Timer 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Define input signal of timer 2.
P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858.
Dependency: P2802[1] is active level for the timer.

p2855 Delay time of timer 2 / Delay time timer 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 9999.9 [s] 0.0 [s]
Description: Defines delay time of timer 2.
P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858.
Dependency: P2802[1] is active level for the timer.

p2856 Mode timer 2 / Mode timer 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 13 0
Description: Selects mode of timer 2.
P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858.
Values: 0: ON delay (seconds)
1: OFF delay (seconds)
2: ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3: Pulse generator (seconds)
10: ON delay (minutes)
11: OFF delay (minutes)
12: ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13: Pulse generator (minutes)
Dependency: P2802[1] is active level for the timer.

r2857.0 BO: Timer 2 / Timer 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of timer 2.

P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[1] is active level for the timer.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-259

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2858.0 BO: Nout timer 2 / Nout timer 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of timer 2

P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2857, P2858.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[1] is active level for the timer.

p2859 BI: Timer 3 / Timer 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Define input signal of timer 3.
P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863.
Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer.

p2860 Delay time of timer 3 / Delay time timer 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 9999.9 [s] 0.0 [s]
Description: Defines delay time of timer 3.
P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863.
Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer.

p2861 Mode timer 3 / Mode timer 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 13 0
Description: Selects mode of timer 3.
P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863.
Values: 0: ON delay (seconds)
1: OFF delay (seconds)
2: ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3: Pulse generator (seconds)
10: ON delay (minutes)
11: OFF delay (minutes)
12: ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13: Pulse generator (minutes)
Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer.

1-260 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2862.0 BO: Timer 3 / Timer 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of timer 3.

P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer.

r2863.0 BO: Nout timer 3 / Nout timer 3

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays Not-output of timer 3.
P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2862, P2863.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[2] is active level for the timer.

p2864 BI: Timer 4 / Timer 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Define input signal of timer 4.
P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer.

p2865 Delay time of timer 4 / Delay time timer 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0.0 [s] 9999.9 [s] 0.0 [s]
Description: Defines delay time of timer 4.
P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-261

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2866 Mode timer 4 / Mode timer 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 13 0
Description: Selects mode of timer 4.
P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
Values: 0: ON delay (seconds)
1: OFF delay (seconds)
2: ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3: Pulse generator (seconds)
10: ON delay (minutes)
11: OFF delay (minutes)
12: ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13: Pulse generator (minutes)
Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer.

r2867.0 BO: Timer 4 / Timer 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays output of timer 4.

P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer.

r2868.0 BO: Nout timer 4 / Nout timer 4

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays Not-output of timer 4.

P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[3] is active level for the timer.

p2869[0...1] CI: ADD 1 / ADD 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Adder 1, result is in P2870.
p2800 p2802[4]

p2869
Index0 x1 200%
Result r2870 Result = x1 + x2
Index1 x2
-200% If: x1 + x2 > 200% → Result = 200%
x1 + x2 x1 + x2 < -200% → Result = -200%

Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)

[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[4] is the active level for the Adder.

1-262 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2870 CO: ADD 1 / ADD 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Adder 1.

Dependency: P2802[4] is active level for the Adder.

p2871[0...1] CI: ADD 2 / ADD 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Adder 2, result is in P2872.
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[5] is active level for the Adder.

r2872 CO: ADD 2 / ADD 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Adder 2.

Dependency: P2802[5] is active level for the Adder.

p2873[0...1] CI: SUB 1 / SUB 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Subtracter 1, result is in P2874.

P2800 P2802[6]

P2873
x1 200%
Index0 Result Result = x1 - x2
r2874
Index1 x2
-200% If: x1 - x2 > 200% → Result = 200%
x1 - x2 x1 - x2 < -200% → Result = -200%

Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)

[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[6] is active level for the Subtracter.

r2874 CO: SUB 1 / SUB 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Subtracter 1.

Dependency: P2802[6] is active level for the Subtracter.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-263

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2875[0...1] CI: SUB 2 / SUB 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Subtracter 2, result is in P2876.
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[7] is active level for the Subtracter.

r2876 CO: SUB 2 / SUB 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -
Description: Result of Subtracter 2.
Dependency: P2802[7] is active level for the Subtracter.

p2877[0...1] CI: MUL 1 / MUL 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Multiplier 1, result is in P2878.
p2800 p2802[8]
x1∗ x2
p2877 Result =
x1 200%
100%
Index0 Result x1∗ x2
Index1 x2 r2878 If: > 200% → Result = 200%
-200% 100%
x1 ∗ x 2 x1∗ x2
< -200% → Result = -200%
100% 100%
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[8] is active level for the Multiplier.

r2878 CO: MUL 1 / MUL 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -
Description: Result of Multiplier 1.
Dependency: P2802[8] is active level for the Multiplier.

p2879[0...1] CI: MUL 2 / MUL 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Multiplier 2, result is in P2880.
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[9] is active level for the Multiplier.

1-264 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r2880 CO: MUL 2 / MUL 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Multiplier 2.

Dependency: P2802[9] is active level for the Multiplier.

p2881[0...1] CI: DIV 1 / DIV 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Divider 1, result is in P2882.

p2800 p2802[10]
x1∗ 100%
p2881 Result =
200%
x2
Index0 x1
Result x1∗ 100%
Index1 x2 r2882 If: > 200% → Result = 200%
-200% x2
x1 ∗ 100% x1∗ 100%
< -200% → Result = -200%
X2 x2

Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)

[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[10] is active level for the Divider.

r2882 CO: DIV 1 / DIV 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Divider 1.

Dependency: P2802[10] is active level for the Divider.

p2883[0...1] CI: DIV 2 / DIV 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Define inputs of Divider 2, result is in P2884.
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[11] is active level for the Divider.

r2884 CO: DIV 2 / DIV 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Result of Divider 2.

Dependency: P2802[11] is active level for the Divider.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-265

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2885[0...1] CI: CMP 1 / CMP 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Defines inputs of Comparator 1, output is P2886.

P2800 P2802[12]

P2885
x1
Index0 Out
r2886
x1 ≥ x2 → Out = 1
x2 CMP
Index1 x1 < x2 → Out = 0
Out = x1 ≥ x2

Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)

[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[12] is active level for the Comparator.

r2886.0 BO: CMP 1 / CMP 1

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -
Description: Displays result bit of Comparator 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[12] is active level for the Comparator.

p2887[0...1] CI: CMP 2 / CMP 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Integer16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 755[0]
Description: Defines inputs of Comparator 2, output is P2888.
Index: [0] = Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1] = Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[13] is active level for the Comparator.

r2888.0 BO: CMP 2 / CMP 2

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays result bit of Comparator 2.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Output of BO Yes No -
Dependency: P2802[13] is active level for the Comparator.

1-266 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2889 CO: Fixed setpoint 1 in [%] / Fixed setp 1 %

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Fixed percent setting 1.

Connector Setting in %
p2889

p2890

Range : -200% ... 200%

p2890 CO: Fixed setpoint 2 in [%] / Fixed setp 2 %

Access level: 3 P-Group: Technology Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Fixed percent setting 2.

p2940 BI: Release Wobble function / Rel Wobble

Access level: 2 P-Group: Technology Data type: U32 / Binary
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Defines the source to release the wobble function.

p2945 Wobble signal frequency / Wobble sig freq

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.001 [Hz] 10.000 [Hz] 1.000 [Hz]
Description: Sets the frequency of the wobble signal.

p2946 Wobble signal amplitude / Wobble sig amp

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [%] 0.200 [%] 0.000 [%]
Description: Sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal as a proportion of the present Ramp Function
Generator (RFG) output. The value of P2946 is multiplied by the output value of the RFG then added to RFG out-
put.
For example, if the RFG output is 10Hz, and P2946 has a value of 0.100, the wobble signal amplitude will be 0.100
* 10 = 1Hz. This means that the RFG output will therefore wobble between 9Hz and 11Hz.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-267

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p2947 Wobble signal decrement step / Signal dec step

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the value for decrement step at the end of the positive signal period. The amplitude of the step is
dependant upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal decrement step = P2947 * P2946

p2948 Wobble signal increment step / Signal inc step

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Floating Point
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the value for the increment step at the end of the negative signal period.
The amplitude of the increment step is dependant upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal increment step = P2948 * P2946

p2949 Wobble signal pulse width / Wobble pul width

Access level: 2 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [%] 100 [%] 50 [%]
Description: Sets the relative widths of the rising and falling pulses. The value in P2949 sets the proportion of the
wobble period (determined by P2945) allocated to the rising pulse, the remainder of the time is allocation to the
falling pulse.
A value of 60% in P2949 means that 60% of the wobble period the wobble output will be rising. For the remaining
40% of the wobble period the wobble output will be falling.

r2955 CO: Wobble signal output / Wobble output

Access level: 2 P-Group: Setpoints Data type: Floating Point
Unit: [%] Data set: -

Description: Displays the output of the wobble function.

1-268 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r3113.0...15 CO/BO: Fault Bit Array / Fault Bit Array

Access level: 1 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Gives information about actual fault.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Inverter error Yes No -
01 Power line failure Yes No -
02 Intermediate circuit power voltage Yes No -
03 Error power electronics Yes No -
04 Convertor over temperature Yes No -
05 Earth leackage Yes No -
06 Motor overload Yes No -
07 Bus fault Yes No -
08 External safety failure Yes No -
09 Fault motor sensor Yes No -
10 Fault internal communication Yes No -
11 Motor current limit Yes No -
12 Supply failure Yes No -
13 Reserved Yes No -
14 Reserved Yes No -
15 Other error Yes No -

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-269

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p3900 End of quick commissioning / Quick commiss. end

CU240E Access level: 1 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP Can be changed: C
CU240S PN

Min Max Factory setting

0 11 0
Description: Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation.
After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to
their original value 0.
Values: 0: No quick commissioning
1: End quick commissioning with factory reset
2: End quick commissioning
3: End quick commissioning only for motor data
10: Accept safety changes (only on safety CU)
11: Cancel safety changes (only on safety CU)
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Note: P3900 = 1 :
When setting 1 is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick commis-
sioning", are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost.
Motor calculations are also performed.

P3900 = 2 :
When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning menu
"Quick commissioning" (P0010 = 1) are calculated.
The I/O settings are also reset to default and the motor calculations performed.

P3900 = 3 :
When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed.
Exiting quick commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been
changed).
Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor weight), P0350
(demagnetization time), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current).
When transferring parameter p3900, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these
calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications
via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

1-270 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p3900 End of quick commissioning / Quick commiss. end

CU240S DP-F Access level: 1 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. YES Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: C

Min Max Factory setting

0 11 0
Description: Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation.
After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to
their original value 0.
Values: 0: No quick commissioning
1: End quick commissioning with factory reset
2: End quick commissioning
3: End quick commissioning only for motor data
10: Accept safety changes (only on safety CU)
11: Cancel safety changes (only on safety CU)
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Or for safety commissioning P0010 = 95.
Note: P3900 = 1 :
When setting 1 is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick commis-
sioning", are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost.
Motor calculations are also performed.

P3900 = 2 :
When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning menu
"Quick commissioning" (P0010 = 1) are calculated.
The I/O settings are also reset to default and the motor calculations performed.

P3900 = 3 :
When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed.
Exiting quick commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been
changed).
Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor weight), P0350
(demagnetization time), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current).
P3900 = 10 (only on safety CU)
Finishes the safety commissioning by accepting the safety changes.
The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 5 s.

P3900 = 11 (only on safety CU)

Finishes the safety commissioning by discarding the safety changes. The safety settings that were active before the
safety commissioning are reloaded.
The safety commissioning including safety dynamization will take about 5 s.
When transferring parameter p3900, the frequency inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these
calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications
via fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Drive fault 70
• Drive fault 75
When using STARTER (USS) to commission the drive system, data cannot be entered while these calculations are
being made.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the frequency inverter. These
calculations can take up to one minute to complete.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-271

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r3930[0...4] PS Data version / PS Data version

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the A5E number and the ps data versions

Index: [0] = A5E 1st 4 digits
[1] = A5E 2nd 4 digits
[2] = Logistic Version
[3] = Fixed Data Version
[4] = Calib Data Version

p3950 Access of hidden parameters / Access hidden par

Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: U, T

Min Max Factory setting

0 255 0
Description: Accesses special parameters for development (expert only) and factory functionality (calibration parameter).

r3954[0...12] CM info and GUI ID / CC info GUI ID

Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Used to classify firmware (only for SIEMENS internal purposes).

Index: [0] = CM label (increment/branch)
[1] = CM label (counter)
[2] = CM label
[3] = GUI ID
[4] = GUI ID
[5] = GUI ID
[6] = GUI ID
[7] = GUI ID
[8] = GUI ID
[9] = GUI ID
[10] = GUI ID
[11] = GUI ID major release
[12] = GUI ID minor release

r3955 Version for DriveMonitor / DriveMon. version

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the version for DriveMonitor.

r3978 BICO counter / BICO counter

Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned32
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Counts the number of changed BICO links

1-272 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p3981 Reset active fault / Reset active fault

Access level: 4 P-Group: Messages Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Resets active faults when changed from 0 to 1.
Values: 0: No fault reset
1: Reset fault
Note: See P0947 (last fault code)
Automatically reset to 0.

p3984 Client telegram off time / Client tel. off ti

Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

100 [ms] 10000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Defines time after which a fault will be generated (7220) if no telegram is received from the client.
Dependency: Setting 0 = watchdog disabled

r3986[0...1] Number of parameters / No. of parameters

Access level: 4 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Number of parameters on the drive.

Index: [0] = Read only
[1] = Read & write

p7841[0...5] PM serial no hot swap check / PM Serialno

Access level: 3 P-Group: Converter Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65535 0
Description: Reads the power module serial number, which is stored in the control unit. At power up these serial number are ver-
ified, if any swapping of the CU or the PM had been taken place.
Index: [0] = Production site
[1] = Production year after 2000
[2] = Production month
[3] = Production day
[4] = Production number per day
[5] = Type - not used on all drives
Note: The parameter cannot be changed.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-273

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p7844 Acceptance Test, Confirmation / Ack Accept. Test

Access level: 3 P-Group: - Data type: Unsigned16
Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: After a CU/PM swap or a startup clone this parameter will be automatically set to 1. Also a fault F0395 will be set.
By setting this parameter to 0 the acceptance test can be acknowledged. An Acceptance Test Log needs to be
done.
By setting this parameter to 2 the parameter clone will be undone and the previously stored parameters will be
enabled.
After reverting to the previous parameterset the drive will reset F0395 and P7844 = 0. In this case an Acceptance
Test Log is still required.
Values: 0: No Acceptance / Confirmation pending
1: Ack of Acceptance Test / Confirmation is pending
2: Undo Clone
Note: If no MMC clone has been performed during startup the setting 2 is not possible.
On a safety board it is necessary to set the safety password before changing this parameter.
P0010 = 30
P9761 = password

p8458 Clone Control / Clone Control

CU240S Access level: 3 P-Group: Factory settings Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S DP Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
CU240S DP-F Can be changed: T
CU240S PN
CU240S PN-F

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 1
Description: This parameter specifies whether a cloning at startup will be performed. The File clone00.bin will be used.
If no MMC is inserted there will be a normal startup.
Values: 0: No Startup Clone
1: Once Startup Clone
2: Always Startup Clone
Note: If a MMC is inserted without a valid file the drive will set a fault F0061 / F0063 / F0064 which can only be cleared by
a powercycle.

p8840 Fieldbus Off-time / FB off-time

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 20 [ms]
Description: Fieldbus off-time.

1-274 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p8841[0...15] Fieldbus configuration data / FB conf data

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0000 hex FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Fieldbus configuration data.
Index: [0] = FB Parameter 0
[1] = FB Parameter 1
[2] = FB Parameter 2
[3] = FB Parameter 3
[4] = FB Parameter 4
[5] = FB Parameter 5
[6] = FB Parameter 6
[7] = FB Parameter 7
[8] = FB Parameter 8
[9] = FB Parameter 9
[10] = FB Parameter 10
[11] = FB Parameter 11
[12] = FB Parameter 12
[13] = FB Parameter 13
[14] = FB Parameter 14
[15] = FB Parameter 15

r8849[0...15] Fieldbus rev configuration data / FB rev conf data

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Fieldbus reverse configuration data display.

r8850[0...7] CO: PZD from Fieldbus / PZD from FB

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PZD from Fieldbus.

Index: [0] = Received word 0
[1] = Received word 1
[2] = Received word 2
[3] = Received word 3
[4] = Received word 4
[5] = Received word 5
[6] = Received word 6
[7] = Received word 7

p8851[0...7] CI: PZD to Fieldbus / PZD to FB

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: YES Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

- - 52[0]
Description: PZD to Fieldbus.
Index: [0] = Transmitted word 0
[1] = Transmitted word 1
[2] = Transmitted word 2
[3] = Transmitted word 3
[4] = Transmitted word 4
[5] = Transmitted word 5
[6] = Transmitted word 6
[7] = Transmitted word 7

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-275

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r8858[0...15] Fieldbus diagnostic data display / FB diag data displ

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Fieldbus diagnostic data display.

Index: [0] = FB Diag. 0
[1] = FB Diag. 1
[2] = FB Diag. 2
[3] = FB Diag. 3
[4] = FB Diag. 4
[5] = FB Diag. 5
[6] = FB Diag. 6
[7] = FB Diag. 7
[8] = FB Diag. 8
[9] = FB Diag. 9
[10] = FB Diag. 10
[11] = FB Diag. 11
[12] = FB Diag. 12
[13] = FB Diag. 13
[14] = FB Diag. 14
[15] = FB Diag. 15

r8859[0...7] Fieldbus identification data display / FB id data display

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Fieldbus identification data display.

The different Fieldbus types (r8859[0]) are given below:
0 = No additional Fieldbus option available
1 = PROFIBUS DP
2 = DeviceNet
3 = CAN
4 = AS-i
5 = LON
6 = Modbus
10 = PROFInet IO
11 = ES bus (ET 200pro)
4660 = ES bus (ET 200S)
65535 = not defined
Index: [0] = FB data structure version
[1] = FB driver version
[2] = FB type
[3] = Firmware version
[4] = Firmware version detail
[5] = Firmware date (year)
[6] = Firmware date (day/month)
[7] = unused

1-276 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r8890.0...15 BO: Control word 1 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd1 <- FB

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays control word 1 received from Fieldbus.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes -
02 OFF3: Fast stop No Yes -
03 Pulse enable Yes No -
04 RFG enable Yes No -
05 RFG start Yes No -
06 Setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No -
08 JOG right Yes No -
09 JOG left Yes No -
10 Control from PLC Yes No -
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No -
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No -
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No -
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No -
Note: If P0700 = 6 (Fieldbus) then P0810 must be set to 2090.15 for correct operation.
This will not be cleared automatically when P0700 is no longer equal to 6.

r8891.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -
PM240
Description: Displays control word 2 received from Fieldbus.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
09 Enable DC brake Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-277

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r8891.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -
PM250, PM260
Description: Displays control word 2 received from Fieldbus.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No -
01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 Yes No -
02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 Yes No -
03 Fixed frequency Bit 3 Yes No -
04 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No -
05 Drive Dataset (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No -
08 Enable PID Yes No -
11 Enable Droop Yes No -
12 Torque control Yes No -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
15 Command Dataset (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No -

p9601 SI enable parameter / SI enable

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0010 bin
Description: Safety parameter for enabling the individual safety control functions.
• Bit01 activates the forced dynamisation and processor selftest on selection of the STO. Warning A1699 can
only be acknowledged when Bit01 is set. The switch-on of pulses is inhibited during the test (i.e. r0052 Bit06 =
1) for approximately 3.1 seconds.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No -
STO
Notice: The switch-off circuitry of the mechanical brake is tested during the forced dynamisation. For short periods (2 ms -
16 ms) the brake is controlled to open. In general the mechanical brake will require command signals longer than
20 ms. Care should be taken if a brake is used that has a reaction time of less than 20 ms.

p9602 SI enable safe brake monitoring / SI brake mon. ena

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: As long as P9602 is set to 0, there is no monitoring of the output level but switching on and off is still performed. The
ability to shutdown is especially important when no brake is used, otherwise the absence of the brake module or the
power contactor for the brake would be interpreted as a cable breakage and result in an alarm message.
To enable monitoring of the safe brake control, set P9602 to 1.
Values: 0: Disable monitoring of safe brake control
1: Enable monitoring of safe brake control
Note: The holding brake must be dimensioned so that should a fault occur the complete drive can be braked to zero from
any possible operational frequency.

1-278 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9603 SI Selection of Safety Source / SI Source select

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: Safety parameter for selection of the safety input signals. The safety input signals can be taken either from
PROFIsafe or from the safe digital inputs.
Two digital inputs form one safety input. The first safety input consists of FDI0A and FDI0B, the second safety input
consists of FDI1A and FDI1B.
Using digital inputs, each safety input can be assigned to the safety functions "safe torque off (STO)", "safe stop 1
(SS1)" or "safely-limited speed (SLS)".
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SLS activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
01 SLS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
02 SS1 activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
03 SS1 activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
04 STO activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
05 STO activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
07 STO, SS1, SLS activated via PROFIsafe Yes No -
Note: If Bit 7 = 1, all other bits must be set 0.

p9650 SI Safe Digital Input debounce delay time / SI Debounce FDI

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 50 [ms]
Description: Defines the maximum allowed debounce delay between the two safe digital input pins.
If both safe digital inputs are not consistent after this time a fault will be generated (F1601.108).

p9651 SI Safe Digital Input filter delay time / SI Filt. delay FDI
CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 [ms] 100 [ms] 5 [ms]
Description: Defines the response time delay of the safe digital inputs. Signals that are shorter than the specified time are not
processed as safety signals but ignored.
Any noise occures shorter than filter time has no effect to level of safe digital inputs.
Note: Increasing/decreasing of the filter delay time has direct impact to the reaction time between triggering and activating
the safety function.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-279

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9659 SI max time until forced dynam. / SI forc dynam time

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.1 [h] 8760.0 [h] 8.0 [h]
Description: The time interval between forced dynamisation procedures is specified. The remaining time until a forced dynamis-
ation is required is shown in r9660. When r9660 reaches zero, the time interval has expired and warning A1699 is
activated.
The warning solely informs that a forced dynamisation is required. The user should activate a forced dynamisation
on the next occasion. The drive functionality will not be affected by the warning.
The forced dynamisation is activated in the following cases:
• after each power-up,
• on de-selecting the STO when p9601 = p9801 = 2,
• when leaving the passivated safe torque off (passivated STO).
• when leaving safety commissioning,
During forced dynamisation all shutdown paths are tested and a processor selftest is carried out.
The timer for the forced dynamisation (see r9660) is reset to the value in p9659 and warning A1699 is cleared if the
forced dynamisation was carried out successfully:

r9660 CO: SI remain time until forc dynam / SI remaining time

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Unit: [h] Data set: -

Description: Parameter r9660 displays the remaining time until a forced dynamisation is required. When r9660 reaches zero,
warning A1699 is issued and status Bit06 in parameter r9772 is set.
Note: The warning A1699 and Bit06 of r9772 are only cleared when the dynamisation has been completed (see descrip-
tion of p9659).
The resetting of r9660 to the value in p9659 will take place once the dynamisation has finished.
The resolution of r9660 is 0.1 hour or 6 minutes.

p9680 SI braking ramp delay / SI braking delay

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

10 [ms] 99000 [ms] 250 [ms]
Description: Time [in ms] between selecting the safe stop 1 and the activation of the monitoring ramp. The actual frequency is
compared to the frequency of the monitoring ramp when the SS1 is active. If the actual frequency exceeds that of
the monitoring ramp, a passivated safe torge off (passivated STO) is generated.
For applications with changing loads, an increase of p9680/p9880 or p9691/p9891 is recommended. A larger devi-
ation of the actual frequency from the reference is then acceptable.
Note: A value of 99000 deactivates the SS1 monitoring. Set p9880 accordingly. The ramping on selection of SLS or SS1
will however still follow the ramping time in p9681/p9881.

1-280 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9681 SI braking ramp down time / SI braking down ti

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

100 [ms] 99000 [ms] 10000 [ms]
Description: Defines the braking ramp down time for the safe stop 1 (SS1) in milliseconds. The ramp down time is used for the
SS1 and the monitoring ramp.
The total braking time Tx can be derived where fx is the current frequency according to the following formulas:
a) For activation of the SLS:
Tx = p9681 * (fx - p9690) / 200 Hz
b) For activation of SS1:
Tx = p9681 * (fx - p9682) / 200 Hz
Note: In contrast to other ramping times (e.g. p1120, p1121), the safety braking time is referred to 200 Hz and not to
p1082. See formulas above.

p9682 SI minimum frequency for standstill detection / SI min standstill

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

2.0 [Hz] 20.0 [Hz] 5.0 [Hz]
Description: A frequency below the threshold of p9682/p9882 is considered standstill.
If the SS1 has been selected, the safe torque off (STO) will be activated.

p9690 SI setpoint for SLS / SI setpoint SLS

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

2.0 [Hz] 300.0 [Hz] 10.0 [Hz]
Description: Frequency setpoint that is used when the safely limited speed (SLS) is selected.
Depending on the setting in p9692/p9892 the frequency of p9690/p9890 may also serve as a frequency threshold
instead of a setpoint.
(see p9692)
Note: For applications with changing loads, an increase of p9680/p9880 or p9691/p9891 is recommended.
If the "safely limited speed" (SLS) is selected while the output frequency is below the setpoint value, Bit04 and Bit05
will be set simultanously in r9772.

p9691 SI tolerance for SLS / SI tolerance SLS

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

5.0 [Hz] 303.0 [Hz] 13.0 [Hz]
Description: Upper tolerance margin for the SLS. If the actual frequency at initiation of the safely limited speed lies below the
value of p9691/p9891 and later on exceeds that value a passivated safe torque off (passivated STO) is generated.
The tolerance defined by the difference p9691 - p9690 (or p9891 - p9890) is also used for the monitoring ramp
when the SS1 is active.
For applications with changing loads it is recommended to increase p9691/p9891.
Note: The value in p9691 needs to be larger than the value in p9690. This condition is checked when leaving the safety
commissioning.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-281

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9692 SI response to selecting SLS / SI SLS response

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 1
Description: Defines the response after the initiation of the safely limited speed (SLS).

p9692 = p9892 = 0 (mode 0):

The fact that the output frequency at initiation of the safely limited speed exceeds the safe limit value parameterised
in p9691/p9891 is interpreted as fault, wherefore a safe stop 1 followed by a passivated safe torque off is initiated.
If, however, the output frequency at initiation of the safely limited speed lies below the upper limit parameterised in
p9691/p9891 the drives frequency control channel is blocked, wherefore the actual drive frequency cannot be con-
trolled by an external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.) anymore. The drive will then be locked at the current
frequency.

p9692 = p9892 = 1 (mode 1):

The fact that the output frequency at initiation of the safely limited speed exceeds the safe limit value is not inter-
preted as fault, wherefore the safe stop 1 function is initiated automatically.
The target frequency is not zero (as it usually is at SS1) but rather a parameterisable value (p9690/p9890) just
below the tolerance value parameterised in p9691/p9891.
If the output frequency lies below the parameterised frequency (p9690/p9890) the brake ramp does not need to be
activated and the output frequency does not need to be changed, thus the behaviour would be the same as safely
limited speed mode 0.
After initiating the function safely limited speed and braking the drive down to the parameterised frequency
(p9690/p9890) by using the safe stop 1 the drives frequency control channel is blocked, wherefore the actual drive
frequency cannot be controlled by an external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.) anymore. The drive will then
be locked at a constant frequency, which is parameterised in p9690/p9890.

p9692 = p9892 = 2 (mode 2):

After initiating the safely limited speed function only the monitoring ramp will be activated. The safe stop 1 will not
be activated, therefore, it would be the responsibility of the customer to ramp the drive down to or below the SLS
setpoint (p9690/9890), before activating SLS.
The drive frequency is then controlled by the external control (e.g. PLC, MotorPoti, USS, etc.). Now, setting the con-
trol channel to a frequency, which exceeds the parameterised limit in p9691/p9891, is interpreted as fault condition,
wherefore a passivated safe torque off is initiated immediately.
Values: 0: Initiate STO with braking ramp and drive fault when f > f_SLS
1: Activate braking ramp while f > f_SLS
2: Initiate STO without braking ramp and with drive fault while f

r9760 SI internal password / SI intern password

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Contains the current safety password. For safety commissioning or safety reset the value of r9760 has to be
entered into p9761.
If the password in p9761 is not set correctly to the value in r9760, none of the safety parameters can be written and
a fault F1659 is generated.
This parameter is changed automatically to the password in p9763 when the new value of p9762 is identical to the
confirmation password in p9763.

1-282 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9761 SI input password / SI input password

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

1000 99999 1000
Description: The safety password of r9760 is entered in this parameter to get access to changing the safety parameters.
If p9761 is not identical to r9760 a fault F1659 is generated.
Note: The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set.
The range of the password values are 1000 to 99999.

p9762 SI change password / SI change password

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

1000 99999 1000
Description: Parameter to change the safety password. The new safety password is entered in p9762 and then confirmed by
entering same value in p9763.
Note: The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set.
The range of the password values are 1000 to 99999.
The values in p9762 and p9763 are set to zero automatically when the new password is accepted.

p9763 SI change password confirmation / SI passwd. confirm

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned32
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

1000 99999 1000
Description: Confirm a safety password change. Parameter needs to be set to the same value as p9762. Only then then pass-
word change of p9762 is stored in r9760 as new password. If p9763 is not identical to p9762, both values are
cleared and r9760 is not updated.
Note: The default value of this parameter is 0. This indicates that no password has been set.
The range of the password values are 1000 to 99999.
The values in p9762 and p9763 are set to zero automatically when the new password is accepted.

r9770[0...5] SI Firmware version / SI FW version

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the Safety Integrated and PROFIsafe version.

Example: r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 1, r9770[2] = 3 is for safety version V02.01.0003
r9770[3] = 2, r9770[4] = 1, r9770[5] = 3 is for PROFIsafe version V02.01.0003
Index: [0] = Safety major release
[1] = Safety minor release
[2] = Safety baselevel (patch)
[3] = PROFIsafe major release
[4] = PROFIsafe minor release
[5] = PROFIsafe baselevel (patch)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-283

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r9771.0...1 CO/BO: SI hardware functions / SI hw functions

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the available safety functions of the drive (bit coded).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Safe shutdown path available Yes No -
01 Sensorless safety speed monitoring avail- Yes No -
able
Note:

r9772.0...15 CO/BO: SI status word / SI StatWd

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Displays the status of safety integrated.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 Safe torque off (STO) selected Yes No -
01 Safe torque off (STO) activated Yes No -
02 Safe stop 1 (SS1) selected Yes No -
03 Safety monitoring ramp active Yes No -
04 Safely limited speed (SLS) selected Yes No -
05 SLS limit reached Yes No -
06 reserved Yes No -
07 reserved Yes No -
08 Passivated STO active, drive fault Yes No -
14 Safe Brake closed Yes No -
15 Dynamisation required Yes No -
Note: For further informations to the meaning of the bits see the descriptions of the safety functions STO, SS1 and SLS in
the manual.

r9798 SI display checksum / SI act. checksum

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Display of safety checksum for P1. The checksum changes when CRC-relevant safety parameters of P1 are
changed (parameter range p9600 - p9699, except p9659).
Note: This checksum must be identical to the value in r9898 before the safety commissioning can be finished via p3900 =
10. If r9798 differs from r9898 the CRC-relevant safety parameters of P1 differ from that of P2. Check the parame-
ters of P1 against that of P2 and correct the mistake.
When r9798 and r9898 differ, the safety commissioning can always be left via p3900 = 11, thus discarding the last
changes.

p9799 SI parameter checksum / SI checksum

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0000 hex FFFF hex 8AFD hex
Description: Confirm checksum of the P1 safety parameters. The correct value has to be entered before leaving the safety com-
missioning with p3900 = 10.
Only if r9798, r9898, p9799 and p9899 are all identical, the commissioning can be finished.
Note: Enter the reading of r9798 or r9898 into p9799 once no more safety parameters need to be changed.

1-284 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9801 SI enable parameter / SI enable param.

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0010 bin
Description: Double of parameter p9601. See there.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
01 Enable forced dynamisation (self test) after Yes No -
STO
Note: On non-safety hardware units, p9801 is zero by default.

p9802 SI enable safe brake monitoring / SI brake mon. ena

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 1 0
Description: Double of parameter p9602. See there.
Values: 0: Disable monitoring of safe brake control
1: Enable monitoring of safe brake control

p9803 SI Selection of Safety Source / SI Source select

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0000 bin
Description: Double of parameter p9603. See there.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 SLS activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
01 SLS activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
02 SS1 activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
03 SS1 activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
04 STO activated via FDI1A and FDI1B Yes No -
05 STO activated via FDI0A and FDI0B Yes No -
07 STO, SS1, SLS activated via PROFIsafe Yes No -

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-285

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9810 PROFIsafe destination address / F dest address

CU240S DP-F Access level: 2 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: T

Min Max Factory setting

0 65534 0
Description: Defines the PROFIsafe destination address for the communication.
The PROFIsafe destination address is identical to the PROFIBUS address by default.
This parameter can be changed via a user-entered value.
Note: Valid PROFIsafe address settings: 1 ... 65534
0: default, forces PROFIsafe address to be identical with the PROFIBUS address.
If the PROFIsafe destination address is set manually to a value which is unequal to the PROFIBUS address, it will
not be automatically adjusted when the PROFIBUS address is changed.
This applies when the PROFIBUS address is set via DIP switches as well as via parameter p0918.

p9850 SI Safe Digital Input debounce delay time / SI Debounce FDI

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 2.000 [s] 0.050 [s]
Description: Double of parameter p9650. See there.
Note: The debounce delay time in p9850 is entered in seconds!

p9851 SI Safe Digital Input filter delay time / SI Filt. time FDI
CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.000 [s] 0.100 [s] 0.005 [s]
Description: Double of parameter p9651. See there.
Note: The filter delay time in p9851 is entered in seconds!

p9880 SI braking ramp delay / SI braking delay

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.010 [s] 99.000 [s] 0.250 [s]
Description: Double of parameter p9680. See there.
Note: The delay time in p9880 is entered in seconds!

p9881 SI braking ramp down time / SI ramp down time

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.100 [s] 99.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Double of parameter p9681. See there.
Note: The ramp down time in p9881 is entered in seconds!

1-286 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9882 SI minimum frequency for standstill detection / SI min standstill

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.0020 [kHz] 0.0200 [kHz] 0.0050 [kHz]
Description: Double of parameter p9682. See there.
Note: The standstill detection frequency in p9882 is entered in kHz!

p9890 SI setpoint for SLS / SI setpoint SLS

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.0020 [kHz] 0.3000 [kHz] 0.0100 [kHz]
Description: Double of parameter p9690. See there.
Note: The setpoint in p9890 is entered in kHz!

p9891 SI tolerance for SLS / SI tolerance SLS

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Floating Point
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0.0050 [kHz] 0.303 [kHz] 0.0130 [kHz]
Description: Double of parameter p9691. See there.
Note: The tolerance in p9891 is entered in kHz!

p9892 SI response to selecting SLS / SI SLS response

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 1
Description: Double of parameter p9692. See there.
Values: 0: Initiate STO with braking ramp and drive fault when f > f_SLS
1: Activate braking ramp while f > f_SLS
2: Initiate STO without braking ramp and with drive fault while f

r9898 SI display checksum / SI act. checksum

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: Display of safety checksum for P2 parameters. The checksum changes when safety parameters for P2 are
changed (parameter range p9800 - p9892).
Note: This checksum must be identical to the value in r9798 before the safety commissioning can be finished via p3900 =
10. If r9898 differs from r9798, the safety parameters on P2 differ from the safety parameters on P1. Check the
safety parameters and correct the mistake.
The safety commissioning can always be left via p3900 = 11, thus discarding the last changes.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-287

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

p9899 SI parameter checksum / SI checksum

CU240S DP-F Access level: 3 P-Group: Safety Integrated Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Quick comm. NO Active: NO Data set: -
Can be changed: -

Min Max Factory setting

0000 hex FFFF hex 8AFD hex
Description: Confirm checksum of the safety parameters.
Note: Enter the reading of r9798 or r9898 into p9899 once the safety parametrisation is complete.

r61000[0...239] PROFInet Name Of Station / PN name of station

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PROFInet name of station.

Displays each character in a separate index.

r61001[0...3] PROFInet IP Of Station / PN IP adr

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PROFInet IP address.

Displays e.g. 255.255.255.1 as
p61001[0] : 255
p61001[1] : 255
p61001[2] : 255
p61001[3] : 1

r61002[0...5] PROFInet MAC Of Station / PN MAC adr

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PROFInet MAC address.

Displays e.g. 5F-23-AD-F4-5A-22 as
p61002[0] : 5F
p61002[1] : 23
p61002[2] : AD
p61002[3] : F4
p61002[4] : 5A
p61002[5] : 22

r61003[0...3] PROFInet Default Gateway Of Station / PN Gateway adr

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PROFInet default gateway.

Displays e.g. 192.168.2.1 as
p61003[0] : 192
p61003[1] : 168
p61003[2] : 2
p61003[3] : 1

1-288 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
List of Parameters

r61004[0...3] PROFInet Subnet Mask Of Station / PN Subnet Mask

CU240S PN Access level: 3 P-Group: Communications Data type: Unsigned16
CU240S PN-F Unit: - Data set: -

Description: PROFInet subnet mask.

Displays e.g. 255.255.255.0 as
p61004[0] : 255
p61004[1] : 255
p61004[2] : 255
p61004[3] : 0

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-289

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

1.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS)

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

p0700[0...2] Selection of command source / Command source sel
p0701[0...2] Function of digital input 0 / Function of DI0
p0702[0...2] Function of digital input 1 / Function of DI1
p0703[0...2] Function of digital input 2 / Function of DI2
p0704[0...2] Function of digital input 3 / Function of DI3
p0705[0...2] Function of digital input 4 / Function of DI4
p0706[0...2] Function of digital input 5 / Function of DI5
p0707[0...2] Function of digital input 6 / Function of DI6
p0708[0...2] Function of digital input 7 / Function of DI7
p0709[0...2] Function of digital input 8 / Function of DI8
p0712[0...2] Analog / digital input 0 / Ana/digi input 0
p0713[0...2] Analog / digital input 1 / Ana/digi input 1
p0719[0...2] Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. / Cmd.&freq.setp.sel
p0727[0...2] Selection of 2/3-wire method / 2/3-wire selection
p0731[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 0 / Fct. of DO0
p0732[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 1 / Fct. of DO1
p0733[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 2 / Fct. of DO2
p0800[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 0 / Dwnl.par.set 0
p0801[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 1 / Dwnl.par.set 1
p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
p0842[0...2] BI: ON reverse/OFF1 / ON reverse/OFF1
p0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
p0845[0...2] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
p0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
p0849[0...2] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable
p1000[0...2] Selection of frequency setpoint / Freq setp. select.
p1020[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 / FF sel. Bit 0
p1021[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 1 / FF sel. Bit 1
p1022[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 / FF sel. Bit 2
p1023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3
p1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP)
p1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN)
p1041[0...2] BI: MOP select setpoint automatically/manually / Setp. auto/manu
p1042[0...2] CI: MOP auto setpoint / MOP auto setpoint
p1043[0...2] BI: MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / MOP acc RFG setpo
p1044[0...2] CI: MOP rampgenerator setpoint / MOP RFG setpoint
p1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG ->
p1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <-
p1070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...2] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1074[0...2] BI: Disable additional setpoint / Disab.add.setp
p1075[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint / Add. setpoint
p1076[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint scaling / Add. setp.scal
p1110[0...2] BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint / Inh. neg. setp
p1113[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse

1-290 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

p1124[0...2] BI: Enable JOG ramp times / Enable JOG ramp

p1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable
p1141[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start
p1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp
p1218[0...2] BI: MHB override / MHB override
p1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk.
p1330[0...2] CI: Voltage setpoint / Voltage setp.
p1477[0...2] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. / Set integrator
p1478[0...2] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. / Set int. value
p1492[0...2] BI: Enable droop / Enable droop
p1500[0...2] Selection of torque setpoint / Torque setp. sel.
p1501[0...2] BI: Change to torque control / Change > torq ctrl
p1503[0...2] CI: Torque setpoint / Torque setp.
p1511[0...2] CI: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp
p1522[0...2] CI: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim
p1523[0...2] CI: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim
p2103[0...2] BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement / 1. Faults ackn
p2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn
p2106[0...2] BI: External fault / External fault
p2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller / Enab. PID ctrl
p2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 / PID setp->Bit 0
p2221[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1 / PID setp->Bit 1
p2222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 / PID setp->Bit 2
p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->Bit 3
p2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) / PID-MOP (UP)
p2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) / PID-MOP (DWN)
p2241[0...2] BI: PID-MOP select setpoint auto/manu / Setp. auto/manu
p2242[0...2] CI: PID-MOP auto setpoint / PMOP auto setpoint
p2243[0...2] BI: PID-MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP acc RFG setpo
p2244[0...2] CI: PID-MOP rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP RFG setpoint
p2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint / PID setpoint
p2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source / PID trim source
p2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback / PID feedback
p2480[0...2] BI: Enable positioning ramp down / Enable positioning
p2803[0...2] Enable FastFFBs / Enable FastFFBs

Parameters P0800, P0801, P1522, P1523, P2200 will be altered in the state "Ready" only,
all other parameters will be altered during data set switchover (CDS) in the state "Run".

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-291

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

1.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS)

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

p0005[0...2] Display selection / Display selection
r0035[0...2] CO: Act. motor temperature / Act. mot.temp.
p0291[0...2] Inverter protection / Inverter protect.
p0300[0...2] Select motor type / Select motor type
p0304[0...2] Rated motor voltage / Rated mot. voltage
p0305[0...2] Rated motor current / Rated mot. current
p0307[0...2] Rated motor power / Rated motor power
p0308[0...2] Rated motor cosPhi / Rated mot. cosPhi
p0309[0...2] Rated motor efficiency / Rated efficiency
p0310[0...2] Rated motor frequency / Rated motor freq.
p0311[0...2] Rated motor speed / Rated motor speed
r0313[0...2] Motor pole pairs / Motor pole pairs
p0314[0...2] Motor pole pair number / Motor pole pair no
p0320[0...2] Motor magnetizing current / Motor magnet. cur.
r0330[0...2] Rated motor slip / Rated motor slip
r0331[0...2] Rated magnetization current / Rated magnet. cur.
r0332[0...2] Rated power factor / Rated power factor
r0333[0...2] Rated motor torque / Rated motor torque
p0335[0...2] Motor cooling / Motor cooling
p0340[0...2] Calculation of motor parameters / Calc of mot.params
p0341[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] / Inertia [kg*m^2]
p0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio / Tot/mot inert.rat.
p0344[0...2] Motor weight / Motor weight
r0345[0...2] Motor start-up time / Mot. start-up time
p0346[0...2] Magnetization time / Magnetization time
p0347[0...2] Demagnetization time / Demagnet. time
p0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line) / Stator res. (L)
p0352[0...2] Cable resistance / Cable resistance
p0354[0...2] Rotor resistance / Rotor resistance
p0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance / Stator leak.induct
p0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance / Rotor leak.induct.
p0360[0...2] Main inductance / Main inductance
p0362[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 1 / Magnet.curve flux1
p0363[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 2 / Magnet.curve flux2
p0364[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 3 / Magnet.curve flux3
p0365[0...2] Magnetizing curve flux 4 / Magnet.curve flux4
p0366[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 1 / Magnet.curve imag1
p0367[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 2 / Magnet.curve imag2
p0368[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 3 / Magnet.curve imag3
p0369[0...2] Magnetizing curve imag 4 / Magnet.curve imag4
r0370[0...2] Stator resistance [%] / Stator res. [%]
r0372[0...2] Cable resistance [%] / Cable res. [%]
r0373[0...2] Rated stator resistance [%] / Rated stat.res.[%]
r0374[0...2] Rotor resistance [%] / Rotor res. [%]
r0376[0...2] Rated rotor resistance [%] / Rated rot. res.[%]
r0377[0...2] Total leakage reactance [%] / Tot.leak.react.[%]
r0382[0...2] Main reactance [%] / Main reactance [%]
r0384[0...2] Rotor time constant / Rotor time const.
r0386[0...2] Total leakage time constant / Total leak. Tconst
p0400[0...2] Select encoder type / Select enc. type

1-292 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

p0405[0...2] Enables selection of pulse types / Enables pulse type

p0408[0...2] Encoder pulses per revolution / Enc pulses per rev
p0410[0...2] Reverses internal direction sense / Rev dir sense
p0491[0...2] Reaction on speed signal loss / Select enc. type
p0492[0...2] Allowed speed difference / Allowed speed dif
p0494[0...2] Delay speed loss reaction / Dly speed loss rec
p0500[0...2] Technological application / Techn. application
p0601[0...2] Motor temperature sensor / Motor temp. sensor
p0604[0...2] Threshold motor temperature / Thresh. mot. temp.
p0610[0...2] Motor I2t temperature reaction / I2t temp. reaction
p0621[0...2] Motor temp. ident after restart / Mot.temp ident.
p0622[0...2] Magnetizing time for temp id after start up / Magnet. t temp id
r0623[0...2] CO: Display for the identified stator resistance / Act. stator resist
p0625[0...2] Ambient motor temperature / Ambient mot. temp.
p0626[0...2] Overtemperature stator iron / Overtemp.stat.iron
p0627[0...2] Overtemperature stator winding / Overtemp.stat.wind
p0628[0...2] Overtemperature rotor winding / Overtemp.rot. wind
r0630[0...2] CO: Motor model ambient temperature / Mot. model amb. te
r0631[0...2] CO: Stator iron temperature / Stat.iron temp
r0632[0...2] CO: Stator winding temperature / Stat.wind.temp
r0633[0...2] CO: Rotor winding temperature / Rot. wind.temp
p0640[0...2] Motor overload factor [%] / Motor ovl fact [%]
p1001[0...2] Fixed frequency 1 / Fixed frequency 1
p1002[0...2] Fixed frequency 2 / Fixed frequency 2
p1003[0...2] Fixed frequency 3 / Fixed frequency 3
p1004[0...2] Fixed frequency 4 / Fixed frequency 4
p1005[0...2] Fixed frequency 5 / Fixed frequency 5
p1006[0...2] Fixed frequency 6 / Fixed frequency 6
p1007[0...2] Fixed frequency 7 / Fixed frequency 7
p1008[0...2] Fixed frequency 8 / Fixed frequency 8
p1009[0...2] Fixed frequency 9 / Fixed frequency 9
p1010[0...2] Fixed frequency 10 / Fixed frequency 10
p1011[0...2] Fixed frequency 11 / Fixed frequency 11
p1012[0...2] Fixed frequency 12 / Fixed frequency 12
p1013[0...2] Fixed frequency 13 / Fixed frequency 13
p1014[0...2] Fixed frequency 14 / Fixed frequency 14
p1015[0...2] Fixed frequency 15 / Fixed frequency 15
p1016[0...2] Fixed frequency mode / FF mode
p1031[0...2] MOP mode / MOP mode
p1040[0...2] Setpoint of the MOP / MOP setpoint
p1047[0...2] MOP ramp-up time of the RFG / MOP ramp-up time
p1048[0...2] MOP ramp-down time of the RFG / MOP rampdown time
p1058[0...2] JOG frequency / JOG frequency
p1059[0...2] JOG frequency left / JOG frequency <-
p1060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time / JOG ramp-up time
p1061[0...2] JOG ramp-down time / JOG ramp-down time
p1080[0...2] Min. frequency / Min. frequency
p1082[0...2] Max. frequency / Max. frequency
p1091[0...2] Skip frequency / Skip frequency
p1092[0...2] Skip frequency 2 / Skip frequency 2
p1093[0...2] Skip frequency 3 / Skip frequency 3
p1094[0...2] Skip frequency 4 / Skip frequency 4
p1101[0...2] Skip frequency bandwidth / Skipfreq bandwidth

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-293

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

p1120[0...2] Ramp-up time / Ramp-up time

p1121[0...2] Ramp-down time / Ramp-down time
p1130[0...2] Ramp-up initial rounding time / Ramp-up ini. Trnd
p1131[0...2] Ramp-up final rounding time / Ramp-up final Trnd
p1132[0...2] Ramp-down initial rounding time / Ramp-dwn ini. Trnd
p1133[0...2] Ramp-down final rounding time / Ramp-dwn fin. Trnd
p1134[0...2] Rounding type / Rounding type
p1135[0...2] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 ramp-dwn time
p1202[0...2] Motor-current: Flying start / Mot. cur: Flystart
p1203[0...2] Search rate: Flying start / SrchRate: Flystart
p1227[0...2] Zero speed detection monitoring time / Zero speed time
p1232[0...2] DC braking current / DC braking current
p1233[0...2] Duration of DC braking / DC brak. duration
p1234[0...2] DC braking start frequency / DC brk. start freq
p1236[0...2] Compound braking current / Compound brk. cur.
p1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller / Vdc controller
p1243[0...2] Dynamic factor of Vdc-max / Vdc-max dyn. fact.
p1245[0...2] Switch on level kin. buffering / KIB ON level
r1246[0...2] CO: Switch-on level kin buffering / KIB ON level
p1247[0...2] Dyn. factor of kinetic buffering / Dyn. factor of KIB
p1250[0...2] Gain of Vdc-controller / Gain of Vdc ctrl.
p1251[0...2] Integration time Vdc-controller / Int. time Vdc ctrl
p1252[0...2] Differential time Vdc-controller / Diff.time Vdc ctrl
p1253[0...2] Vdc-controller output limitation / Vdc ctrl outp. lim
p1256[0...2] Reaction of kinetic buffering / Reaction of KIB
p1257[0...2] Freq limit for kinetic buffering / Freq limit for KIB
p1300[0...2] Control mode / Control mode
p1310[0...2] Continuous boost / Continuous boost
p1311[0...2] Acceleration boost / Acceleration boost
p1312[0...2] Starting boost / Starting boost
p1316[0...2] Boost end frequency / Boost end freq.
p1320[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 / V/f freq. coord. 1
p1321[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 / V/f volt. coord. 1
p1322[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 / V/f freq. coord. 2
p1323[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 / V/f volt. coord. 2
p1324[0...2] Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 / V/f freq. coord. 3
p1325[0...2] Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 / V/f volt. coord. 3
p1333[0...2] Start frequency for FCC / Start freq for FCC
p1334[0...2] Slip compensation activation range / Slip c. act. range
p1335[0...2] Slip compensation / Slip compensation
p1336[0...2] Slip limit / Slip limit
p1338[0...2] Resonance damping gain V/f / Res.damp. gain V/f
p1340[0...2] Imax controller prop. gain / Imax ctrl prp gain
p1341[0...2] Imax controller integral time / Imax ctrl int time
p1345[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain / Imax volt prp gain
p1346[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time / Imax volt int time
p1350[0...2] Voltage soft start / Voltage soft start
p1400[0...2] Configuration of speed control / Config. of n-ctrl.
p1442[0...2] Filter time for act. speed / Filter time n_act.
p1452[0...2] Filter time for act.speed (SLVC) / Act.spd.filt. SLVC
p1460[0...2] Gain speed controller / Gain of n-ctrl.
p1462[0...2] Integral time speed controller / Tn of n-ctrl.
p1470[0...2] Gain speed controller (SLVC) / Gain n-ctrl (SLVC)

1-294 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

p1472[0...2] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) / Tn of n-ctrl. SLVC

p1488[0...2] Droop input source / Droop input source
p1489[0...2] Droop scaling / Droop scaling
p1496[0...2] Scaling accel. precontrol / Scal acc. prectrl.
p1499[0...2] Scaling accel. torque control / Scal acc. trq ctrl
p1520[0...2] CO: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim
p1521[0...2] CO: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim
p1525[0...2] Scaling lower torque limit / Scal. low trq. lim
p1530[0...2] Motoring power limitation / Motoring power lim
p1531[0...2] Regenerative power limitation / Regener. power lim
p1570[0...2] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint / Fval flux setp
p1574[0...2] Dynamic voltage headroom / Dyn. volt headroom
p1580[0...2] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency optimiz
p1582[0...2] Smooth time for flux setpoint / Flux setp. Tsmooth
p1596[0...2] Int. time field weak. controller / Int.time weak.ctrl
p1610[0...2] Continuous torque boost (SLVC) / Cont. torque boost
p1611[0...2] Acc. torque boost (SLVC) / Acc trq boost SLVC
p1654[0...2] Smooth time for Isq setpoint / Isq setp. Tsmooth
p1715[0...2] Gain current controller / Gain current ctrl.
p1717[0...2] Integral time current controller / Int.time cur. ctrl
p1745[0...2] Flux variance limit in stall / Flux var.lim.stall
p1750[0...2] Control word of motor model / Motor model CtrlWd
p1752[0...2] Start-freq. speed adaption (VC with encoder) / Start-freq. (VC)
p1755[0...2] Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Start-freq. (SLVC)
p1756[0...2] Hyst.-freq. motor model (SLVC) / Hyst. freq. (SLVC)
p1758[0...2] T(wait) transit to open-loop / T(wait) trans.->OL
p1759[0...2] T(wait) transit to closed-loop / T(wait) trans.->CL
p1764[0...2] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) / Kp n-adapt. (SLVC)
p1767[0...2] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) / Tn n-adapt. (SLVC)
p1780[0...2] Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption / CtrlWd Rs/Rr adapt
p1781[0...2] Tn of Rs-adaption / Tn of Rs-adaption
p1786[0...2] Tn of Xm-adaption / Tn of Xm-adaption
p1800[0...2] Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
p1803[0...2] Max. modulation / Max. modulation
p1820[0...2] Reverse output phase sequence / Rev.outp.phase seq
p1909[0...2] Ctrl. word of motor data ident. / Ctrl.mot.data id.
p2000[0...2] Reference frequency / Reference freq.
p2001[0...2] Reference voltage / Reference voltage
p2002[0...2] Reference current / Reference current
p2003[0...2] Reference torque / Reference torque
p2004[0...2] Reference power / Reference power
p2150[0...2] Hysteresis frequency f_hys / Hyst. freq. f_hys
p2151[0...2] CI: Speed setpoint for messages / n-Set for msg
p2152[0...2] Delay time of f>fmax / Delay f>fmax
p2153[0...2] Time-constant speed filter / Tconst. speed filt
p2155[0...2] Threshold frequency f_1 / Threshold freq f_1
p2156[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_1 / Delay time of f_1
p2157[0...2] Threshold frequency f_2 / Threshold freq f_2
p2158[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_2 / Delay time of f_2
p2159[0...2] Threshold frequency f_3 / Threshold freq f_3
p2160[0...2] Delay time of threshold freq f_3 / Delay time of f_3
p2161[0...2] Min. threshold for freq. setp. / Setp.min.threshold
p2162[0...2] Hysteresis freq. for overspeed / Overspd. hyst.freq

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-295

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview

p2163[0...2] Entry freq. for perm. deviation / Entry freq. deviat

p2164[0...2] Hysteresis frequency deviation / Hyster freq deviat
p2165[0...2] Delay time permitted deviation / Delay_T perm. dev.
p2166[0...2] Delay time ramp up completed / Delay_T rampUpCmpl
p2167[0...2] Switch-off frequency f_off / SwOff freq. f_off
p2168[0...2] Delay time T_off / Delay time T_off
p2170[0...2] Threshold current I_thresh / Threshold current
p2171[0...2] Delay time current / Delay time current
p2172[0...2] Threshold DC-link voltage / Vdc threshold
p2173[0...2] Delay time DC-link voltage / Vdc delay time
p2174[0...2] Torque threshold M_thresh / Torque threshold
p2176[0...2] Delay time for torque threshold / Delay time torque
p2177[0...2] Delay time for motor is blocked / Delay_T MotBlocked
p2178[0...2] Delay time for motor pulled out / Delay_T MotPullOut
p2181[0...2] Belt failure detection mode / Belt fail detect
p2182[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 1 / Belt threshold f_1
p2183[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 2 / Belt threshold f_2
p2184[0...2] Belt threshold frequency 3 / Belt threshold f_3
p2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 / Upper trq. thresh1
p2186[0...2] Lower torque threshold 1 / Lower trq. thresh1
p2187[0...2] Upper torque threshold 2 / Upper trq. thresh2
p2188[0...2] Lower torque threshold 2 / Lower trq. thresh2
p2189[0...2] Upper torque threshold 3 / Upper trq. thresh3
p2190[0...2] Lower torque threshold 3 / Lower trq. thresh3
p2192[0...2] Time delay for belt failure / Belt fail delay_T
p2201[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 1 / Fixed PID setp. 1
p2202[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 2 / Fixed PID setp. 2
p2203[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 3 / Fixed PID setp. 3
p2204[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 4 / Fixed PID setp. 4
p2205[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 5 / Fixed PID setp. 5
p2206[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 6 / Fixed PID setp. 6
p2207[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 7 / Fixed PID setp. 7
p2208[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 8 / Fixed PID setp. 8
p2209[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 9 / Fixed PID setp. 9
p2210[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 10 / Fixed PID setp. 10
p2211[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 11 / Fixed PID setp. 11
p2212[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 12 / Fixed PID setp. 12
p2213[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 13 / Fixed PID setp. 13
p2214[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 14 / Fixed PID setp. 14
p2215[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 15 / Fixed PID setp. 15
p2216[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint mode / Fix.PID Mode
p2231[0...2] PID-MOP mode / PID-MOP mode.
p2240[0...2] Setpoint of PID-MOP / Setp. of PID-MOP
p2247[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-up time of the RFG / PMOP ramp-up time
p2248[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-down time of the RFG / PMOP rampdown time
p2470[0...2] Encoder speed scaling factor / Encod speed scal
p2481[0...2] Gearbox ratio input / Gearbox ratio in
p2482[0...2] Gearbox ratio output / Gearbox ratio out
p2484[0...2] No. of shaft turns = 1 Unit / Position ref. unit
p2487[0...2] Positional error trim value / Positional trim / Positional error
p2488[0...2] Distance / No. of revolutions / Distance / No. rev

1-296 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4.1 Binector Input Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

p0731[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 0 / Fct. of DO0
p0732[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 1 / Fct. of DO1
p0733[0...2] BI: Function of digital output 2 / Fct. of DO2
p0800[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 0 / Dwnl.par.set 0
p0801[0...2] BI: Download parameter set 1 / Dwnl.par.set 1
p0806 BI: Inhibit panel access / Inhibit panel acce
p0810 BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) / CDS bit 0
p0811 BI: CDS bit 1 / CDS bit 1
p0820 BI: DDS bit 0 / DDS bit 0
p0821 BI: DDS bit 1 / DDS bit 1
p0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
p0842[0...2] BI: ON reverse/OFF1 / ON reverse/OFF1
p0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
p0845[0...2] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
p0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
p0849[0...2] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
p0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable / Pulse enable
p1020[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 / FF sel. Bit 0
p1021[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 1 / FF sel. Bit 1
p1022[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 / FF sel. Bit 2
p1023[0...2] BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 3 / FF sel. Bit 3
p1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) / Enable MOP(UP)
p1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) / Enable MOP(DWN)
p1041[0...2] BI: MOP select setpoint automatically/manually / Setp. auto/manu
p1043[0...2] BI: MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / MOP acc RFG setpo
p1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right / Enable JOG ->
p1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left / Enable JOG <-
p1074[0...2] BI: Disable additional setpoint / Disab.add.setp
p1110[0...2] BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint / Inh. neg. setp
p1113[0...2] BI: Reverse / Reverse
p1124[0...2] BI: Enable JOG ramp times / Enable JOG ramp
p1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable / RFG enable
p1141[0...2] BI: RFG start / RFG start
p1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint / RFG enable setp
p1218[0...2] BI: MHB override / MHB override
p1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking / Enable DC brk.
p1477[0...2] BI: Set integrator of n-ctrl. / Set integrator
p1492[0...2] BI: Enable droop / Enable droop
p1501[0...2] BI: Change to torque control / Change > torq ctrl
p2103[0...2] BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement / 1. Faults ackn
p2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement / 2. Faults ackn
p2106[0...2] BI: External fault / External fault
p2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller / Enab. PID ctrl
p2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 / PID setp->Bit 0
p2221[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1 / PID setp->Bit 1

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-297

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

p2222[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 / PID setp->Bit 2

p2223[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 / PID setp->Bit 3
p2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) / PID-MOP (UP)
p2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) / PID-MOP (DWN)
p2241[0...2] BI: PID-MOP select setpoint auto/manu / Setp. auto/manu
p2243[0...2] BI: PID-MOP accept rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP acc RFG setpo
p2480[0...2] BI: Enable positioning ramp down / Enable positioning
p2810[0...1] BI: AND 1 / AND 1
p2812[0...1] BI: AND 2 / AND 2
p2814[0...1] BI: AND 3 / AND 3
p2816[0...1] BI: OR 1 / OR 1
p2818[0...1] BI: OR 2 / OR 2
p2820[0...1] BI: OR 3 / OR 3
p2822[0...1] BI: XOR 1 / XOR 1
p2824[0...1] BI: XOR 2 / XOR 2
p2826[0...1] BI: XOR 3 / XOR 3
p2828 BI: NOT 1 / NOT 1
p2830 BI: NOT 2 / NOT 2
p2832 BI: NOT 3 / NOT 3
p2834[0...3] BI: D-FF 1 / D-FF 1
p2837[0...3] BI: D-FF 2 / D-FF 2
p2840[0...1] BI: RS-FF 1 / RS-FF 1
p2843[0...1] BI: RS-FF 2 / RS-FF 2
p2846[0...1] BI: RS-FF 3 / RS-FF 3
p2849 BI: Timer 1 / Timer 1
p2854 BI: Timer 2 / Timer 2
p2859 BI: Timer 3 / Timer 3
p2864 BI: Timer 4 / Timer 4
p2940 BI: Release Wobble function / Rel Wobble

1-298 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4.2 Connector Input Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

p0095[0...9] CI: Display PZD signals / PZD signals
p0771[0...1] CI: AO / AO
p1042[0...2] CI: MOP auto setpoint / MOP auto setpoint
p1044[0...2] CI: MOP rampgenerator setpoint / MOP RFG setpoint
p1070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...2] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1075[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint / Add. setpoint
p1076[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint scaling / Add. setp.scal
p1330[0...2] CI: Voltage setpoint / Voltage setp.
p1478[0...2] CI: Set integrator value n-ctrl. / Set int. value
p1503[0...2] CI: Torque setpoint / Torque setp.
p1511[0...2] CI: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp
p1522[0...2] CI: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim
p1523[0...2] CI: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim
p2016[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS232 / PZD->USS
p2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS on RS485 (USS) / PZD->COM (USS)
p2051[0...7] CI: PZD to Fieldbus / PZD to FB
p2151[0...2] CI: Speed setpoint for messages / n-Set for msg
p2242[0...2] CI: PID-MOP auto setpoint / PMOP auto setpoint
p2244[0...2] CI: PID-MOP rampgenerator setpoint / PMOP RFG setpoint
p2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint / PID setpoint
p2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source / PID trim source
p2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback / PID feedback
p2869[0...1] CI: ADD 1 / ADD 1
p2871[0...1] CI: ADD 2 / ADD 2
p2873[0...1] CI: SUB 1 / SUB 1
p2875[0...1] CI: SUB 2 / SUB 2
p2877[0...1] CI: MUL 1 / MUL 1
p2879[0...1] CI: MUL 2 / MUL 2
p2881[0...1] CI: DIV 1 / DIV 1
p2883[0...1] CI: DIV 2 / DIV 2
p2885[0...1] CI: CMP 1 / CMP 1
p2887[0...1] CI: CMP 2 / CMP 2
p8851[0...7] CI: PZD to Fieldbus / PZD to FB

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-299

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4.3 Binector Output Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

r0807.0 BO: Displays client access / Displays client ac
r1025.0 BO: Fixed frequency status / FF Status
r2032.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd1 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd1 <- USS
r2033.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS232 / CtrlWd2 <- USS
r2036.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd1 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd 1 <- COM
r2037.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS) / CtrlWd2 <- COM
r2090.0...15 BO: Control word 1 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd1 <- FB
r2091.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB
r2225.0 BO: PID Fixed frequency status / PID FF Status
r2811.0 BO: AND 1 / AND 1
r2813.0 BO: AND 2 / AND 2
r2815.0 BO: AND 3 / AND 3
r2817.0 BO: OR 1 / OR 1
r2819.0 BO: OR 2 / OR 2
r2821.0 BO: OR 3 / OR 3
r2823.0 BO: XOR 1 / XOR 1
r2825.0 BO: XOR 2 / XOR 2
r2827.0 BO: XOR 3 / XOR 3
r2829.0 BO: NOT 1 / NOT 1
r2831.0 BO: NOT 2 / NOT 2
r2833.0 BO: NOT 3 / NOT 3
r2835.0 BO: Q D-FF 1 / Q D-FF 1
r2836.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 1 / NOT-Q D-FF 1
r2838.0 BO: Q D-FF 2 / Q D-FF 2
r2839.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 2 / NOT-Q D-FF 2
r2841.0 BO: Q RS-FF 1 / Q RS-FF 1
r2842.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 1 / NOT-Q RS-FF 1
r2844.0 BO: Q RS-FF 2 / Q RS-FF 2
r2845.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 2 / NOT-Q RS-FF 2
r2847.0 BO: Q RS-FF 3 / Q RS-FF 3
r2848.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 3 / NOT-Q RS-FF 3
r2852.0 BO: Timer 1 / Timer 1
r2853.0 BO: Nout timer 1 / Nout timer 1
r2857.0 BO: Timer 2 / Timer 2
r2858.0 BO: Nout timer 2 / Nout timer 2
r2862.0 BO: Timer 3 / Timer 3
r2863.0 BO: Nout timer 3 / Nout timer 3
r2867.0 BO: Timer 4 / Timer 4
r2868.0 BO: Nout timer 4 / Nout timer 4
r2886.0 BO: CMP 1 / CMP 1
r2888.0 BO: CMP 2 / CMP 2
r8890.0...15 BO: Control word 1 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd1 <- FB
r8891.0...15 BO: Control word 2 from Fieldbus / CtrlWd2 <- FB

1-300 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4.4 Connector Output Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG
r0021 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt. freq.
r0024 CO: Act. filt. output frequency / Act. outp. freq
r0025 CO: Act. output voltage / Act.outp. volt
r0026[0...1] CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. / Act. fil. Vdc
r0027 CO: Act. output current / Act. outp. cur
r0029 CO: Flux gen. current / Flux gen. cur.
r0030 CO: Torque gen. current / Torque gen.cur
r0031 CO: Act. filtered torque / Act fil torque
r0032 CO: Act. filtered power / Act fil. power
r0035[0...2] CO: Act. motor temperature / Act. mot.temp.
r0036 CO: Inverter overload utilization / Invert ovl util
r0037[0...1] CO: Inverter temperature [°C] / Inverter temp.
r0038 CO: Fil. power factor / Fil.power fact
r0039 CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kWh] / Energy meter
r0051[0...1] CO: Active Drive Dataset (DDS) / Active DDS
r0061 CO: Act. rotor speed / Act rotor speed
r0062 CO: Freq. setpoint / Freq. setpoint
r0063 CO: Act. frequency / Act. frequency
r0064 CO: Dev. frequency controller / Dev. freq ctrl
r0065 CO: Slip frequency / Slip frequency
r0066 CO: Act. output frequency / Act. outp freq
r0067 CO: Act. output current limit / Outp cur limit
r0068 CO: Output current / Output current
r0069[0...5] CO: Act. phase currents / Act. phase cur
r0070 CO: Act. DC-link voltage / Act. Vdc
r0071 CO: Max. output voltage / Max. outp.volt
r0072 CO: Act. output voltage / Act. outp.volt
r0074 CO: Act. modulation / Act modulation
r0075 CO: Current setpoint Isd / Cur. setp. Isd
r0076 CO: Act. current Isd / Act. cur. Isd
r0077 CO: Current setpoint Isq / Cur. setp. Isq
r0078 CO: Act. current Isq / Act. cur. Isq
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint (total) / Total trq setp
r0080 CO: Act. torque / Act. torque
r0084 CO: Act. air gap flux / Air gap flux
r0085 CO: Act. re-active current / Act.re-active cur
r0086 CO: Act. active current / Act.active cur
r0087 CO: Act. power factor / Act.power fact
r0090 CO: Act. rotor angle / Act rotor angle
r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transf. angle
r0394 CO: Stator resistance IGBT [%] / Stat. res.IGBT
r0395 CO: Total stator resistance [%] / Total stat.res
r0396 CO: Act. rotor resistance / Act rotor res.
r0485 CO: Encoder counter value / Encoder count val.
r0623[0...2] CO: Display for the identified stator resistance / Act. stator resist
r0630[0...2] CO: Motor model ambient temperature / Mot. model amb. te
r0631[0...2] CO: Stator iron temperature / Stat.iron temp
r0632[0...2] CO: Stator winding temperature / Stat.wind.temp

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-301

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

r0633[0...2] CO: Rotor winding temperature / Rot. wind.temp

r0755[0...1] CO: Act. AI after scal. [4000h] / CO:AI scal[4000h]
r0947[0...63] CO: Last fault code / Last fault code
r0949[0...63] CO: Fault value / Fault value
r1024 CO: Act. fixed frequency / Act. FF
r1045 CO: MOP input frequency of the RFG / MOP RFG input
r1050 CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP / MOP outp.freq.
r1078 CO: Total frequency setpoint / Tot. freq.setp
r1079 CO: Selected frequency setpoint / Sel. freq.setp
r1114 CO: Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl. / Setp<-dir.ctrl.
r1119 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG / Setp before RFG
r1170 CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG / Setp. after RFG
r1242 CO: Switch-on level of Vdc-max / Vdc-max ON lev
r1246[0...2] CO: Switch-on level kin buffering / KIB ON level
r1315 CO: Total boost voltage / Total boost V
r1337 CO: V/f slip frequency / V/f slip freq.
r1343 CO: Imax controller freq. output / Imax ctrl Foutp
r1344 CO: Imax controller volt. output / Imax ctrl Voutp
r1438 CO: Freq. setpoint to controller / Freq. setp ctl
r1445 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt freq
r1482 CO: Integral output of n-ctrl. / Int.outp n-ctrl
r1490 CO: Droop frequency / Droop freq.
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint / Torque setp.
r1515 CO: Additional torque setpoint / Add. trq. setp
r1518 CO: Acceleration torque / Accel. torque
p1520[0...2] CO: Upper torque limit / Upper trq. lim
p1521[0...2] CO: Lower torque limit / Lower trq. lim
r1526 CO: Upper torque limitation / Upper trq. lim
r1527 CO: Lower torque limitation / Lower trq. lim
r1536 CO: Max. trq. motoring current / Max trq mot cur
r1537 CO: Max trq regenerative current / Max trq reg cur
r1538 CO: Upper torque limit (total) / Total up TrqLim
r1539 CO: Lower torque limit (total) / Total lw TrqLim
p1570[0...2] CO: Fixed value flux setpoint / Fval flux setp
r1583 CO: Flux setpoint (smoothed) / Smoothed setp.
r1597 CO: Outp. field weak. controller / Outp.weak. ctrl
r1598 CO: Flux setpoint (total) / Total flux setp
r1718 CO: Output of Isq controller / Outp. Isq ctrl
r1719 CO: Integral output of Isq ctrl. / Int. outp. Isq
r1723 CO: Output of Isd controller / Outp. Isd ctrl
r1724 CO: Integral output of Isd ctrl. / Int. outp. Isd
r1725 CO: Integral limit of Isd ctrl. / Int. limit Isd
r1728 CO: Decoupling voltage / Decoupl. volt
r1746 CO: Actual flux variance / Act. flux variance
r1770 CO: Prop. output of n-adaption / Prop outp n-ad
r1771 CO: Int. output of n-adaption / Int. outp n-ad
r1778 CO: Flux angle difference / Flux angle diff
r1782 CO: Output of Rs-adaptation / Output Rs-adaption
r1787 CO: Output of Xm-adaption / Outp. Xm-adaption
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
r2015[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS232 / PZD<-USS
r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS on RS485 / PZD<-COM(USS)
r2050[0...7] CO: PZD from Fieldbus / PZD from FB

1-302 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

r2059[0...4] CO: Displays SOL link stats for Sol Master. / Disp SOL stats
r2110[0...3] CO: Warning number / Warning number
r2131 CO: Last fault number code / Last fault code
r2132 CO: First warning number code / First warning code
r2169 CO: Act. filtered frequency / Act. filt. freq
r2224 CO: Act. fixed PID setpoint / Fixed.PID setp
r2245 CO: PID-MOP input frequency of the RFG / PMOP RFG input
r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP / PMOP outp. setp
r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG / PID setp <-RFG
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG / Filt. PID setp
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback / PID filt.fdbck
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback / PID scal fdbck
r2273 CO: PID error / PID error
r2294 CO: Act. PID output / Act.PID output
r2477 CO: Act. scaled encoder speed / Act scal enc speed
r2478 CO: Act. scaled encoder frequency / Act scal enc freq
r2489[0...2] CO: Tracking parameter / Track / Tracking parameter
r2870 CO: ADD 1 / ADD 1
r2872 CO: ADD 2 / ADD 2
r2874 CO: SUB 1 / SUB 1
r2876 CO: SUB 2 / SUB 2
r2878 CO: MUL 1 / MUL 1
r2880 CO: MUL 2 / MUL 2
r2882 CO: DIV 1 / DIV 1
r2884 CO: DIV 2 / DIV 2
p2889 CO: Fixed setpoint 1 in [%] / Fixed setp 1 %
p2890 CO: Fixed setpoint 2 in [%] / Fixed setp 2 %
r2955 CO: Wobble signal output / Wobble output
r8850[0...7] CO: PZD from Fieldbus / PZD from FB
r9660 CO: SI remain time until forc dynam / SI remaining time

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-303

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters

1.4.5 Connector/Binector Output Parameters

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

r0019.0...14 CO/BO: BOP control word / BOP CtrlWd
r0050 CO/BO: Active Command Dataset / Active CDS
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 / Act StatWd1
r0053.0...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 / Act StatWd2
r0053.1...15 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 / Act StatWd2
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Act. control word 1 / Act CtrlWd1
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Act. control word 2 / Act CtrlWd2
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status of motor control / Stat MotCtrl
r0056.0...13 CO/BO: Status of motor control / Stat MotCtrl
r0403.0...4 CO/BO: Encoder status word / Enc. StatWd
r0722.0...12 CO/BO: Binary input values / Bin.inp.val
r0747.0...2 CO/BO: State of digital outputs / State DOs
r0751.0...9 CO/BO: Status word of AI / AI status Wd
r0785.0...1 CO/BO: Status word of AO / AO stat Wd
r1407.0...15 CO/BO: Status 2 of motor control / Stat 2 ctrl
r1751.0...15 CO/BO: Status word of motor model / Motor model StatWd
r2197.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word 1 / Monitor Wd1
r2198.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word 2 / Monitor Wd2
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: Fault Bit Array / Fault Bit Array
r9771.0...1 CO/BO: SI hardware functions / SI hw functions
r9772.0...15 CO/BO: SI status word / SI StatWd

1-304 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

1.5 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

The following parameters are necessary for quick commissioning (P0010 = 1).
.
Table 1-2 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

Par.-No. Name Access level Can be

changed

P0100 Europe / North America 1 C

P0205 Inverter application 3 C
P0230 Output filter 1 C
P0233 Filter inductance 1 C
P0234 Filter capacity 1 C
P0300 Select motor type 2 C
P0304 Rated motor voltage 1 C
P0305 Rated motor current 1 C
P0307 Rated motor power 1 C
P0308 Rated motor cosPhi 1 C
P0309 Rated motor efficiency 1 C
P0310 Rated motor frequency 1 C
P0311 Rated motor speed 1 C
P0314 Motor pole pair number 3 C
P0320 Motor magnetizing current 3 CT
P0335 Motor cooling 2 CT
P0400 Select encoder type 2 CT
P0408 Encoder pulses per revolution 2 CT
P0500 Technological application 3 CT
P0625 Ambiant motor temperature 3 CUT
P0640 Motor overload factor [%] 2 CUT
P0700 Selection of command source 1 CT
P0727 Selection of 2/3-wire method 2 CT

P1000 Selection of frequency setpoint 1 CT

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 1-305

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Parameters
Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

Table 1-2 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

Par.-No. Name Access level Can be

changed

P1080 Min. frequency 1 CUT

P1082 Max. frequency 1 CT
P1120 Ramp-up time 1 CUT
P1121 Ramp-down time 1 CUT
P1135 OFF3 ramp-down time 2 CUT
P1300 Control mode 2 CT
P1500 Selection of torque setpoint 2 CT
P1900 Select motor data identification 2 CT
P1960 Speed control optimisation 3 CT
P3900 End of quick commissioning 1 C

When P0010 = 1 is chosen, P0003 (user access level) can be used to select the parameters
to be accessed. This parameter also allows selection of a user-defined parameter list.
At the end of the quick commissioning sequence, set P3900 = 1 to carry out the necessary
motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included in P0010 = 1) to their default
settings.

Note
This applies only in Quick Commissioning mode.

1-306 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Function diagrams 2
Contents

2.1 Contents: function diagrams 2-308

2.2 Symbols in function diagrams 2-310

2.3 Overview 2-312

2.4 External Interfaces 2-315

2.5 Internal Setpoint Source 2-328

2.6 Technology Functions 2-335

2.7 Free Function Blocks 2-347

2.8 Setpoint Channel 2-352

2.9 V/f Control 2-358

2.10 Vector Control 2-361

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-307

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Function diagrams
Contents: function diagrams

2.1 Contents: function diagrams

2.2 Symbols in function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310

0010 – Symbols in function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311

2.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312

1100 – General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-313
1200 – Connection of External and Internal Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-314

2.4 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-315

2000 – Digital Inputs (DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-316
2100 – Digital Outputs (DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-317
2200 – Analog Input (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-318
2300 – Analog Output (AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-319
2400 – Basic Operator Panel (BOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320
2500 – USS on RS232, Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-321
2510 – USS on RS232, Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-322
2600 – USS on RS485, Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-323
2610 – USS on RS485, Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-324
2700 – Fieldbus, Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-325
2710 – Fieldbus, Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-326
2800 – Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-327

2.5 Internal Setpoint Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328

3100 – Motor Potentiometer (MOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
3200 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection (P1016 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-330
3210 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection (P1016 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-331
3300 – Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection (P2216 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332
3310 – Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection (P2216 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-333
3400 – PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-334

2.6 Technology Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-335

4100 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 00 - 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336
4110 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 05 - 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-337
4115 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 09 - 10) (only PM240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-338
4120 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 00 - 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-339
4130 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 04 - 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-340
4140 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 09 - 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-341

2-308 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Function diagrams
Contents: function diagrams

4150 – Control word 1 (r0054) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342

4160 – Control word 2 (r0055) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-343
4170 – Status word 1 (r0052) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-344
4180 – Status word 2 (r0053) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345
4600 – Vdc Control (max, min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-346

2.7 Free Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-347

4800 – AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-348
4810 – FlipFlops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-349
4820 – Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-350
4830 – Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers, Comparators, Setting in % . . . . . . . 2-351

2.8 Setpoint Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352

5000 – Setpoint channel and Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-353
5100 – PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-354
5150 – Wobble Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-355
5200 – Additional Frequency Modifications (AFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-356
5300 – Ramp Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-357

2.9 V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358

6100 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-359
6200 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM250/PM260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-360

2.10 Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-361

7000 – Overview of Speed Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0 2-362
7010 – Overview of Speed Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0 . . . . 2-363
7200 – Overview of Torque Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 22/20 & P1501 = 1 2-364
7210 – Overview of Torque Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 23/21 & P1501 = 1 . 2-365
7500 – Speed Controller without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0 . . . . . . . . 2-366
7510 – Speed Controller with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367
7700 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation without Encoder (SLVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-368
7710 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation with Encoder (VC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-369
7800 – Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-370
7900 – Current Controller & Observer Model without Encoder (SLVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-371
7910 – Current Controller & Observer Model with Encoder (VC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-372
8000 – Analog outputs and display values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-373

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-309

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Function diagrams
Symbols in function diagrams

2.2 Symbols in function diagrams

Function diagrams

0010 – Symbols in function diagrams 2-311

2-310 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Fig. 2-1
Explanation of symbols used in the function diagrams
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Setting parameters
Summation
ParName Parameter text Filter element
Min ... Max [Dim] Minimum ... Maximum value [Unit] Multiplication
PNumber.C/D [3] (Default) Parameter number.Command/Drive data set [Number indexes] (Default)
x
0010 – Symbols in function diagrams

y Division
Gain element
1
Monitoring parameters
Switch y
ParName [Dim] Parameter text [Unit]
0
PNumber.C/D [3] Parameter number.Command/Drive data set [Number indexes]
x
00 Integrator
01
10
Selection switch (1 out of 4)
BICO parameters
11 Kp Tn
Binector input (Setting parameter)
ParName [Dim] Parameter text [Unit] T 0 PI controller
PNum.C/D Parameter number.Command/Drive data set ON delay
(Default) (Default)
0 T
Binector output (Monitoring parameter) OFF delay
ParName Parameter text
Differentiator
PNum Parameter number

Connector input (Setting parameter) AND gate

ParName Parameter text
PNum.C/D [3] Parameter number.Command/Drive data set [Number indexes] Limitation
(Default) (Default) OR gate
Connector output (Monitoring parameter)
ParName [Hz] Parameter text [Unit]
PNum [3] Parameter number [Number indexes] XOR gate Limitation

Connector/Binector output (Monitoring parameter)

ParName

Symbols in function diagrams

Parameter text
NOT gate Characteristic
PNum Parameter number
PNum
NOT gate

A 1

Function diagrams
A/D converter Hysteresis
D 0

{
Sheet 2300 Details refer to sheet 2300
D
Reference signal between D/A converter
1 function diagrams A
2-311

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0010_Symbols.vsd Function diagram
- 10 -
Symbols in function diagrams 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Overview

2.3 Overview

Function plans

1100 – General Overview 2-313

1200 – Connection of External and Internal Setpoints 2-314

2-312 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Fig. 2-2
External Internal Technology Setpoint channel Motor control Modulator
interfaces setpoint source functions
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

2000 4100 - 4180

DI JOG Monitoring
1100 – General Overview

Status-/Control word

2100 5000 5200 5300 6100

DO Braking 6200
3100 V/f control
MOP
2200
AI Restart 5000
SUM setpoint 7800 7900
Flux setpoint

2300 3200 Current

FF Flying Restart 7500 - 7700

SUM/JOG
selection
AO 5100 control

AFM

RFG
Speed / torque

MOD
PID controller control
4600
2400 Vdc Control
BOP
3300 5150 7900
Fixed Wobble
PID setpoint Generator
4600 Motor model
2500 - 2510
Vdc_min Control
USS on RS232 (KIB)

2600 - 2610 PID 3400 Positioning Motor identification

USS on RS485 MOP ramp down

4800 - 4830
2700 - 2710 Free function Motor and inverter protection, Adaption of motor parameters
Fieldbus blocks

2800
Encoder Sequence control

Function diagrams
Parameterization

Overview
2-313

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 1100_Overview.vsd Function diagram
- 1100 -
General Overview 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Bin.inp.val Enable JOG -> JOG Enable
r0722 P1055.CDS 0000 bin ... 0001 bin

Fig. 2-3
DI P1057 (0001 bin) 0
r0722 (0)
1
2-314

Overview
Function diagrams
Enable JOG <-
Fct. of DO0
P1056.CDS 0
P0731.CDS Add. Setpoint 1
(0)
DO (52.3)
P1075.CDS JOG frequency ON/OFF1
Enable MOP(UP) (0) 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P0840.CDS
1200 – Connection of External and Internal Setpoints

P1035.CDS P1058.DDS (5.00)

CO:AI scal[4000h] Add. setp.scal (722.0)
(19.13) MOP outp.freq. [Hz] JOG frequency <-
AI r0755 2 P1076.CDS ON reverse/OFF1
Enable MOP(DWN) MOP r1050 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
(1)
P1059.DDS (5.00) P0842.CDS
AO P1036.CDS Disab.add.setp (0)
(19.14) SUM SUM/JOG
P0771 [2] P1074.CDS 1. OFF2
selection
AO (21[0]) (0)
FF sel. Bit 0 P0844.CDS
Tot. freq.setp [Hz]
P1020.CDS Main setp scal (1)
BOP CtrlWd (722.3) r1078
P1071.CDS 2. OFF2
r0019 FF sel. Bit 1 (1) AFM
BOP 0 P0845.CDS
r0019 Main setpoint RFG
P1021.CDS (19.1)
PZD<-COM(USS) (722.4) P1070.CDS V/f
Act. FF [Hz] 0 1 FOC Sequence
r2018 8 FF (755[0])
FF sel. Bit 2 r1024 0 Imax contr. 1. OFF3 control
CtrlWd 1 <- COM 0 .
P1022.CDS P0848.CDS
r2036 .
(722.5) 1 Inh. neg. setp . (1)
USS CtrlWd2 <- COM FF sel. Bit 3 2. OFF3
on RS485 P1110.CDS
r2037 P1023.CDS Act.PID output [%] P0849.CDS
(0)
PZD->COM (USS) (0) PID setpoint r2294 (1)
Reverse
P2253.CDS
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

P2019 [8] Pulse enable

PID setp->Bit 0 (0) P1113.CDS
(0)
PID (722.1) P0852.CDS
PZD from FB P2220.CDS PID trim source controller (1)
(722.3) RFG enable
r2050 8 P2254.CDS
PID setp->Bit 1 P1140.CDS
CtrlWd1 <- FB (0)
(1)
r2090 P2221.CDS .
PID feedback
CtrlWd2 <- FB (722.4) Fixed.PID setp [%] .
Fieldbus FF P2264.CDS . Act StatWd1
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

r2091 PID setp->Bit 2 r2224

PID (755[0]) r0052
PZD to FB P2222.CDS r0052
(722.5) Enab. PID ctrl
P2051 [8] Act StatWd2
P2200.CDS
(0) PID setp->Bit 3
(0) r0053
PZD<-USS P2223.CDS r0053
r2015 8 (0) Act CtrlWd1
CtrlWd1 <- USS r0054
PID-MOP (UP)
r2032 r0054
P2235.CDS
USS CtrlWd2 <- USS Act CtrlWd2
(19.13) PMOP outp. setp [%]
on RS232 r2033 PID r0055
PID-MOP (DWN) r2250
PZD->USS MOP r0055
P2016 [8]
P2236.CDS .
(19.14) .
(0) .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 1200_BICO_Overv.vsd Function diagram
- 1200 -
Connection of External and Internal Setpoints 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
External Interfaces

2.4 External Interfaces

Function diagrams

2000 – Digital Inputs (DI) 2-316

2100 – Digital Outputs (DO) 2-317

2200 – Analog Input (AI) 2-318

2300 – Analog Output (AO) 2-319

2400 – Basic Operator Panel (BOP) 2-320

2500 – USS on RS232, Receiving 2-321

2510 – USS on RS232, Transmitting 2-322

2600 – USS on RS485, Receiving 2-323

2610 – USS on RS485, Transmitting 2-324

2700 – Fieldbus, Receiving 2-325

2710 – Fieldbus, Transmitting 2-326

2800 – Encoder evaluation 2-327

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-315

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Fig. 2-4
2-316

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
2000 – Digital Inputs (DI)

P24 Debounce time: DI

(KL9) 0 ... 3
P0724 (3)

24 V
KL5 T 0 Bin.inp.val
r0722
r0722 .0
r0722 .1
0V
.
Debounce time: DI .
0 ... 3 .
P0724 (3)

24 V
KL6 T 0
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

0V

.
.
.
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2000_Digital_In.vsd Function diagram
- 2000 -
Digital Inputs (DI) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-5
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Invert DOs
- ... -
P0748 (0000 bin) State DOs
2100 – Digital Outputs (DO)

r0747
Fct. of DO0 r0747 .0
P0731.CDS 0
(52.3)
1
-1 COM
Kl.20
NO
Kl.19
NC
Kl.18

Invert DOs
- ... -
P0748 (0000 bin) State DOs
r0747
Fct. of DO1 r0747.1
P0732.CDS 0
(52.7)
2
-1 COM
Kl.22
NO
Kl.21

Invert DOs
- ... -
P0748 (0000 bin) State DOs
r0747
Fct. of DO2 r0747 .2
P0733.CDS 0
(0)
4
-1 COM
Kl.25
NO
Kl.24
NC
Kl.23

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
2-317

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2100_Digital_Out.vsd Function diagram
- 2100 -
Digital Outputs (DO) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-6
2-318

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
Type of AI Value x1:AI scal. Value x2:AI scal. AI deadband width
0 ... 4 -20 ... 20 -20 ... 20 0 ... 20
P0756 [2] (0) P0757 [2] (0) P0759 [2] (10) P0761 [2] (0)
2200 – Analog Input (AI)

100 %

ASPmax 4000 h
Value y2:AI scal. AI after scal.[%] [%]
Type of AI -99999.9 ... 99999.9 [%]

10 V or 20 mA
Smooth time AI r0754 [2]
0 ... 4 P0760 [2] (100.0) y2
0 ... 10000 [ms]
P0756 [2] (0)
P0753 [2] (3) Value y1:AI scal.
-99999.9 ... 99999.9 [%] y1
P0758 [2] (0.0)
V CO:AI scal[4000h]
A Switching xd x1 x2 10 V x100% mA
bipolar r0755 2
ASPmin 20 mA
unipolar
D

Analog input

Digit
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Act.AI inp.[V/mA]
Volts or r0752 [2]
mA

Type of AI Delay on sig. loss

0 ... 4 0 ... 10000 [ms] AI status Wd
P0756 [2] (0) 50 % of P0761
P0762 [2] (10) r0751
r0751
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

T Warning, signal lost

(F0080)
1,3

Bin.inp.val
1
r0722
r0722 .5
0
1.7 3.9 V r0722 .9
r0722 .10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2200_Analog_In.vsd Function diagram
- 2200 -
Analog Input (AI) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-7
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Type of AO AO deadband width

0 ... 1 0 ... 20
2300 – Analog Output (AO)

P0776 [2] (0) P0781 [2] (0)

Value x1:AO scal. Value x2:AO scal.
-99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%] -99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%]
P0777 [2] (0.0) P0779 [2] (100.0)

mA

y100%

20 mA 4000 h 20 mA

Value y2:AO scal.

0 ... 20 y2 Act.AO val.[V/mA]
Smooth time AO P0780 [2] (20) r0774 [2]
Enable ab. value
0 ... 1000 [ms] Value y1:AO scal.
0 ... 65535
P0773 [2] (2) 0 ... 20 y1
P0775 [2] (0)
P0778 [2] (0) Analog output
AO P0781
P0771 [2] D
x(t)
(21[0]) %
x1 x2 x20mA 100 %
A

AO stat Wd
r0785
1
r0785
0

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
2-319

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2300_Analog_Out.vsd Function diagram
- 2300 -
Analog Output (AO) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Operating display (r0000) Note:
selected and operation=1 Activation of the raise and lower keys is only effective if the operating display (r0000)

Fig. 2-8
of sequence control is selected, a changeover to the value display has taken place with the toggle key and the
unit is in the "Operation" status.
2-320

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
BOP CtrlWd
0 0
r0019 Raise motor potentio-
5V r0019 .D meter from BOP
1
BOP CtrlWd
0 0
r0019 Lower motor poten-
2400 – Basic Operator Panel (BOP)

5V r0019 .E tiometer from BOP

1

Fn
5V Toggle key to operating
FN system,
Basic Operator Panel BOP fault acknowledgement
P
5V
P Access parameters

Actuation of seven-
segment display
Seven-segment display
BOP CtrlWd
Raise key r0019
SET Positive direction of
Toggle key (Q=1) Q r0019 .B rotation from BOP
Reversing key
ON key POWER ON
5V
RESET
Priority
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

(Q=0) Q
1 RESET
OFF key 2 SET
JOG key
Program key
Lower key

JOG
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

BOP CtrlWd
Set command
I SET r0019
Q r0019 .0
5V (Q=1) ON/OFF1
I r0019 .1 OFF2
from BOP
O
RESET Priority
5V
O Reset command (Q=0) Q 1 RESET
2 SET

POWER ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2400_BOP.vsd Function diagram
- 2400 -
Basic Operator Panel (BOP) 02.04.2007 V3.0 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-9
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop
Bit03 Pulse enable
RxD Receive telegram Receive Bit04 RFG enable
2500 – USS on RS232, Receiving

Bit05 RFG start

PZD PKW Bit06 Setpoint enable
BCC PKW ADR LGE STX CtrlWd1 <- USS
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2032 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2015 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
0
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
1 [1] Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up
2 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down
3 [3] Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)
4 [4]
5 [5] Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1
6 [6] Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2
7 [7] CtrlWd2 <- USS Bit03 Fixed frequency Bit 3
r2033 Bit04 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Change par. via Bit05 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Bit2 = 1 - ... - Bit08 PID enabled
P0927 (1111 bin) Bit09 DC brake enabled
Bit11 Droop
USS baudrate Bit12 Torque control
4 ... 12 Bit13 External fault 1
P2010 [2] (8) Bit15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1

Note:
USS address Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
0 ... 31 telegram received via USS so that the converter
P2011 [2] (0) will accept the process data as
USS
configuration being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
USS PZD length must be transferred to the converter in the first
All parameters:
0 ... 8 PZD word.
Index = 1
P2012 [2] (2)
=> RS232

USS PKW length

0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

External Interfaces
USS telegram T_off

Function diagrams
0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)
2-321

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2500_USSon232.vsd Function diagram
- 2500 -
USS on RS232, Receiving 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-10 Bit00 Drive ready
2-322

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit Transmit telegram TxD
2510 – USS on RS232, Transmitting

Bit06 ON inhibit active PKW

Bit07 Drive warning active Act StatWd1
PZD
Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value r0052 BCC PKW ADR LGE STX
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit09 PZD control r0052 PZD
Bit10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) P2016
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit Act. filt. freq. [Hz] [0] 0
Bit12 Brake open r0021 [1] 1
Bit13 Motor overload
[2] 2
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 3
[4] 4
Bit00 DC brake active
[5] 5
Bit01 |f_act|. > P2167 (f_off)
Bit02 |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) [6] 6
Bit03 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Act StatWd2 [7] 7
Bit04 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) r0053
Bit05 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) r0053
Bit06 f_act >= setpoint
Bit07 Act. Vdc < P2172 Note: Change par. via
P2016[0] = 52 Bit2 = 1 - ... -
Bit08 Act. Vdc > P2172
Bit09 Ramping finished P2016[1] = 21 P0927 (1111 bin)
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) P2016[3] = 53
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) are default settings
USS baudrate
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Bit14 Download data set 0 from OP 4 ... 12

Bit15 Download data set 1 from OP P2010 [2] (8)

USS address
0 ... 31
P2011 [2] (0)
USS
configuration
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

All parameters: USS PZD length

Index = 1 0 ... 8
=> RS232 P2012 [2] (2)

USS PKW length

0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2510_USSon232.vsd Function diagram
- 2510 -
USS on RS232, Transmitting 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-11
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop
Bit03 Pulse enable
RxD Receive telegram Receive Bit04 RFG enable
2600 – USS on RS485, Receiving

Bit05 RFG start

PZD PKW Bit06 Setpoint enable
BCC PKW ADR LGE STX CtrlWd 1 <- COM
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2036 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2018 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
0
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
1 [1] Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up
2 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down
3 [3] Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)
4 [4]
5 [5] Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1
6 [6] Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2
7 [7] CtrlWd2 <- COM Bit03 Fixed frequency Bit 3
r2037 Bit04 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Change par. via Bit05 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Bit3 = 1 - ... - Bit08 PID enabled
P0927 (1111 bin) Bit09 DC brake enabled
Bit11 Droop
USS baudrate Bit12 Torque control
4 ... 12 Bit13 External fault 1
P2010 [2] (8) Bit15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1

Note:
USS address Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
0 ... 31 telegram received via USS so that the converter
P2011 [2] (0) will accept the process data as
USS
configuration being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
USS PZD length must be transferred to the converter in the first
All parameters:
0 ... 8 PZD word.
Index = 0
P2012 [2] (2)
=> RS485

USS PKW length

0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)
2-323

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2600_USSon485.vsd Function diagram
- 2600 -
USS on RS485, Receiving 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-12 Bit00 Drive ready
2-324

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit Transmit telegram TxD
2610 – USS on RS485, Transmitting

Bit06 ON inhibit active PKW

Bit07 Drive warning active Act StatWd1
PZD
Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value r0052 BCC PKW ADR LGE STX
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit09 PZD control r0052 PZD
Bit10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) P2019
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit Act. filt. freq. [Hz] [0] 0
Bit12 Brake open r0021 [1] 1
Bit13 Motor overload
[2] 2
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 3
[4] 4
Bit00 DC brake active
[5] 5
Bit01 |f_act|. > P2167 (f_off)
Bit02 |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) [6] 6
Bit03 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Act StatWd2 [7] 7
Bit04 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) r0053
Bit05 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) r0053
Bit06 f_act >= setpoint
Bit07 Act. Vdc < P2172 Note: Change par. via
P2019[0] = 52 Bit3 = 1 - ... -
Bit08 Act. Vdc > P2172
Bit09 Ramping finished P2019[1] = 21 P0927 (1111 bin)
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) P2019[3] = 53
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) are default settings
USS baudrate
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Bit14 Download data set 0 from OP 4 ... 12

Bit15 Download data set 1 from OP P2010 [2] (8)

USS address
0 ... 31
P2011 [2] (0)
USS
configuration
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

All parameters: USS PZD length

Index = 0 0 ... 8
=> RS485 P2012 [2] (2)

USS PKW length

0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2610_USSon485.vsd Function diagram
- 2610 -
USS on RS485, Transmitting 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-13
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop
Bit03 Pulse enable
PROFIBUS Receive Bit04 RFG enable
2700 – Fieldbus, Receiving

Bit05 RFG start

Bit06 Setpoint enable
CtrlWd1 <- FB
Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2090 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2050 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
1
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
2 [1]

Depends on P0922
Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up
3 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down
4 [3] Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)
5 [4]
6 [5] Note:
7 [6] Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
8 [7] telegram received via USS so that the converter
will accept the process data as
being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
must be transferred to the converter in the first
PZD word.

Standard Telegram
1 ... 999
P0922 (1)

Telegram Function Parameter channel PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8
Standard Telegram
1 ... 999 Speed control,
P0922 (1) 1 STW1 NSOLL_A
2 words
Change par. via Speed control,
- ... - 20 STW1 NSOLL_A
VIK/NAMUR
P0927 (1111 bin)
FB tel. off time Speed control,
Fieldbus 350 STW1 NSOLL_A M_LIM STW2
0 ... 65535 [ms] 4 words
configuration
P2040 (500) Speed control, PCS7 PCS7 PCS7 PCS7
352 STW1 NSOLL_A
Actual profile PCS7 process data process data process data process data
0 ... 3

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
P2038 (0) Speed control,
353
PKW 4/4 / PZD 2/2
x STW1 NSOLL_A
Ident nb
0 ... 1 Speed control, PCS7 PCS7 PCS7 PCS7
354
PKW 4/4 / PZD 6/6
x STW1 NSOLL_A
process data process data process data process data
P2042 (0)
BICO (free
999 STW1 Length can be freely selected via the central PROFIBUS configuring in master (max. 8 PZD)
interconnection)
2-325

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2700_Fieldbus.vsd Function diagram
- 2700 -
Fieldbus, Receiving 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-14 Bit00 Drive ready
2-326

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit PROFIBUS
2710 – Fieldbus, Transmitting

Bit06 ON inhibit active

Bit07 Drive warning active Act StatWd1
Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value r0052
Bit09 PZD control r0052 PZD
Bit10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) P2051
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit [0] 1
Bit12 Brake open [1] 2

Depends on P0922
Bit13 Motor overload
[2] 3
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 4
[4] 5
[5] 6
[6] 7
[7] 8

Standard Telegram
1 ... 999
P0922 (1)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Telegram Function Parameter channel PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8
Speed control,
1 ZSW1 NIST_A
Standard Telegram 2 words
1 ... 999
Speed control, NIST_A_ Freely
P0922 (1) 20 ZSW1 IAIST_GLATT MIST_GLATT PIST_GLATT
VIK/NAMUR GLATT connectable *)
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Change par. via

- ... - Speed control, NIST_A_
350 ZSW1 IAIST_GLATT ZSW2
P0927 (1111 bin) 4 words GLATT
FB tel. off time Fieldbus Speed control, NIST_A_
0 ... 65535 [ms] 352 ZSW1 IAIST_GLATT MIST_GLATT FAULT_CODE WARN_CODE
configuration PCS7 GLATT
P2040 (500)
Speed control, NIST_A_
Actual profile 353
PKW 4/4 / PZD 2/2
x ZSW1
GLATT
0 ... 3
P2038 (0) Speed control, NIST_A_
354
PKW 4/4 / PZD 6/6
x ZSW1
GLATT
IAIST_GLATT MIST_GLATT FAULT_CODE WARN_CODE
Ident nb
0 ... 1 BICO (free
P2042 (0) 999 ZSW1 Length can be freely selected via the central PROFIBUS configuring in master (max. 8 PZD)
interconnection)

*) Default P2051[5] = r3113

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2710_Fieldbus.vsd Function diagram
- 2710 -
Fieldbus, Transmitting 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-15
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

2800 – Encoder evaluation

160 ms

Act fil rotorspeed [RPM]

r0022

Act rotor speed [Hz]

r0061 160 ms
Select enc. type Rev dir sense Rev.outp.phase seq Act. filt. freq. [Hz]
0 ... 12 0 ... 1 0 ... 1 Control mode
Enc pulses per rev r0021
P0400.DDS (0) P0410.DDS (0) P1820.DDS (0) r 0313 0 ... 22
2 ... 20000
P1300.DDS (0)
P0408.DDS (1024) 60
A x dx
B dt >0 0 0
N 21,23 Act. frequency [Hz]
0 -1 1 -1 1
0 20,22 r0063
r0485 <20
Encoder count val.
SLVC: Frequency observer model

V/f: Act. frequency P1300 = 21, 23 and P0400 = 0 --> F0090

External Interfaces
Function diagrams
2-327

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2800_Encoder.vsd Function diagram
- 2800 -
Encoder evaluation 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Internal Setpoint Source

2.5 Internal Setpoint Source

Function diagrams

3100 – Motor Potentiometer (MOP) 2-329

3200 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection (P1016 = 1) 2-330

3210 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection (P1016 = 2) 2-331

3300 – Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection (P2216 = 1) 2-332

3310 – Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection (P2216 = 2) 2-333

3400 – PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP) 2-334

2-328 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Fig. 2-16
MOP acc RFG setpo
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P1043.CDS
(0)

MOP RFG setpoint

P1044.CDS
3100 – Motor Potentiometer (MOP)

(0)

Setp. auto/manu
P1041.CDS MOP RFG input [Hz]
(0) r1045

MOP auto setpoint

P1042.CDS
(0) MOP setpoint MOP mode
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] - ... -
Enable MOP(UP) P1040.DDS (5.00) P1031.DDS (0) Bit 00 = 1: Setpoint store active
Bit 01 = 1: No On-state for MOP necessary
P1035.CDS
(19.13)

Enable MOP(DWN) MOP output start value control

P1036.CDS Inhib. MOP reverse
(19.14) 0 ... 1
P1032 (1)

0 0

Max. frequency 1 MOP outp.freq. [Hz]

1
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1
MOP r1050
P1082.DDS (50.00)
0 RFG 0
-1 1 0

1 1
MOP ramp-up time MOP rampdown time
0.00 ... 1000.00 [s] 0.00 ... 1000.00 [s]

Internal Setpoint Source

P1047.DDS (10.00) P1048.DDS (10.00)

Function diagrams
2-329

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3100_MOP.vsd Function diagram
- 3100 -
Motor Potentiometer (MOP) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-17
2-330

Internal Setpoint Source

Function diagrams
3200 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection (P1016 = 1)

FF sel. Bit 0 P1020.CDS

(722.3)

FF sel. Bit 1 P1021.CDS

(722.4)
FF Status
r1025
FF sel. Bit 2 P1022.CDS
(722.5)

FF sel. Bit 3 P1023.CDS

(0)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Fixed frequency 1
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 0 0 1
P1001.DDS ( 0.00)
Fixed frequency 2
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 0 1 0
P1002.DDS ( 5.00)
Fixed frequency 3
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 0 0

P1003.DDS ( 10.00)
Fixed frequency 4 + + + Act. FF [Hz]
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 0 0 0 r1024
P1004.DDS ( 15.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3200_FF.vsd Function diagram
- 3200 -
Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection (P1016 = 1) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-18
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

FF sel. Bit 0 P1020.CDS

(722.3)
3210 – Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection (P1016 = 2)

FF sel. Bit 1 P1021.CDS

(722.4)
FF Status
r1025
FF sel. Bit 2 P1022.CDS
(722.5)

FF sel. Bit 3 P1023.CDS

(0)

Fixed frequency 1
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 0 0 1
P1001.DDS ( 0.00)
. .
. .
.
Fixed frequency 4
.
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 0 0
P1004.DDS ( 15.00)
Fixed frequency 5
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 0 1
P1005.DDS (20.00) Act. FF [Hz]
r1024
Fixed frequency 6
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 1 0
.
P1006.DDS (25.00) .

Internal Setpoint Source

. .
.
Fixed frequency 15
.

Function diagrams
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 1 1 1
P1015.DDS (65.00)
2-331

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3210_FF.vsd Function diagram
- 3210 -
Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection (P1016 = 2) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-19
2-332

Internal Setpoint Source

Function diagrams
3300 – Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection (P2216 = 1)

PID setp->Bit 0 P2220.CDS

(722.3)

PID setp->Bit 1 P2221.CDS

(722.4)
PID FF Status
r2225
PID setp->Bit 2 P2222.CDS
(722.5)

PID setp->Bit 3 P2223.CDS

(0)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Fixed PID setp. 1

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 0 0 1
P2201.DDS ( 0.00)
Fixed PID setp. 2
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 0 1 0
P2202.DDS ( 10.00)
Fixed PID setp. 3
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 0 0

P2203.DDS ( 20.00)
Fixed PID setp. 4 + + + Fixed.PID setp [%]
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 0 0 0 r2224
P2204.DDS ( 30.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3300_FPID.vsd Function diagram
- 3300 -
Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection (P2216 = 1) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-20
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

PID setp->Bit 0 P2220.CDS

(722.3)
3310 – Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection (P2216 = 2)

PID setp->Bit 1 P2221.CDS

(722.4)
PID FF Status
r2225
PID setp->Bit 2 P2222.CDS
(722.5)

PID setp->Bit 3 P2223.CDS

(0)

Fixed PID setp. 1

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 0 0 1
P2201.DDS ( 0.00)
. .
. .
.
Fixed PID setp. 4
.
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 0 0
P2204.DDS ( 30.00)
Fixed PID setp. 5
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 0 1
P2205.DDS ( 40.00) Fixed.PID setp [%]
r2224
Fixed PID setp. 6
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 1 0
.
P2206.DDS ( 50.00) .

Internal Setpoint Source

. .
.
Fixed PID setp. 15
.

Function diagrams
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 1 1 1
P2215.DDS ( 130.00)
2-333

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3310_FPID.vsd Function diagram
- 3310 -
Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection (P2216 = 2) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-21
2-334

Internal Setpoint Source

Function diagrams
PMOP acc RFG setpo
P2243.CDS
(0)
3400 – PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP)

PMOP RFG setpoint

P2244.CDS
(0)

Setp. auto/manu
P2241.CDS PMOP RFG input [%]
(0) r2245

PMOP auto setpoint

P2242.CDS
(0) Setp. of PID-MOP PID-MOP mode.
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] - ... -
PID-MOP (UP) P2240.DDS ( 10.00) P2231.DDS (0) Bit 00 = 1: Setpoint store active
Bit 01 = 1: No On-state for MOP necessary
P2235.CDS
(19.13)

PID-MOP (DWN) PID-MOP output start value control

P2236.CDS Inhib. PID-MOD rev
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

(19.14) 0 ... 1
P2232 (1)
Max. frequency
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1082.DDS (50.00) 100 % 0 0

1 PMOP outp. setp [%]

x 1
0 1
y r2250
PID-MOP
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

0 RFG 0
-1 1 0
Rated motor freq.
12.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P0310.DDS (50.00)
1 1
MOP ramp-up time MOP rampdown time
0.00 ... 1000.00 [s] 0.00 ... 1000.00 [s]
P1047.DDS (10.00) P1048.DDS (10.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3400_PIDMOP.vsd Function diagram
- 3400 -
PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Technology Functions

2.6 Technology Functions

Function diagrams

4100 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 00 - 04) 2-336

4110 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 05 - 12) 2-337

4115 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 09 - 10) (only PM240) 2-338

4120 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 00 - 03) 2-339

4130 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 04 - 08) 2-340

4140 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 09 - 12) 2-341

4150 – Control word 1 (r0054) 2-342

4160 – Control word 2 (r0055) 2-343

4170 – Status word 1 (r0052) 2-344

4180 – Status word 2 (r0053) 2-345

4600 – Vdc Control (max, min) 2-346

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-335

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Min. frequency
Tconst. speed filt 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]

Fig. 2-22
0 ... 1000 [ms] P1080.DDS (0.00)
P2153.DDS (5) Act. filt. freq [Hz]
2-336

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
r2169
Monitor Wd1
Act. frequency [Hz] 1
r2197
|f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) r0063
r2197.00
4100 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 00 - 04)

{
Act StatWd2
r0053
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min) Threshold freq f_1
r0053.02
Tconst. speed filt 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
0 ... 1000 [ms] P2155.DDS (30.00) Hyst. freq. f_hys
P2153.DDS (5) Act. filt. freq [Hz] 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00)
r2169
Monitor Wd1
Act. frequency [Hz] 1 T 0 r2197
|f_act| > P2155 (f_1) r0063
r2197 .02
0 Threshold freq f_1

{
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] Act StatWd2
P2155.DDS (30.00) r0053
Delay time of f_1 r0053 .04
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Hyst. freq. f_hys P2156.DDS (10)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] Monitor Wd1
P2150.DDS (3.00) 1
T 0 r2197
|f_act| <= P2155 (f_1)
r2197 .01
0

{
Act StatWd2
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

0 r0053
Delay time of f_1 r0053 .05
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Hyst. freq. f_hys
P2156.DDS (10)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] Monitor Wd1
1 P2150.DDS (3.00)
+ r2197
f_act >= setp. (f_set)
_ r2197 .04
0

{
Act StatWd2
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

1 0 r0053
r0053 .06
-1 Hyst. freq. f_hys
f_set 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] Monitor Wd1
r1119 P2150.DDS (3.00) 1
r2197
f_act > 0 r2197 .03
0

{
Act StatWd1
r0052
r0052 .14
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4100_MonW11.vsd Function diagram
- 4100 -
Monitoring Word 1 (r2197, bits 00 - 04) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 SwOff freq. f_off Delay time T_off
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] 0 ... 10000 [ms]

Fig. 2-23
Brake closed
P2167.DDS (1.00) P2168.DDS (10)
(on ramp down)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Monitor Wd1
T 0 r2197
Act. frequency [Hz] 1 r2197.05
|f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) r0063 Act StatWd2
4110 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 05 - 12)

Delay time current

0
0 ... 10000 [ms] r0053
|f_act| > P2167 (f_off) P2171.DDS (10) r0053.01
no Brake selected
1 Monitor Wd1
Output current [A]
T 0 r2197
|I_act| >= P2170 (I_thresh) r0068
r2197.08
0 Entry freq. deviat
0.00 ... 20.00 [Hz] Act StatWd2
Delay_T perm. dev. r0053
P2163.DDS (3.00)
0 ... 10000 [ms]
r0053.03
P2165.DDS (200)
Threshold current
0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P2170.DDS (100.0) Monitor Wd1
Act. frequency [Hz] 1
0 T r2197
f_act == setpoint (f_set) r0063 _ r2197.07
+ 0

{
n-Set for msg Act StatWd1
P2151.DDS Max. frequency
r0052
(1170[0]) 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
Delay f>fmax r0052 .08
P1082.DDS (50.00)
Hyster freq deviat 0 ... 10000 [ms]
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] P2152.DDS (200)
P2164.DDS (3.00)
Monitor Wd1
Act. frequency [Hz] 1
T 0 r2197
| f_act | >= P1082 (f_max) r0063
r2197.12
Cur.lim:no-load ID 0

{
0.0 ... 10.0 [%] Monitor Wd1
P2179 (3.0) r2197
r2197 .06
Overspd. hyst.freq Load missing delay Act StatWd1
0.00 ... 25.00 [Hz] 0 ... 10000 [ms] r0052
Output current [A] 1 P2162.DDS (3.00) P2180 (2000) r0052 .10
r0068
0 Monitor Wd1

Technology Functions
T 0 r2197
0

Function diagrams
Pulse_enable r2197.11
Load missing

1
Act. outp.volt [V]
r0072
0
2-337

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4110_MonW12.vsd Function diagram
- 4110 -
Monitoring Word 1 (r2197, bits 05 - 12) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Vdc threshold
0 ... 2000 [V]

Fig. 2-24
P2172.DDS (800) Vdc delay time
0 ... 10000 [ms]
2-338

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
P2173.DDS (10)

Monitor Wd1
Act. Vdc [V] 1
T 0 r2197
Vdc_act < P2172 r0070
4115 – Monitoring (r2197, bits 09 - 10) (only PM240)

r2197.09
0
Act StatWd2
Vdc delay time
0 ... 10000 [ms] r0053
P2173.DDS (10) r0053.07

Monitor Wd1
0 T r2197
Vdc_act > P2172 r2197.10
Act StatWd2
r0053
r0053.08
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4115_MonW13.vsd Function diagram
- 4115 -
Monitoring Word 1 (r2197) (only PM240) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-25
Threshold freq f_2
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]

P2157.DDS (30.00) Delay time of f_2
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Act. filt. freq [Hz]
P2158.DDS (10)
r2169
Monitor Wd2
4120 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 00 - 03)

Act. frequency [Hz] 1

0 T r2198
| f_act | <= P2157 (f_2) r0063
r2198.00
0 Threshold freq f_2

{
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P2157.DDS (30.00) Delay time of f_2
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Tconst. speed filt
0 ... 1000 [ms] P2158.DDS (10)
Hyst. freq. f_hys
P2153.DDS (5) 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00) Monitor Wd2
1
0 T r2198
| f_act | > P2157 (f_2) r2198.01
0

{
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00)
Threshold freq f_3
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P2159.DDS (30.00) Delay time of f_3
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Act. filt. freq [Hz]
P2160.DDS (10)
r2169
Monitor Wd2
Act. frequency [Hz] 1
T 0 r2198
| f_act | <= P2159 (f_3) r0063
r2198.02
0 Threshold freq f_3

{
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P2159.DDS (30.00) Delay time of f_3
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Tconst. speed filt
P2160.DDS (10)
0 ... 1000 [ms] Hyst. freq. f_hys
P2153.DDS (5) 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00) Monitor Wd2
1
T 0 r2198
| f_act | > P2159 (f_3) r2198.03

Technology Functions
0

Function diagrams
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00)
2-339

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4120_MonW21.vsd Function diagram
- 4120 -
Monitoring Word 2 (r2198, bits 00 - 03) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Setp.min.threshold

Fig. 2-26
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2161.DDS (3.00)
2-340

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
Monitor Wd2
Setp. after RFG [Hz] 1
| f_set | < P2161 (f_min_set) r2198
r1170
4130 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 04 - 08)

r2198.04
0

{
0

Hyst. freq. f_hys

0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.DDS (3.00) Monitor Wd2
1
f_set > 0 r2198
r2198.05
Stat MotCtrl 0

{
r0056
Imax controller active / torque limit reached
r0056.13 Control mode
Delay_T MotBlocked
0 ... 22
Monitor Wd1 0 ... 10000 [ms]
P1300.DDS (0) Hyst. freq. f_hys
r2197 P2177.DDS (10)
f_act == setpoint (f_set) 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
r2197.07 P2150.DDS (3.00)
Act. filt. freq [Hz] 20,21 Monitor Wd2
Motor blocked T 0 r2198
r2169 1
r2198.06
<20
0
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Total flux setp [%]

r1598 2 x P0330 Motor model StatWd Delay_T MotPullOut
Air gap flux [%] r1751 0 ... 10000 [ms]
Flux r1751.00 P2178.DDS (10)
r0084
comparison
Monitor Wd2
0
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

1 T 0 r2198
Motor stalled Act. flux variance [%]
r1746 r2198.07
1
0

Threshold current
0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P2170.DDS (100.0) Delay time current
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Flux var.lim.stall
P2171.DDS (10)
0.0 ... 1000.0 [%]
P1745.DDS (5.0)
Monitor Wd2
Output current [A] 1
0 T r2198
|I_act| < P2170 r0068
r2198.08
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4130_MonW22.vsd Function diagram
- 4130 -
Monitoring Word 2 (r2198, bits 04 - 08) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-27
1 Monitor Wd2
Act. torque [Nm]
T 0 r2198
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

|M_act| > P2174 r0080

r2198.10
0

Entry freq. deviat

0.00 ... 20.00 [Hz] Delay time torque
Delay_T rampUpCmpl
4140 – Monitoring (r2198, bits 09 - 12)

P2163.DDS (3.00) 0 ... 10000 [ms]

Torque threshold 0 ... 10000 [ms]
P2176.DDS (10)
0.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] P2166.DDS (10)
P2174.DDS (5.13) Monitor Wd2
r2198
Act. frequency [Hz] 1
0 T SET r2198.09
|M_act| > P2174 & r0063 _ (Q=1) Q
setpoint reached + 0

{
n-Set for msg
P2151.DDS RFG active
RESET
(1170[0]) (Q=0) Q
Hyster freq deviat
Priority
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
1 RESET
P2164.DDS (3.00)
2 SET

M [Nm] Boundary zone

de-actvated monitoring
Upper trq. thresh3
Belt fail detect
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm]
Belt fail delay_T 0 ... 6
Lower trq. thresh3 P2189.DDS (99999.0)
0 ... 65 [s] P2181.DDS (0)
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm] P2192.DDS (10)
P2190.DDS (0.0) Act. torque [Nm] Monitor Wd2
Belt failure warning r0080 Envelope curve r2198
active monitoring r2198 .11
0 T
Evaluation Monitor Wd2
Belt failure trip r2198
Upper trq. thresh2
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm] r2198 .12
Lower trq. thresh2 P2187.DDS (99999.0)
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm]
P2188.DDS (0.0)
Upper trq. thresh1
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm]
Lower trq. thresh1 P2185.DDS (99999.0)

Technology Functions
0.0 ... 99999.0 [Nm]
P2186.DDS (0.0) Act. filt. freq [Hz] f [Hz]

Function diagrams
r2169

Belt threshold f_1 Belt threshold f_2 Belt threshold f_3

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P2182.DDS (5.00) P2183.DDS (30.00) P2184.DDS (50.00)
2-341

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4140_MonW23.vsd Function diagram
- 4140 -
Monitoring Word 2 (r2198, bits 09 - 12) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 ON/OFF1

Fig. 2-28
Parameter r0054
P0840.CDS Act CtrlWd1
2-342

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
(722.0) r0054
Bit No. Meaning
ON reverse/OFF1 r0054
1. OFF2
P0842.CDS Sequence control 1)
P0844.CDS 0 = ON/OFF1, Shutdown via ramp, followed by pulse disable
(0) 0 Braking control
(1) 1 = ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) Setpoint channel
4150 – Control word 1 (r0054)

2. OFF2 0 = OFF2: Electrical stop, pulse disable, motor coasts down Sequence control 1)
1
P0845.CDS 1 = Operating condition Braking control
(19.1)
0 = OFF3: Fast stop Sequence control 1)
2
1 = Operating condition Braking control
1. OFF3 Setpoint channel
Pulse enable P0852.CDS
P0848.CDS 1 = Pulse enable
(1) 3 Sequence control 1)
(1) 0 = Pulse disable All bits = 1 -->
RFG enable P1140.CDS drive runs
2. OFF3 1 = RFG enable
(1) 4 Setpoint channel
P0849.CDS 0 = Set RFG to 0
(1) RFG start P1141.CDS
1 = RFG start
(1) 5 Setpoint channel
0 = Stop RFG
1. Faults ackn
RFG enable setp P1142.CDS
P2103.CDS 1 = RFG setpoint enable
(1) 6 Setpoint channel
(722.2) 0 = Setpoint disable

0 = No
BOP via "Fn" 7 Sequence control 1)
1 = Fault acknowledge
2. Faults ackn
Enable JOG -> P1055.CDS
P2104.CDS 0 = NO Sequence control 1)
(0) 8
(0) 1 = JOG right Setpoint channel
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Enable JOG <- P1056.CDS

0 = NO Sequence control 1)
(0) 9
1 = JOG left Setpoint channel
ON reverse/OFF1 Note:This bit must be set in the first PZD word of the
P0842.CDS 1 = Control from PLC telegram received from serial interfaces,
10
(0) 0 = No control from PLC so that the converter will accept the process data as
being valid (compare USS, PROFIBUS, etc.)
Reverse 1 = Reverse (setpoint inversion)
11 Setpoint channel
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P1113.CDS 0 = Revers disabled

(722.1)
Seven-segment display 12 reserved
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Enable MOP(UP) P1035.CDS
(19.13) 0 = NO
13 Setpoint channel
1 = Motor potentiometer MOP up
Enable MOP(DWN) P1036.CDS
(19.14) 0 = NO
14 Setpoint channel
1 = Motor potentiometer MOP down
CDS bit 0 P0810
(0) 0 = NO
15 Sequence control 1)
1 = CDS Bit 0 (local/remote)
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 inverter status (r0001)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4150_STW1.vsd Function diagram
- 4150 -
Control word 1 (r0054) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-29
Parameter r0055
Act CtrlWd2
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

r0055
Bit No. Meaning
r0055
FF sel. Bit 0 P1020.CDS
0 = NO
(722.3) 0 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 0
4160 – Control word 2 (r0055)

FF sel. Bit 1 P1021.CDS

0 = NO
(722.4) 1 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 1
FF sel. Bit 2 P1022.CDS
0 = NO
(722.5) 2 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 2
FF sel. Bit 3 P1023.CDS
0 = NO
(0) 3 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 3
DDS bit 0 P0820
0 = NO
(0) 4 Sequence control 1)
1 = Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
DDS bit 1 P0821
0 = NO
(0) 5 Sequence control 1)
1 = Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1

6 reserved

ON/OFF1
P0840.CDS 7 reserved
(722.0)
Enab. PID ctrl P2200.CDS
0 = NO
ON reverse/OFF1 (0) 8 PID control
1 = PID enable
P0842.CDS
Enable DC brk. P1230.CDS
(0) 0 = NO
(0) 9 DC braking control
1 = DC brake enable
Droop input source
0 ... 3
Enable droop P1488.DDS (0) 10 reserved
P1492.CDS
(0) 0 = NO
11 Speed control
1 = Droop enable (only SLVC/VC)
Change > torq ctrl P1501.CDS
0 = NO
(0) 12 Speed/torque control
Seven-segment display 1 = Torque control (only SLVC/VC)
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 External fault P2106.CDS
(1) 0 = External fault 1
13 Sequence control 1)

Technology Functions
1 = No external fault

Function diagrams
14 reserved

CDS bit 1 P0811

(0) 0 = NO
15 Sequence control 1)
1 = Command data set (CDS) Bit 1
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
inverter status (r0001)
2-343

Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4160_STW2.vsd Function diagram
- 4160 -
Control word 2 (r0055) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Parameter r0052
Fig. 2-30
Act StatWd1
2-344

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
r0052
Bit No. Meaning
r0052

Sequence control 1) 0 1 = Drive ready

0 = Drive not ready
4170 – Status word 1 (r0052)

Sequence control 1) 1 = Drive ready to run (DC link loaded, pulses disabled)
1
0 = Drive not ready to run

1 = Drive running (voltage at output terminals)

Sequence control 1) 2
0 = Pulses disabled
r0052 P0731..P0733
1 = Drive fault active (pulses disabled)
Sequence control 1) 3 1 r0052.03 (x.x)
0 = No fault
Signal "Fault active" is inverted if
Sequence control 1) 0 = OFF2 active connected to a digital output which means
4
1 = No OFF2 that the relay will be in the de-energised
state.
Sequence control 1) 0 = OFF3 active
5
1 = No OFF3

Sequence control 1) 1 = ON inhibit active

6
0 = No On inhibit (possible to switch on)

Alarm processing 1 = Drive warning active

7
0 = No warning

0 = Deviation setpoint / act. value

Messages 8
1 = No deviation setpoint / act. Value
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Sequence control 1) 9 1 = PZD control (always 1)

Messages 1 = f_act >= P1082 (f_max)

10
0 = < P1082 (f_max)

0 = Warning: Motor current limit

11
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Messages
1 = Motor current limit not reached

Braking control 1 = Motor holding brake active

12
Seven-segment display 0 = Motor holding brake not active
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0 = Motor overload
Messages 13
1 = No Motor overload

Messages 1 = Motor runs right

14
0 = Motor does not run right

Messages 0 = Inverter overload

15 1) The sequence control is the internal
1 = No inverter overload
control (software) for realizing the
inverter status (r0001)
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4170_ZSW1.vsd Function diagram
- 4170 -
Status word 1 (r0052) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Parameter r0053
Fig. 2-31
Act StatWd2
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

r0053
Bit No. Meaning
r0053

Braking control 0 1 = DC brake active

0 = DC brake not active
4180 – Status word 2 (r0053)

Alarm processing 1 1 = f_act > P2167 (f_off)

Messages 2 1 = f_act > P1080 (f_min)

Alarm processing 3 1 = Act. current r0068 >= P2170

Messages 4 1 = f_act > P2155 (f_1)

Messages 5 1 = f_act <= P2155 (f_1)

Messages 6 1 = f_act >= setpoint

Messages 7 1 = Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172

Alarm processing 8 1 = Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172

Sequence control 1) 9 1 = Ramping finished

Messages 10 1 = PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min)

Messages 11 1 = PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max)

12 reserved
Seven-segment display
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
13 reserved

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
Sequence control 1) 14 Download data set 0 from OP

Sequence control 1) 15 Download data set 1 from OP 1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
inverter status (r0001)
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2-345

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4180_ZSW2.vsd Function diagram
- 4180 -
Status word 2 (r0053) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-32
2-346

Technology Functions
Function diagrams
Vdc-max dyn. fact. Dyn. factor of KIB
10 ... 200 [%] 10 ... 200 [%]
P1243.DDS (100) P1247.DDS (100)
Stat MotCtrl
4600 – Vdc Control (max, min)

Vdc controller 1
r0056
0 ... 3
P1240.DDS (1) r0056 .14
Int. time Vdc ctrl r0056.15
0.1 ... 1000.0 [ms]
Act. Vdc [V]
1,3 P1251.DDS (40.0)
r0070 Gain of Vdc ctrl. Diff.time Vdc ctrl
0.00 ... 10.00 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms] Vdc ctrl outp. lim
– 0 0,2 P1250.DDS (1.00) P1252.DDS (1.0) 0.00 ... 600.00 [Hz]
Control mode P1253.DDS ( 10.00)
0 ... 22
Vdc-max ON lev [V] P1300.DDS (0) f(VDC)
r1242 FP 6100
<20

20
Vdc controller
0 ... 3 isq(VDC)
P1240.DDS (1) FP 7900

Act. Vdc [V]

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

r0070 2,3

– 0
0,1

KIB ON level [V]

r1246 3
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

KIB ON level 2
65 ... 115 [%]
P1245.DDS (76) 100

Supply voltage
0 ... 1000 [V]
P0210 (400)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4600.vsd Function diagram
- 4600 -
Vdc Control (max, min) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Free Function Blocks

2.7 Free Function Blocks

Function diagrams

4800 – AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements 2-348

4810 – FlipFlops 2-349

4820 – Timers 2-350

4830 – Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers, Comparators, Setting in % 2-351

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-347

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 3 AND Elements with 2 Inputs 3 OR Elements with 2 Inputs

Fig. 2-33 P2800 P2801[0] P2800 P2801[3]

2-348

Free Function Blocks

Function diagrams
P2810 P2816
Index0 Index0
r2811 r2817
Index1 Index1
4800 – AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements

P2800 P2801[1] P2800 P2801[4]

P2812 P2818
Index0 Index0
r2813 r2819
Index1 Index1

P2800 P2801[2] P2800 P2801[5]

P2814 P2820
Index0 Index0
r2815 r2821
Index1 Index1

3 XOR Elements with 2 Inputs 3 NOT Elements with 1 Input

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

P2800 P2801[6]
P2800 P2801[9]

P2822
P2828
Index0
Index1
= r2823 Index0 r2829
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P2800 P2801[7]
P2800 P2801[10]

P2824
P2830
Index0
Index1
= r2825 Index0 r2831

P2800 P2801[8] P2800 P2801[11]

P2826 P2832
Index0 Index0 r2833
Index1
= r2827

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free Blocks 4800_FreeBlocks1.vsd Function diagram
- 4800 -
AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-34
2 D FlipFlops 3 RS FlipFlops
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P2800 P2801[12]
P2800 P2801[14]
P2834 SET (Q=1)
P2840
4810 – FlipFlops

Index0
SET
Index1 D Q r2835 Index0 (Q=1) Q r2841
Index2 Index1
Index3
RESET
STORE (Q=0) Q r2842
POWER ON
Q r2836

RESET (Q=0)

P2800 P2801[15]

POWER ON
P2843
SET
Index0 (Q=1) Q r2844
Index1

RESET
(Q=0) Q r2845
POWER ON

P2800 P2801[13]

P2837 SET (Q=1)

Index0
Index1 D Q r2838
Index2
P2800 P2801[16]
Index3

STORE P2846
SET
Q r2839 Index0 (Q=1) Q r2847
Index1
RESET (Q=0)
RESET
(Q=0) Q r2848
POWER ON

Free Function Blocks

Function diagrams
POWER ON
2-349

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free Blocks 4810_FreeBlocks2.vsd Function diagram
- 4810 -
FlipFlops 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-35 4 Timers 0 ... 6000.0 s
2-350

Free Function Blocks

Function diagrams
4820 – Timers

P2850 (0.000) P2851(0) P2860 (0.000) P2861(0)

P2800 P2802[0] 0.000...6000.0 s Mode P2800 P2802[2] 0.000...6000.0 s Mode

ON Delay ON Delay
T 0,10 T 0,10
0 0

OFF Delay OFF Delay

1,11 1,11
0 T 0 T
P2849 P2859
Index0 ON/OFF Delay r2852 Index0 ON/OFF Delay r2862
2,12 2,12
T T T T

Pulse Gernerator
1 r2853
Pulse Gernerator
1 r2863

T 3,13 T 3,13
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

P2855 (0.000) P2856(0) P2865 (0.000) P2866(0)

P2800 P2802[1] 0.000...6000.0 s Mode P2800 P2802[3] 0.000...6000.0 s Mode

ON Delay ON Delay
T 0,10 T 0,10
0 0
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

OFF Delay OFF Delay

1,11 1,11
0 T 0 T
P2854 P2864
Index0 ON/OFF Delay r2857 Index0 ON/OFF Delay r2867
2,12 2,12
T T T T

Pulse Gernerator
1 r2858
Pulse Gernerator
1 r2868
3,13 3,13
T T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free Blocks 4820_FreeBlocks3.vsd Function diagram
- 4820 -
Timers 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 2 Adders with 2 Inputs (1 Word) 2 Subtracters with 2 Inputs (1 Word) 2 Multipliers (1 Word)
Fig. 2-36
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P2800 P2802[4] P2800 P2802[6] P2800 P2802[8]

P2869 P2873 P2877
x1 200 % x1 200 % x1 200 %
Index0 Index0 Index0
r2870 r2874 r2878
4830 – Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers, Comparators, Setting in %

Index1 x2 Index1 x2 Index1 x2

-200 % -200 % -200 %
x1 + x2 x1 - x2 x1 x2
100%

P2800 P2802[5] P2800 P2802[7] P2800 P2802[9]

P2871 P2875 P2879

x1 200 % x1 200 % x1 200 %
Index0 Index0 Index0
r2872 r2876 r2880
x2 Index1 x2 Index1 x2
Index1 -200 % -200 % -200 %
x1 + x2 x1 - x2 x1 x2
100%

2 Dividers (1 Word) Word Compare Connector Setting in %

P2800 P2802[10] P2800 P2802[12]

P2889
P2881 P2885
x1 200 % x1 P2890
Index0 Index0
x2
r2882 x2 CMP r2886
Index1 -200 % Index1
Out = x1 x2
x1 100%
x2

P2800 P2802[11] P2800 P2802[13]

P2883 P2887
x1 200 % x1

Free Function Blocks

Index0 Index0
r2884 CMP r2888
Index1 x2 Index1 x2

Function diagrams
-200 %

x1 100% Out = x1 x2

x2
2-351

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Free Blocks 4830_FreeBlocks4.vsd Function diagram
- 4830 -
Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers, Comparators, Setting in % 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Setpoint Channel

2.8 Setpoint Channel

Function diagrams

5000 – Setpoint channel and Motor control 2-353

5100 – PID Controller 2-354

5150 – Wobble Generator 2-355

5200 – Additional Frequency Modifications (AFM) 2-356

5300 – Ramp Function Generator 2-357

2-352 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 JOG Enable
0000 bin ... 0001 bin

Fig. 2-37
P1057 (0001 bin)
0
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Enable JOG ->

P1055.CDS
1
(0)
Enable JOG <- Setp before RFG [Hz]
0
P1056.CDS r0020
5000 – Setpoint channel and Motor control

(0)
1
Sel. freq.setp [Hz] Setp before RFG [Hz]
Main setpoint Tot. freq.setp [Hz]
r1079 r1119 6100
P1070.CDS r1078
(755[0]) JOG frequency V/f control
Main setp scal 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1
P1071.CDS P1058.DDS (5.00) Control mode
(1) JOG frequency <- 0 ... 22
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 0 P1300.DDS (0)
7800 7900
+ P1059.DDS (5.00) Flux setpoint
P1082 P1082 3)
+ 0 <20
Disab.add.setp
SUM/ 7500 - 7700 Current
JOG AFM RFG
2) control
0 1

MOD
P1074.CDS selection Speed / torque
1 + 20
(0) control
P1082 P1082
Add. setp.scal
r1170
P1076.CDS
1) Setp. after RFG [Hz] 7900
(1)
Add. setpoint
0 0 Motor model
P1075.CDS
(0)

PID setpoint PID mode

0 ... 1 Motor identification
P2253.CDS P2291
P2251 (0) 1
(0)
PID
PID trim source controller
P2254.CDS 0
(0) P2292
PID output scale
PID feedback r2294 -100.00 ... 100.00
P2264.CDS Act.PID output [%] P2295 (100.00)
(755[0])
Enab. PID ctrl 1) only active after ON command

Function diagrams
Setpoint Channel
P2200.CDS 2) P2200 = 1 (PID controller active)
(0) After ON: Ramp up/down times = P2293
PID mode During OFF: Ramp down time = P1121
0 ... 1 3) In V/f control dependent on r1343 (see FP6100)
P2251 (0)
2-353

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 5000_Overview.vsd Function diagram
- 5000 -
Setpoint channel and Motor control 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 PID trim gain fact PID prop. gain
0.00 ... 100.00

Fig. 2-38
0.000 ... 65.000
P2256 (100.00) P2280 (3.000)
PID setp. ramp-up
2-354

Setpoint Channel
Function diagrams
PID trim source 0.00 ... 650.00 [s] PID integral time
P2254.CDS P2257 (1.00) PID setp.filt.Tcon PID ctrl. type 0.000 ... 60.000 [s]
(0) 0.00 ... 60.00 [s] 0 ... 1 P2285 (0.000)
P2261 (0.00) P2263 (0)
Act StatWd2
5100 – PID Controller

PID setpoint y r0053

Kp Tn
P2253.CDS + 0 r0053 .11
(0) + + r0053 .10
x
+ 1 +
- d
+
PID setp.gain fact Filt. PID setp [%] r2294
dt
0.00 ... 100.00 r2260 r2262 Act.PID output [%]
P2255 (100.00)
PID setp. ramp-dwn PID setp <-RFG [%]
0.00 ... 650.00 [s] r2273
P2258 (1.00) PID error [%]
PID deriv. time
0.000 ... 60.000 [s]
P2274 (0.000)

PID fdbck max. val

Fdbck.filt. Tconst -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
0.00 ... 60.00 [s] P2267 (100.00) PID feedback gain PID fdbck fnct sel
P2265 (0.00) 0.00 ... 500.00 0 ... 3
y P2269 (100.00) P2270 (0)
PID feedback
P2264.CDS
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

x
(755[0])
r2266 r2272
PID filt.fdbck [%] PID scal fdbck [%]
PID trans. type
PID fdbck min. val 0 ... 1
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] P2271 (0)
P2268 (0.00) PID outp.upper lim
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]

P2291 (100.00)

PID lim. ramp time PID outp.lower lim

0.00 ... 100.00 [s] -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
P2293 (1.00) P2292 (0.00)
P2200 = BI: Enable PID controller
P2251 = PID mode (0 = PID as setpoint, 1 = PID as trim)

P2350 = PID autotune enable

P2354 = PID tuning timeout length
P2355 = PID tuning offset

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint Channel 5100_PID.vsd Function diagram
- 5100 -
PID Controller 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-39
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

5150 – Wobble Generator

P1082 *)
+ f(x)
RFG

+ +
f(ws) 1
P1082 *)
PID trim r1170
Setp. after RFG [Hz]
f(x)

Rel Wobble
P2945
P2940
Wobble sig amp
WS P2949 (0)
0.000 ... 0.200 [%]
P2946 (0.000)
P2946
P2947
Wobble sig freq
0.001 ... 10.000 [Hz]
P2945 (1.000)

Signal dec step 0 0 Wobble output [%]

0.000 ... 1.000 f(ws) r2955
P2947 (0.000) t 1
Signal inc step
0.000 ... 1.000
P2948 (0.000)

Wobble pul width

P2948
0 ... 100 [%]
-P2946
P2949 (50)

Function diagrams
Setpoint Channel
In V/f control dependent on
r1343 (see FP6100)
2-355

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint Channel 5150_Wobble.vsd Function diagram
- 5150 -
Wobble Generator 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-40
2-356

Setpoint Channel
Function diagrams
5200 – Additional Frequency Modifications (AFM)

Skip frequency 2 Skip frequency 4

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1092.DDS ( 0.00) P1094.DDS ( 0.00)
Skip frequency Skip frequency 3
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1091.DDS ( 0.00) P1093.DDS ( 0.00) Max. frequency
Inh. neg. setp 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1110.CDS P1082.DDS (50.00)
(0)
JOG fOUT Resultant max freq [Hz]
Reverse r1084
P1113.CDS
(722.1) y
1
0 x
RFG
SUM or SUM/JOG
PID controller selection -1 1 0
1
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Bandwidth
No evaluation with PID

r1079 Skip frequency r1119

Sel. freq.setp [Hz] Setp before RFG [Hz]
fIN
Min. frequency
r1114
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]

Setp<-dir.ctrl. Skipfreq bandwidth P1080.DDS (0.00)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P1101.DDS ( 2.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel 5200_AFM.vsd Function diagram
- 5200 -
Additional Frequency Modifications (AFM) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-41
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Ramp-up ini. Trnd Ramp-up final Trnd Ramp-dwn ini. Trnd Ramp-dwn fin. Trnd
5300 – Ramp Function Generator

0.00 ... 40.00 [s] 0.00 ... 40.00 [s] 0.00 ... 40.00 [s] 0.00 ... 40.00 [s]
P1130.DDS ( 0.00) P1131.DDS ( 0.00) P1132.DDS ( 0.00) P1133.DDS ( 0.00)

Rounding type
0 ... 1
f
P1134.DDS (0)
1

from AFM P1082 *) Setp. after RFG [Hz]

1
0 r1170
Setp before RFG [Hz] fx fy 1
0
r1119 0
1
0
0 + +

RFG start P1082 *)

P1141.CDS
(Freeze y)
(1)
P1130 P1131 P1132 P1133 t
Stop RFG
RFG enable setp
P1142.CDS
Bring RFG to a standstill
(1)
Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
0.00 ... 650.00 [s] 0.00 ... 650.00 [s]
P1120.DDS (10.00) P1121.DDS (10.00)
RFG enable
P1140.CDS
1 = Enable RFG
(1)
0 = Set RFG to zero fy = 0

POWER ON

PID trim

Function diagrams
Setpoint Channel
Wobble signal

In V/f control dependent on

r1343 (see FP6100)
2-357

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint Channel 5300_RFG.vsd Function diagram
- 5300 -
Ramp Function Generator 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
V/f Control

2.9 V/f Control

Function diagrams

6100 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM240 2-359

6200 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM250/PM260 2-360

2-358 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Fig. 2-42
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P1240 P1335 P1338

P1200
Vdmax Slip Resonance
6100 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM240

Flying start
controller compensation damping

FP 4600
f(VDC)
Act. outp. freq [Hz]

active

active
r0024 3
from AFM + +
RFG
+ + + Frequency output to
modulator
r0021
r1119 Act. filt. freq. [Hz] n/f(max) +
r1170 r0063 control reserve
Setp before RFG [Hz]
PID trim Setp. after RFG [Hz] Act. frequency [Hz]

Motor temperature Imax ctrl Foutp [Hz]

Inverter temperature r1343
Imax frequency ctrl.
i2t inverter P1340 Stat MotCtrl
Motor ovl fact [%] Imax controller setpoint P1341
r0056
10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
r0056.13
P0640.DDS (200.0) r0067 + Imax voltage ctrl.
P1345 Imax ctrl Voutp [V]
Outp cur limit [A] P1346
Rated mot. current r1344
0.01 ... 10000.00 [A] Current feedback
P0305.DDS (1.86)
Voltage setp. r0068
P1330.CDS Output current [A] Control mode P1350
(0) 0 ... 22 Voltage
P1300.DDS (0) build-up Act.outp. volt [V]
r0025 4
P1300
V/f characteristic 19
+
FCC
6 + Voltage output to
+ modulator
Voltage boost
P1310 ... P1312

Function diagrams
V/f Control
2-359

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f Control 6100_V_f.vsd Function diagram
- 6100 -
Overview of V/f Control SINAMICS G120 PM240 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-43 P1335 P1338
2-360

V/f Control
Function diagrams
P1200
Slip Resonance
Flying start
compensation damping Act. outp. freq [Hz]
Setp before RFG [Hz] Setp. after RFG [Hz]

active
r0024
r1119 r1170
+ +
6200 – Overview of V/f Control for inverters with PM250/PM260

from AFM
RFG
+ + Frequency output to
modulator
Vdc ctrl outp. lim
0.00 ... 600.00 [Hz] r0021 n/f(max) +
P1253.DDS ( 10.00) Act. filt. freq. [Hz] control reserve
r0063
Act. frequency [Hz]

Act fil. power 0 1

r0032 Detect
regeneration

Motor ovl fact [%]

10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
Motor temperatur Imax ctrl Foutp [Hz]
P0640.DDS (200.0)
Inverter temperatur Imax frequency ctrl. r1343
i2t inverter P1340 Stat MotCtrl
0 P1341
Imax controller setpoint
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

r0056
Imax voltage ctrl. r0056.13
1 r0067 + P1345 Imax ctrl Voutp [V]
Rated mot. current Outp cur limit [A] P1346
0.01 ... 10000.00 [A] r1344
P0305.DDS (1.86) Current feedback

r0068
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Output current [A] Control mode P1350

0 ... 22 Voltage
P1300.DDS (0) build-up Act.outp. volt [V]
Voltage setp. r0025
Pmax P1300 P1330.CDS
⋅ P0305 V/f characteristic (0) 19
r 0032 +
FCC
6 + Voltage output to
+ modulator
Voltage boost
P1310 ... P1312

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f Control 6200_V_f.vsd Function diagram
- 6200 -
Overview of V/f Control SINAMICS G120 PM250/PM260 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Function diagrams
Vector Control

2.10 Vector Control

Function diagrams

7000 – Overview of Speed Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0 2-362

7010 – Overview of Speed Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0 2-363

7200 – Overview of Torque Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 22/20 & P1501 = 1 2-364

7210 – Overview of Torque Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 23/21 & P1501 = 1 2-365

7500 – Speed Controller without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0 2-366

7510 – Speed Controller with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0 2-367

7700 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation without Encoder (SLVC) 2-368

7710 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation with Encoder (VC) 2-369

7800 – Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC) 2-370

7900 – Current Controller & Observer Model without Encoder (SLVC) 2-371

7910 – Current Controller & Observer Model with Encoder (VC) 2-372

8000 – Analog outputs and display values 2-373

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 2-361

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Speed control Torque/current limit Current control, Modulator
Fig. 2-44 Flux setpoint Observer model
2-362

Vector Control
Function diagrams
Sheet 7500 Sheet 7700 Sheet 7900

Upper trq. lim Motoring power lim

-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] 0.0 ... 8000.0
P1520.DDS (5.13) P1530.DDS (0.75)Regener. power lim
-8000.0 ... 0.0
7000 – Overview of Speed Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0

P1531.DDS (-0.75)
Upper trq. lim
Lower trq. lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] P1522.CDS
P1521.DDS (-5.13) (1520[0])
Lower trq. lim
P1523.CDS Int.time cur. ctrl
Torque 6
(1521[0]) 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms]
limitation
Scal. low trq. lim P1717.DDS (4.1) Act. Vdc [V]
-400.0 ... 400.0 [%]
Gain n-ctrl (SLVC) Tn of n-ctrl. SLVC Gain current ctrl. r0070
P1525.DDS (100.0) Motor ovl fact [%]
Max. frequency 0.0 ... 2000.0 25 ... 32001 [ms] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] 0.00 ... 5.00 4 5
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 P1470.DDS (3.0) P1472.DDS (400) P1715.DDS (0.25)
P0640.DDS (200.0) Act. outp.volt [V] Output current [A]
P1082.DDS (50.00) Setp. after RFG [Hz] Torque setp. [Nm]
r0072 r0068
r1170 r1508
Setpoint x
channel y
– –

Max. frequency Freq. setpoint [Hz] Act. filt freq [Hz] r0077
Sheet 7800 Fval flux setp
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] r0062 r1445 Cur. setp. Isq [A] Voltage
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

50.0 ... 200.0 [%] Max. outp.volt [V]

P1082.DDS (50.00) Asyc.
P1570.DDS (100.0) r0071 Mot. 3~
Kp Tn
Act.spd.filt. SLVC
Scal acc. prectrl. Efficiency optimiz
2 ... 32000 [ms]
0.0 ... 400.0 [%] 0 ... 100 [%]
P1452.DDS (2)
P1496.DDS (0.0) P1580.DDS (0) Pulse frequency
Tot/mot inert.rat. Cont. torque boost – 2 ... 16 [KHz]
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] P1800.DDS (4)
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

1.000 ... 400.000

Note P0342.DDS (1.000) P1610.DDS (50.0)
The current injection of P1610 is Acc trq boost SLVC r0075
only calculated when the observer Inertia [kg*m^2] 30 ms Cur. setp. Isd [A]
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
model is off. 0.00010 ... 1000.00000 P1611.DDS (0.0)
P0341.DDS (0.00180)
r0066 3
r0050 = act. command data set (CDS) + + Act. outp freq [Hz]
r0051.1 = act. drive data set (DDS) r0063 Act. frequency [Hz] Observer
Current
r0065 model
2 model
Slip frequency [%]
Kp n-adapt. (SLVC)
Tn n-adapt. (SLVC)
0.0 ... 2.5
1.0 ... 200.0 [ms]
P1764.DDS (0.2)
P1767.DDS (4.0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7000.vsd Function diagram
- 7000 -
Speed Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 0 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Speed control Torque/current limit Current control, Modulator
Fig. 2-45
Flux setpoint Observer model
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Sheet 7510 Sheet 7710 Sheet 7910

Upper trq. lim Motoring power lim

-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] 0.0 ... 8000.0
P1520.DDS (5.13) P1530.DDS (0.75)Regener. power lim
-8000.0 ... 0.0
7010 – Overview of Speed Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0

P1531.DDS (-0.75)
Upper trq. lim
Lower trq. lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] P1522.CDS
P1521.DDS (-5.13) (1520[0])
Lower trq. lim
P1523.CDS Int.time cur. ctrl
Torque 6
(1521[0]) 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms]
limitation
Scal. low trq. lim P1717.DDS (4.1) Act. Vdc [V]
-400.0 ... 400.0 [%]
Gain of n-ctrl. Tn of n-ctrl. Motor ovl fact [%] Gain current ctrl. r0070
P1525.DDS (100.0)
Max. frequency 1 0.0 ... 2000.0 25 ... 32001 [ms] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] 0.00 ... 5.00 4 5
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P1460.DDS (3.0) P1462.DDS (400) P0640.DDS (200.0) P1715.DDS (0.25)
Act. outp.volt [V] Output current [A]
P1082.DDS (50.00) Setp. after RFG [Hz] Torque setp. [Nm]
r0072 r0068
r1170 r1508
Setpoint x
channel y
– –
Max. frequency Act. filt freq [Hz] r0077
Sheet 7800
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] r1445 Cur. setp. Isq [A] Voltage
P1082.DDS (50.00) Asyc.
Fval flux setp Mot. 3~
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] Max. outp.volt [V] Kp Tn
P1570.DDS (100.0) r0071
Filter time n_act. Scal acc. prectrl.
2 ... 32000 [ms] 0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P1442.DDS (2) P1496.DDS (0.0) Pulse frequency
Efficiency optimiz
Act rotor speed [Hz] Tot/mot inert.rat. 0 ... 100 [%] – 2 ... 16 [KHz]
r0061 1.000 ... 400.000 P1580.DDS (0) P1800.DDS (4)
Encoder P0342.DDS (1.000)
r0075
Inertia [kg*m^2]
0.00010 ... 1000.00000 Cur. setp. Isd [A]
Note P0341.DDS (0.00180)
The current injection of P1610 is r0066 3
only calculated when the observer + + Act. outp freq [Hz]
model is off.
r0063 Act. frequency [Hz] Observer
Current

Function diagrams
r0065 model
model
r0050 = act. command data set (CDS)
2 Slip frequency [%]

Vector Control
r0051.1 = act. drive data set (DDS) Kp n-adapt. (SLVC)
Tn n-adapt. (SLVC)
0.0 ... 2.5
1.0 ... 200.0 [ms]
P1764.DDS (0.2)
P1767.DDS (4.0)
2-363

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7010.vsd Function diagram
- 7010 -
Speed Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 0 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Torque/current limit Current control, Modulator
Fig. 2-46
Flux setpoint Observer model
2-364

Vector Control
Function diagrams
Sheet 7700 Sheet 7900
Lower trq. lim Upper trq. lim Motoring power lim Regener. power lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] -99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm]
0.0 ... 8000.0 -8000.0 ... 0.0
P1521.DDS (-5.13) P1520.DDS (5.13) P1530.DDS (0.75) P1531.DDS (-0.75)
Upper trq. lim
7200 – Overview of Torque Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 22/20 & P1501 = 1

P1522.CDS
(1520[0])
Lower trq. lim r1539
Torque limitation
P1523.CDS Total lw TrqLim [Nm]
(1521[0])

r0067 Total up TrqLim [Nm] Int.time cur. ctrl *)

Add. trq. setp [Nm] Outp cur limit [A] 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms] 6
Scal. low trq. lim r1538
*) P1717.DDS (4.1) Act. Vdc [V]
Add. trq. setp r1515 -400.0 ... 400.0 [%] Motor ovl fact [%]
P1511.CDS P1525.DDS (100.0) 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] Gain current ctrl. *) r0070
(0) P0640.DDS (200.0) Total trq setp [Nm] 0.00 ... 5.00 4 5
P1715.DDS (0.25)
r0079 Act. outp.volt [V] Output current [A]
r1538
Torque setp. *) r0072 r0068
P1503.CDS
x
(0)
y
–
Torque setp. [Nm]
r1539 Sheet 7800 Fval flux setp r0030
r1508
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] Max. outp.volt [V] Torque gen.cur [A] Voltage
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Asyc.
P1570.DDS (100.0) r0071 Mot. 3~
Kp Tn
Tot/mot inert.rat. Inertia [kg*m^2]
Efficiency optimiz
1.000 ... 400.000 0.00010 ... 1000.00000
0 ... 100 [%]
P0342.DDS (1.000) P0341.DDS (0.00180) Pulse frequency
P1580.DDS (0)
Max. frequency Cont. torque boost – 2 ... 16 [KHz]
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.0 ... 200.0 [%] P1800.DDS (4)
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

P1082.DDS (50.00) P1610.DDS (50.0)

Act. frequency [Hz] Acc trq boost SLVC r0029
30 ms Flux gen. cur. [A]
r0063 0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
P1611.DDS (0.0)
–
r0066 3
Max. frequency
+ + Act. outp freq [Hz]
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 2 Observer
P1082.DDS (50.00) Current
Scal acc. trq ctrl r0065 model
model
0.0 ... 400.0 [%] Slip frequency [%]
*) settable via P1500 P1499.DDS (100.0)
**) The speed integrator doesn't work in Kp n-adapt. (SLVC) *) Tn n-adapt. (SLVC) *)
the range of the observer model 0.0 ... 2.5 1.0 ... 200.0 [ms]
P1764.DDS (0.2) P1767.DDS (4.0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7200.vsd Function diagram
- 7200 -
Torque Control without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 22 or P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 1 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Torque/current limit Current control, Modulator
Fig. 2-47
Flux setpoint Observer model
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Sheet 7710 Sheet 7910

Lower trq. lim Upper trq. lim Motoring power lim Regener. power lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] -99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm]
0.0 ... 8000.0 -8000.0 ... 0.0
P1521.DDS (-5.13) P1520.DDS (5.13) P1530.DDS (0.75) P1531.DDS (-0.75)
Upper trq. lim
7210 – Overview of Torque Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 23/21 & P1501 = 1

P1522.CDS
(1520[0])
Lower trq. lim r1539
Torque limitation
P1523.CDS Total lw TrqLim [Nm]
(1521[0])

r0067 Total up TrqLim [Nm] Int.time cur. ctrl *)

Add. trq. setp [Nm] Outp cur limit [A] 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms] 6
Scal. low trq. lim r1538
*) P1717.DDS (4.1) Act. Vdc [V]
Add. trq. setp r1515 -400.0 ... 400.0 [%] Motor ovl fact [%]
P1511.CDS P1525.DDS (100.0) 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] Gain current ctrl. *) r0070
(0) P0640.DDS (200.0) Total trq setp [Nm] 0.00 ... 5.00 4 5
P1715.DDS (0.25)
r0079 Act. outp.volt [V] Output current [A]
r1538
Torque setp. *) r0072 r0068
P1503.CDS
x
(0)
y
–
Torque setp. [Nm]
r1539 Sheet 7800 r0077
r1508
Cur. setp. Isq [A] Voltage
Asyc.
Fval flux setp
Mot. 3~
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] Max. outp.volt [V] Kp Tn
P1570.DDS (100.0) r0071

Efficiency optimiz Pulse frequency

0 ... 100 [%] – 2 ... 16 [KHz]
P1580.DDS (0) P1800.DDS (4)

Act rotor speed [Hz] Act. frequency [Hz] r0075

r0061 r0063 Cur. setp. Isd [A]
2
Encoder
r0066 3
+ + Act. outp freq [Hz]
Observer

Function diagrams
Current
r0065 model
model
Slip frequency [%]

Vector Control
*) settable via P1500
**) The speed integrator doesn't work in Kp n-adapt. (SLVC) *) Tn n-adapt. (SLVC) *)
the range of the observer model 0.0 ... 2.5 1.0 ... 200.0 [ms]
P1764.DDS (0.2) P1767.DDS (4.0)
2-365

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7210.vsd Function diagram
- 7210 -
Torque Control with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 23 or P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 1 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 FP7700
Torque limitation b

Fig. 2-48
r1508 FP7700
2-366

Vector Control
Function diagrams
Torque limitation a
r0079
Droop input source
0 ... 3
Droop scaling P1488.DDS (0)
7500 – Speed Controller without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 & P1501 = 0

0.00 ... 0.50

Enable droop P1489.DDS (0.05) 0
Droop freq. [Hz]
P1492.CDS 0
r1490
(0)
1
1
150 ms 2

0 3
0
Forward speed
Observer model
Inertia [kg*m^2] Tot/mot inert.rat. FP7900
0.00010 ... 1000.00000 1.000 ... 400.000
P0341.DDS (0.00180) P0342.DDS (1.000)

Accel. torque [Nm]

r1518
Speed precontrol
Torque limitation
FP7700
Gain n-ctrl (SLVC) *) Tn of n-ctrl. SLVC *)
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Freq. setp ctl [Hz] 0.0 ... 2000.0 25 ... 32001 [ms]
Scal acc. prectrl. P1470.DDS (3.0) P1472.DDS (400)
r1438 Int.outp n-ctrl [Nm]
0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P1496.DDS (0.0) Dev. freq ctrl [Hz] r1538 r1482
r0064
Kp Tn
1 0
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Ramp generator r1539

>0 Speed controller output
Torque limitation
Resultant max freq [Hz] r0062 FP7700
r1084 Freq. setpoint [Hz] Set integrator
Act.spd.filt. SLVC
2 ... 32000 [ms] P1477.CDS
Config. of n-ctrl.
P1452.DDS (2) (0)
- ... -
Act. frequency [Hz] Act. filt freq [Hz]
Set int. value P1400.DDS (0001 bin)
r0063 r1445
P1478.CDS
Speed from observer model (0)

Sheet 7900

*) changeable in run via DDS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7500_SLVC.vsd Function diagram
- 7500 -
Speed Controller without Encoder (SLVC): P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 0 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 FP7710
Torque limitation b

Fig. 2-49
r1508 FP7710
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Torque limitation a
r0079
Droop input source
0 ... 3
Droop scaling P1488.DDS (0)
7510 – Speed Controller with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 & P1501 = 0

0.00 ... 0.50

P1489.DDS (0.05) 0
Enable droop Droop freq. [Hz]
0
P1492.CDS r1490
(0) 1
1
150 ms 2

0 3
0
Inertia [kg*m^2] Tot/mot inert.rat.
0.00010 ... 1000.00000 1.000 ... 400.000
P0341.DDS (0.00180) P0342.DDS (1.000)
Accel. torque [Nm]
r1518
Speed precontrol
Torque limitation
FP7710
Gain of n-ctrl. *) Tn of n-ctrl. *)
Freq. setp ctl [Hz] 0.0 ... 2000.0 25 ... 32001 [ms]
Scal acc. prectrl. P1460.DDS (3.0) P1462.DDS (400)
r1438 Int.outp n-ctrl [Nm]
0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P1496.DDS (0.0) Dev. freq ctrl [Hz] r1538 r1482
r0064
Kp Tn
1 0

Ramp generator r1539

>0 Speed controller output
Torque limitation
Resultant max freq [Hz] r0062 FP7710
r1084 Freq. setpoint [Hz] Set integrator
Filter time n_act.
2 ... 32000 [ms] P1477.CDS
Config. of n-ctrl.
P1442.DDS (2) (0)
- ... -
Act rotor speed [Hz] Act. frequency [Hz] Act. filt freq [Hz]
Set int. value P1400.DDS (0001 bin)
r0061 r0063 r1445
P1478.CDS

Function diagrams
Speed measurement (0)

Vector Control
Forward speed
Observer model
FP7910
*) changeable in run via DDS
2-367

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7510_VC.vsd Function diagram
- 7510 -
Speed Controller with Encoder (VC): P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 0 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Scal acc. trq ctrl
Add. trq. setp *) Add. trq. setp [Nm] 0.0 ... 400.0 [%] Resultant max freq [Hz]

Fig. 2-50
r1515 P1499.DDS (100.0) r1084
P1511.CDS
2-368

Vector Control
Function diagrams
(0)
Accel. torque [Nm]
Speed precontrol 0 r1518 enable
FP7500
Forward speed
0
7700 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation without Encoder (SLVC)

Change > torq ctrl 1

Observer model
P1501.CDS FP7900
(0)

Torque setp. *) Stat 2 ctrl

r1538
P1503.CDS r1407 FP7500
1 r1407.8 Inertia [kg*m^2] Tot/mot inert.rat.
(0) b
0.00010 ... 1000.00000 1.000 ... 400.000
P0341.DDS (0.00180) P0342.DDS (1.000)
Speed controller output 0 r1407 Stat 2 ctrl
r1407.9 r1508
r1539 r1407
FP7500 Torque setp. [Nm]
Rated mot. current Stat 2 ctrl r1407.8
Motor temperature
0.01 ... 10000.00 [A] Inverter temperature Outp cur limit [A]
P0305.DDS (1.86) FP7900
i2t inverter r0067 Current control
Motor ovl fact [%] Imax and FP7500
10.0 ... 400.0 [%] a
P0640.DDS (200.0) Motor stall
r0079
protection
Flux setpoint Id Total trq setp [Nm]
Upper trq. lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] r1407
Upper trq. lim [Nm]
P1520.DDS (5.13) Upper trq. lim r1407.9
r1526
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

P1522.CDS Stat 2 ctrl

(1520[0])
r1538
MIN
+ Total up TrqLim [Nm]
Regener. power lim Power limitation
-8000.0 ... 0.0
P1531.DDS (-0.75) Speed limitation
controller
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Motoring power lim M [Nm] =

(only for torque
Scal. low trq. lim 0.0 ... 8000.0 1000 ⋅ P [kW] control)
Lower trq. lim -400.0 ... 400.0 [%] P1530.DDS (0.75) 2 ⋅ ⋅f
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] P1525.DDS (100.0)
P1521.DDS (-5.13) act. frequency -1
Lower trq. lim
P1523.CDS MAX
r1539
(1521[0])
Total lw TrqLim [Nm]
r1527
Max trq mot cur [A]
Lower trq. lim [Nm]
MIN r1536

MAX r1537
*) selectable with P1500 Max trq reg cur [A]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7700_TC.vsd Function diagram
- 7700 -
Torque Control & Limitation without Encoder (SLVC) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Fig. 2-51
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Accel. torque [Nm]

Speed precontrol 0 r1518
FP7510
0
7710 – Torque Control and Torque Limitation with Encoder (VC)

Change > torq ctrl 1

P1501.CDS
(0) Stat 2 ctrl
r1407
Torque setp. *) Stat 2 ctrl r1407.8
r1538
P1503.CDS r1407 FP7510
1 r1407.8 FP7910
(0) b Current control
and FP7500
Speed controller output 0 r1407 a
r1407.9 r1508
r1539 r0079
FP7510 Torque setp. [Nm]
Rated mot. current Stat 2 ctrl Total trq setp [Nm]
Motor temperature
0.01 ... 10000.00 [A] Inverter temperature Outp cur limit [A]
P0305.DDS (1.86) r1407
i2t inverter r0067 r1407.9
Motor ovl fact [%] Imax Stat 2 ctrl
10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P0640.DDS (200.0) Motor stall
protection
Flux setpoint Id
Upper trq. lim
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm]
Upper trq. lim [Nm]
P1520.DDS (5.13) Upper trq. lim r1526
P1522.CDS
(1520[0])
r1538
MIN
+ Total up TrqLim [Nm]
Regener. power lim Power limitation
-8000.0 ... 0.0
P1531.DDS (-0.75) Speed limitation
M [Nm] = controller
Motoring power lim (only for torque
Scal. low trq. lim 0.0 ... 8000.0 1000 ⋅ P [kW] control)
Lower trq. lim -400.0 ... 400.0 [%] P1530.DDS (0.75) 2 ⋅ ⋅f
-99999.00 ... 99999.00 [Nm] P1525.DDS (100.0)
P1521.DDS (-5.13) act. frequency -1
Lower trq. lim
P1523.CDS MAX
r1539
(1521[0])
Total lw TrqLim [Nm]

Function diagrams
r1527
Max trq mot cur [A]
Lower trq. lim [Nm]

Vector Control
MIN r1536

MAX r1537
*) selectable with P1500 Max trq reg cur [A]
2-369

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7710_TC.vsd Function diagram
- 7710 -
Torque Control & Limitation with Encoder (VC) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Int.time weak.ctrl Stat MotCtrl
20 ... 32001 [ms] r0056

Fig. 2-52
Max. modulation Dyn. volt headroom
20.0 ... 150.0 [%] 0 ... 150 [V] P1596.DDS (50) r0056
2-370

Vector Control
Function diagrams
P1803.DDS (106.0) P1574.DDS (10)
Max. outp.volt [V]
0
r0071
Act. fil. Vdc [V] Outp.weak. ctrl [%]
r0026 2 : r1597
7800 – Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC)

Vdc measurement
Vsetp. 2
Current control
Fval flux setp Stat MotCtrl
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] Field weakening
r0056 controller
P1570.DDS (100.0)
r0056
Magnetization time
0.000 ... 20.000 [s]
P0346.DDS (1.000)
Stat MotCtrl
Act. frequency r0056
1 r0056

Field weakening Motor model StatWd

characteristic r1751
r1751
Total flux setp [%] Cur. setp. Isd [A]
r1598 r0075
0
Efficiency optimiz MIN Id
0 ... 100 [%] Current control and
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

1 stall protection
P1580.DDS (0)
Torque current r1583 (see FP7900, FP7910)
Flux setp. Tsmooth
isq Smoothed setp. [%]
4 ... 500 [ms] Saturation characteristic
Efficiency optimization
P1582.DDS (15) P0362 ... P0369

Rotor time const. [ms]

Cont. torque boost r0384.DDS
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

0.0 ... 200.0 [%]

P1610.DDS (50.0)

Acc trq boost SLVC

0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
P1611.DDS (0.0) Flux
Torque setp. [Nm] x2 -y 2 setpoint
30 ms generation
r1508
Speed control

Rated magnet. cur. [A]

r0331.DDS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7800_VC.vsd Function diagram
- 7800 -
Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Tot.leak.react.[%] [%] Field weakening control

Fig. 2-53
r0377.DDS FP7800
Total stat.res [%]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Act modulation [%]

r0395
: r0074
Act. Vdc [V]
Rotor flux 2
r0070
Act. outp.volt [V]
7900 – Current Controller & Observer Model without Encoder (SLVC)

Voltage precontrol Decoupl. volt [V] r0072

r1728 Stat MotCtrl Pulse frequency [KHz]
r0056 r1801 2
r1725 Int. outp. Isd [V] r0056
Cur. setp. Isd [A] Stat MotCtrl
r1724
r0075 Kp Tn r0056
r0071
Outp. Isd ctrl [V] r0056
Flux setpoint Id r1723
Vd K
FP7800 Vset P1800
Cur. setp. Isq [A] Act. cur. Isd [A]
Int. outp. Isq [V] Outp. Isq ctrl [V] P1802
r0077 r0076
r1719 r1718 P1820 Modulator
id controller Vq
P
Gain current ctrl. Int.time cur. ctrl P1825
0.00 ... 5.00 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms] P1755 P1826
Isq setp. Tsmooth P1715.DDS (0.25) P1717.DDS (4.1)
P1756
2.0 ... 20.0 [ms]
P1654.DDS (6.0) Act. cur. Isq [A] P1758 Model control
r0078
Rotor flux Kp Tn P1759
Transf. angle [°]
Torque
limitation r0094
FP7700
:
+ r0395
r0079 r0396 Slip determi-
Total trq setp [Nm] nation
isq(VDC) r1751
iq controller P1750
FP4600 r1782
P1780
Observer r1787 Slip frequency [%] Act. outp freq [Hz]
Act. phase cur [A] P1781 model
r0084 r0065 r0066
r0069 6 P1786
Int. outp n-ad [Hz]
iR Kp Tn r1771 Act. frequency [Hz]
Trans-
Current Act. phase cur [A] r0063
measurement forma- Prop outp n-ad [Hz]
r0069 6 tion Output current [A]

Function diagrams
iS r1770 Oscillation
r0068 damping

Vector Control
Forward speed
Speed or torque control Kp n-adapt. (SLVC) Tn n-adapt. (SLVC) Oscill. damp. gain
r0062 0.0 ... 2.5 1.0 ... 200.0 [ms] 0.000 ... 10.000
FP7500
P1764.DDS (0.2) P1767.DDS (4.0) P1740 (0.000)
Freq. setpoint [Hz] Speed to speed
2-371

controller FP7500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7900_MM.vsd Function diagram
- 7900 -
Current Controller & Observer Model without Encoder (SLVC) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Tot.leak.react.[%] [%] Field weakening control

Fig. 2-54
r0377.DDS FP7800
Total stat.res [%]
2-372

Vector Control
Function diagrams
Act modulation [%]
r0395
: r0074
Act. Vdc [V]
Rotor flux 2
r0070
Act. outp.volt [V]
7910 – Current Controller & Observer Model with Encoder (VC)

Voltage precontrol Decoupl. volt [V] r0072

r1728 Stat MotCtrl Pulse frequency [KHz]

r0056 r1801 2
r1725 Int. outp. Isd [V] r0056
Cur. setp. Isd [A] Stat MotCtrl
r1724
r0075 Kp Tn r0056
r0071
Outp. Isd ctrl [V] r0056
Flux setpoint Id r1723
Vd K
FP7800 Vset P1800
Cur. setp. Isq [A] Act. cur. Isd [A] P1802
r0076 Int. outp. Isq [V] Outp. Isq ctrl [V]
r0077 P1820
r1719 r1718 Modulator
id controller Vq
P
Gain current ctrl. Int.time cur. ctrl P1825
0.00 ... 5.00 1.0 ... 50.0 [ms] P1755 P1826
Isq setp. Tsmooth P1715.DDS (0.25) P1717.DDS (4.1)
P1756
2.0 ... 20.0 [ms]
P1654.DDS (6.0) Act. cur. Isq [A] P1758 Model control
r0078
Rotor flux Kp Tn P1759 Transf. angle [°]
SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007

Torque r0094
limitation
FP7710
:
+ r0395
r0079 r0396 Slip determi-
Total trq setp [Nm] nation
isq(VDC) P1750 r1751
iq controller
FP4600 P1780 r1782
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Observer r1787 Slip frequency [%] Act. outp freq [Hz]

Act. phase cur [A] P1781 model r0065 r0066
r0069 6 r0084
P1786
Int. outp n-ad [Hz]
iR Kp Tn r1771
Trans-
Current Act. phase cur [A]
measurement forma- Prop outp n-ad [Hz]
r0069 6 tion Output current [A]
iS r1770 Oscillation
r0068 damping

Forward speed
Speed control Kp n-adapt. (SLVC) Tn n-adapt. (SLVC)
Oscill. damp. gain
r0061 r0063 0.0 ... 2.5 1.0 ... 200.0 [ms]
FP7510 0.000 ... 10.000
P1764.DDS (0.2) P1767.DDS (4.0)
Act rotor speed [Hz] Act. frequency [Hz] P1740 (0.000)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector Control 7910_MM.vsd Function diagram
- 7910 -
Current Controller & Observer Model with Encoder (VC) 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
 Display values Analogue outputs Sheet 2300

Fig. 2-55 AO1 characteristic **)

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

Value x1:AO scal. Value y2:AO scal.

1 Setp. after RFG [Hz] -99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%] 0 ... 20
r1170 P0777 [2] (0.0) P0780 [2] (20)

.
.
.
from sheet Act fil rotorspeed [RPM]
5200 160 ms AO
r0022
8000 – Analog outputs and display values

Act. filt. freq. [Hz] P0771 [2] D

x y
r0021 (21[0]) y = f(x) 12
AO1
A V or 0 ... 20 mA 13
2 Act. frequency [Hz]
r0063 AO2 characteristic **)
from sheet 160 ms Value x1:AO scal. Value y2:AO scal.
6100
Act. outp. freq [Hz] -99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%] 0 ... 20
r0024 P0777 [2] (0.0) P0780 [2] (20)

.
.
.
AO
3 Act. outp freq [Hz]
P0771 [2] D
r0066 x y
from sheet (21[0]) y = f(x) 26
6100
160 ms AO2
A 0 ... 20 mA 27
Act.outp. volt [V]
r0025

4 Act. outp.volt [V]

r0072
from sheet
6100 30 ms
Act fil. power
Reference Parameters
r0032 P2000 ... P2004
PZD signals
P0095 [10]
30 ms
(0) .00
Act fil torque [Nm] .
Displays PZD
r0031
.
. % signals in [%]
.09
r0096.0 ... .9
Act. torque [Nm]
r0080
400 ms
Act. outp. cur [A]
r0027

5 Output current [A]

r0068
from sheet
30 ms

Function diagrams
7900
Act. fil. Vdc [V] **) Reference values
r0026 2 P2000 = Reference frequency

Vector Control
P2001 = Reference voltage
Act. Vdc [V] P2002 = Reference current
6 P2004 = Reference power
r0070
2-373

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8000.vsd Function diagram
- 8000 -
Analog outputs and display values 29.08.2007 V3.0/3.1 SINAMICS G120
Function diagrams
Vector Control

2-374 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Faults and Alarms 3
Contents

3.1 Faults and Alarms – Overview 3-376

3.2 List of Fault and Alarm messages 3-377

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-375

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Faults and Alarms
Faults and Alarms – Overview

3.1 Faults and Alarms – Overview

Fault messages
In the event of a fault, the inverter stops with the preset reaction (refer to „Reac-
tion:“ in Section 3.2) and changes to the state „fault“. If there are reactions in
brackets it is possible to change to this fault reaction via parameters P2100 and
P2101.
Fault messages are stored in parameter r0947 under their code number (e.g.
F0003 = 3). The associated error value is found in parameter r0949. The value 0
is entered if a fault has no error value. It is furthermore possible to read out the
point in time that a fault occurred (r0948) and the number of fault messages
(P0952) stored in Parameter r0947.

Fault acknowledge
To reset the fault, one of the methods listed below can be used:
1. Cycle the power to the drive
2. Press the Button on the OP
3. Via a Digital Input (factory setting: DI2)
4. Via control word 1, bit 07

Safety Fault acknowledge

1. Set control word 1, bit 00 to 0
2. Set control word 1, bit 07 to 1
Exception: F00395, F01601. For acknowledgement see description of the fault.

Alarm messages
Alarm messages are stored in parameter r2110 under their code number (e.g.
A0503 = 503) and can be read out from there.

3-376 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

3.2 List of Fault and Alarm messages

Product: G120, Version: 3102700, Language: eng

F00001 (N) Overcurrent

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Motor power (p0307) does not correspond to the inverter power (r0206)
• Motor lead short circuit
• Earth faults
Remedy: Check the following:
• Motor power (p0307) must correspond to inverter power (r0206).
• Cable length limits must not be exceeded.
• Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or earth faults
• Motor parameters must match the motor in use
• Value of stator resistance (p0350) must be correct
• Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded
• Increase Ramp-up time (p1120)
• Reduce Starting boost level (p1312)
Note: • r0949 = 0: HW reported
• r0949 = 1: SW reported

F00002 Overvoltage
Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Main supply voltage too high
• Motor is in regenerative mode
Remedy: Check the following:
• Supply voltage (p0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate .
• Vdc controller must be enabled (p1240) and parameterized properly.
• Ramp-down time (p1121) must match inertia of load.
• Required braking power must lie within specified limits.
Note: Regenerative mode can be caused by fast ramp downs or if the motor is driven by an active load.
• r0949 = 0: HW reported
• r0949 = 1 or 2: SW reported
Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; otherwise, apply braking resistor.

F00003 Undervoltage
Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Main supply failed.
• Shock load outside specified limits.
Remedy: Check Supply voltage (p0210).
Note: • r0949 = 0: HW reported
• r0949 = 1 or 2: SW reported

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-377

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00004 Inverter Over Temperature

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Inverter overloaded
• Ventilation inadequate
• Pulse frequency too high
• Ambient temperature too high
• Fan inoperative
Remedy: Check the following:
• Load or load cycle too high?
• Motor power (p0307) must match inverter power (r0206)
• Pulse frequency must be set to default value
• Ambient temperature too high?
• Fan must turn when inverter is running

F00005 Inverter I2T

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Inverter overloaded.
• Load cycle too demanding.
• Motor power (p0307) exceeds inverter power capability (r0206).
Remedy: Check the following:
• Load cycle must lie within specified limits.
• Motor power (p0307) must match inverter power (r0206)

F00006 Chip temperature rise exceeds critical levels.

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Load at start-up is too high
• Load step is too high
• Ramp-up rate is too fast
Remedy: Check the following:
• Load or load step too high?
• Increase ramp-up time (P1120).
• Motor power (p0307) must match inverter power (r0206).
• Use setting P0290 = 0 or 2 for preventing F00006.

F00011 Motor Over Temperature

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Motor overloaded
Remedy: Check the following:
• Load or load step too high?
• Motor nominal overtemperatures (p0626 - p0628) must be correct
• Motor temperature warning level (p0604) must match

3-378 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00015 Motor temperature signal lost

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Open or short circuit of motor temperature sensor. If signal loss is detected, temperature monitoring switches over
to monitoring with the motor thermal model.
Remedy: Check the following:
• the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the control unit
• the setting of p0601

F00020 Mains Phase Missing

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Fault occurs if one of the three input phases are missed and the pulses are enabled and drive is loaded
Remedy: Check the input wiring of the mains phases

F00021 Earth fault

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Fault occurs if the sum of the phase currents is higher than 5 % of the nominal inverter current.
Remedy:
Note: Framesizes D to F: this fault only occurs on inverters that have 3 current sensors.

F00022 Powerstack fault

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: This hardware fault caused by the following events:
• DC-link overcurrent = short circuit of IGBT
• Short circuit of chopper
Remedy: Contact Service Department.
Change inverter power module

F00023 Output phase fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: One output phase is disconnected.
Remedy: Check motor connection.

F00025 F3E Dclink Ripple

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Large ripples on the dclink.
Remedy: Contact Service Department.

F00026 Supply to Gate Driver Not Enabled

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Gate driver not enabled. Can be caused also by a synchronization error of the safety state machines.
Remedy: Contact Service Department.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-379

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00027 Overcurrent on W phase

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: This hardware fault caused by the following events:
• Over current trip on W phase
• Earth Fault
Remedy: Check Inverter and Motor wiring

F00028 Power limit exceeded during regeneration

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Occurs if motor is driven by an active load, causing motor to go into excessive regeneration.
Occurs at very high load inertias, when ramping down.
Remedy: • Reduce regeneration from active load
• Reduce ramp down rate
• Increase Imax regeneration limit in p1253

F00029 EM brake overcurrent

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: •
Remedy:

F00035 Auto restart after n

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Auto restart attempts exceed value of p1211.
Remedy:

3-380 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00041 Motor Data Identification Failure

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Motor data identification failed.
• r0949 = 0: Load missing
• r0949 = 1: Current limit level reached during identification.
• r0949 = 2: Identified stator resistance less than 0.1% or greater than 100%.
• r0949 = 3: Identified rotor resistance less than 0.1% or greater than 100%.
• r0949 = 4: Identified stator reactance less than 50% and greater than 500%
• r0949 = 5: Identified main reactance less than 50% and greater than 500%
• r0949 = 6: Identified rotor time constant less than 10ms or greater than 5s
• r0949 = 7: Identified total leakage reactance less than 5% and greater than 50%
• r0949 = 20: Identified IGBT on-voltage less than 0.5 V or greater than 10 V
• r0949 = 30: Current controller at voltage limit
• r0949 = 40: Inconsistence of identified dataset, at least one identification failed
• r0949 = 41: Writing of calculated magnetizing current P0320 failed
• r0949 = 42: Writing of identified stator resistance failed
• r0949 = 43: Writing of identified rotor resistance P0354 failed
• r0949 = 44: Writing of identified rotor time constant P0622 failed
• r0949 = 45: Writing of identified mutual reactance P0360 failed
• r0949 = 46: Writing of identified stator leakage reactance P0356 failed
• r0949 = 47: Writing of identified rotor leakage reactance P0358 failed
• r0949 = 48: Writing of identified on voltage P1825 failed.
• r0949 = 49: Writing of the identified dead time compensation P1828 failed
Percentage values based on the impedance Zb = Vmot,nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy: Check the following:
• r0949 = 0: is the motor connected to the inverter.
• r0949 = 1-49: are the motor data in p0304 - p0311 correct.
• Check what type of motor wiring is required (star, delta).

F00042 Speed Control Optimisation Failure

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Motor data identification failed.
• r0949 = 0: Time out waiting for stable speed
• r0949 = 1: Inconsistent readings
Remedy: Make sure motor has data been entered correctly.
Motor data identification needs to have been done.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-381

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00051 Parameter EEPROM Fault

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Read or write failure while access to EEPROM.

This can also be caused by the EEPROM being full, too many parameters have been changed.
Remedy: • Must be Power Cycled to cancel this bug as some parameters may not be read correct.
• Factory Reset and new parameterization, if power cycle does not remove fault
• Change inverter control unit
• Change some parameters back to default values if the EEPROM is full, then power cycle
Note: • r0949 = 1: EEPROM Full
• r0949 = 1000 + Block No: Reading data block failed
• r0949 = 2000 + Block No: Reading data block timeout
• r0949 = 3000 + Block No: Reading data block CRC failed
• r0949 = 4000 + Block No: Wrinting data block failed
• r0949 = 5000 + Block No: Writing data block timeout
• r0949 = 6000 + Block No: writing data block verify failed
• r0949 = 7000 + Block No: Reading data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 8000 + Block No: writing data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 9000 + Block No: Factory Reset did not work becuase restart or power failure

3-382 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00052 power stack Fault

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Read failure for power stack information or invalid data.
Remedy: • Check connection between inverter power module and inverter control unit
• Powercycle inverter Control Unit.
• Change inverter Power Module.
• Change inverter Control Unit.
Note: • r0949 = 1: Failed reading PS identity
• r0949 = 2: PS identity wrong
• r0949 = 3: Failed reading PS version
• r0949 = 4: PS version wrong
• r0949 = 5: Start of Part 1 PS data wrong
• r0949 = 6: PS number of temp. sensor wrong
• r0949 = 7: PS number of application wrong
• r0949 = 8: Start of Part 3 PS data wrong
• r0949 = 9: Reading PS data string wrong
• r0949 = 10: PS CRC failed
• r0949 = 11: PS is blank
• r0949 = 15: Failed CRC of PS block 0
• r0949 = 16: Failed CRC of PS block 1
• r0949 = 17: Failed CRC of PS block 2
• r0949 = 20: PS invalid
• r0949 = 30: Directory size wrong
• r0949 = 31: Directory ID wrong
• r0949 = 32: Invalid block
• r0949 = 33: File size wrong
• r0949 = 34: Data section size wrong
• r0949 = 35: Block section size wrong
• r0949 = 36: RAM size exceded
• r0949 = 37: Parameter size wrong
• r0949 = 38: Device header wrong
• r0949 = 39: Invalid file file pointer
• r0949 = 40: Scaling block version wrong
• r0949 = 41: Calibration block version wrong
• r0949 = 50: Wrong serial number format
• r0949 = 51: Wromg serial number format start
• r0949 = 52: Wromg serial number format end
• r0949 = 53: Wromg serial number format month
• r0949 = 54: Wromg serial number format day
• r0949 = 1000 + addr: PS read data failed
• r0949 = 2000 + addr: PS write data failed
• r0949 = 3000 + addr: PS read data wrong time
• r0949 = 4000 + addr: PS write data wrong time
• r0949 = 5000 + addr: PS read data invalid
• r0949 = 6000 + addr: PS read data invalid

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-383

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00055 BOP-EEPROM Fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Read or write failure while saving non-volatile parameter to EEPROM on BOP whilst parameter cloning.
Remedy: • Factory Reset and new parameterization
• Change BOP
• r0949 = 5096 : Use a BOP with a bigger EEPROM
• r0949 = 9160 : Use a BOP with a smaller EEPROM
Note: • r0949 = 1000 + Block No: Reading data block failed
• r0949 = 3000 + Block No: Reading data block CRC failed
• r0949 = 4000 + Block No: Writing data block failed
• r0949 = 5096 : BOP EEPROM too Small
• r0949 = 6000 + Block No: writing data block verify failed
• r0949 = 7000 + Block No: Reading data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 8000 + Block No: writing data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 9160 : Drive EEPROM too Small

F00056 BOP not fitted

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Trying to initiate parameter cloning without BOP fitted.
Remedy: Fit BOP and try again.

F00057 BOP fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Parameter cloning with empty BOP.
• Parameter cloning with invalid BOP.
Remedy: Download to BOP or replace BOP.

F00058 BOP contents incompatible

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Trying to initiate parameter cloning with BOP created on another type of drive.
Remedy: Download to BOP from this type of drive.

F00060 Asic Timeout

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Internal communications failure
• r0949 = 0: HW reported Link Fail
• r0949 = 1: SW reported Link Fail
Remedy: Check connection between inverter power module and inverter control unit
Fault appears sporadically:
• Communication failure due to EMC problems
• Check - and if necessary - improve EMC
• Use EMC filter
Fault appears immediately when mains voltage is applied and an ON command is given.
• If fault persists, change inverter.
• Contact Service Department.

3-384 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00061 Par Cl. MMC-PS not fitted Fault

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: MMC-PS Cloning Failed.
• r0949 = 0: MMC-PS Not Connected or incorrect MMC-PS Type
• r0949 = 1: MMC-PS cannot write to MMC
• r0949 = 2: MMC-PS File not available
• r0949 = 3: MMC-PS cannot read the file
• r0949 = 4: MMC-PS problems in the clone File ( e.g CRC )
Remedy: • r0949 = 0: Use MMC-PS with FAT12 or FAT16 format or correct MMC-PS Type, or fit an MMC-PS to Drive.
• r0949 = 1: Check MMC ( e.g is MMC full ) - Format MMC again to FAT16
• r0949 = 2: Put the correct named file in the correct directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
• r0949 = 3: Make sure File is accesable. Recreate File if possible
• r0949 = 4: File has been changed - Recreate File

F00062 Par Cl. MMC-PS contents invalid

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: File exists but the contents are not valid Control Word Corruption.
Remedy: Recopy and ensure operation completes.

F00063 Par Cl. MMC-PS contents incompatible

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: File exists but was not the correct drive type.
Remedy: Ensure clone from compatiable drive type.

F00064 Drive attempted to do an automatic clone during startup

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No Clone00.bin File in the correct directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
Remedy: If a automatic clone is required:
- Insert MMC with correct File anc power cycle.

If no automatic clone is required:

- Remove MMC if not needed and power cycle.
- Reset P8458 = 0 and power cycle.

F00070 PLC setpoint fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No setpoint values from PLC during telegram off time
Remedy: • Check and improve - if necessary - the fieldbus specific off time value in p2040 (DP)/p8840 (PN)
• Acknowledge fault
• if fault persists, change inverter control unit

F00071 USS setpoint fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No setpoint values from USS during telegram off time
Remedy: Check and if necessary improve the monitoring time in the STARTER SW while getting the command source.
Check USS master

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-385

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00072 USS Setpoint Fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No setpoint values from USS during telegram off time
Remedy: Check USS master

F00073 Control Panel setpoint fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No setpoint values from Control Panel during telegram off time
Remedy: • Check and improve - if necessary - the value in p3984
• Acknowledge fault
• if fault persists, change inverter control unit

F00080 AI lost Input Signal

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Broken wire
• Signal out of limits
Remedy:

F00085 External Fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: External fault triggered via command input via control word 2, bit 13."
Remedy: • Check P2106.
• Disable control word 2 bit 13 as command source.
• Disable terminal input for fault trigger.

F00090 Encoder feedback loss

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Signal from Encoder lost (check fault value r0949):
• r0949 = 0: Encoder signal lost.
• r0949 = 1: Encoder loss detected due to sudden speed change (i.e. speed change detected on encoder in a
single scan > value in P0492).
• r0949 = 2: Encoder signal lost whilst running at low speed.
• r0949 = 5: Encoder not configured in p0400, but required for sensored control (p1300 = 21 or 23).
• r0949 = 6: Encoder not found, but configured in p0400.
• r0949 = 7: Encoder loss detected due to motor stalled .
Remedy: Stop the inverter.
• r0949 = 2, Increase value of p0494 or reduce value of p1120 and p1121.
• r0949 = 5, select encoder type via p0400.
• r0949 = 5, select SLVC mode (p1300 = 20 or 22).
• r0949 = 7, select SLVC mode (p1300 = 20 or 22).
• Check connections between encoder and inverter.
• Check that encoder not faulty (select p1300 = 0, run at fixed speed, check encoder feedback signal in r0061)
• Increase encoder loss threshold in p0492.

3-386 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00100 Watchdog Reset

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Software Error
Remedy: Contact Service Department.
Change inverter control unit.

F00101 (N) Stack Overflow

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Software error or processor failure.
Remedy: Contact Service Department.
Change inverter control unit

F00221 PID Feedback below min. Value

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: PID Feedback below min. value p2268.
Remedy: • Change value of p2268.
• Adjust feedback gain.

F00222 PID Feedback above max. Value

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: PID feedback above max. value p2267.
Remedy: • Change value of p2267.
• Adjust feedback gain.

F00350 Configuration vector for the drive failed

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: During startup the drive checks if the configuration vector (SZL vector) has been programmed correctly and if hw
matches the programmed vector. If not the drive will trip.

• r0949 = 1: Internal Failure - No HW Configuration Vector available.

• r0949 = 2: Internal Failure - No SW Configuration Vector available.
• r0949 = 11: Internal Failure - CU Code not supported.
• r0949 = 12: Internal Failure - SW Vector not possible.
• r0949 = 13: Wrong power module fitted.
• r0949 > 1000: Internal failure - Wrong IO Board fitted.
Remedy: Internal Failures can not be fixed.
r0949 = 13 - Make sure the right power module is fitted
Note: Fault needs power cycle to be acknowledged.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-387

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00395 Acceptance Test / Confirmation pending

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: This fault occurs after a Powermodul (PM) / Control Unit (CU) Swap or a Startup Clone. It can also be caused by a
faulty read from the EEPROM, see F0051 for more details.
The parameterset after a CU swap or a startup clone could have changed and might not match the application.
This parameterset needs to be checked before the drive can start a motor.
• r0949 = 3/4: Swap of PM/CU
• r0949 = 5: Startup Clone via MMC has been performed
• r0949 = 10: Before the last power up an acceptance test was pending due to a swap or a startup clone.
Remedy: Safety Units:
The fault can be acknowledged by the following procedure:
P0010 = 30
P9761 = Safety password
P7844 = 0
The fault will be cleared automatically and P0010 will be set back to 0
Afterwards an Acceptance Test needs to be performed. Follow the the steps of the Acceptance Log which is part of
the Operating Instructions.

Non Safety Units:

The current parameterset needs to be checked and confirmed by clearing the fault or setting P7844 = 0.

F00400 (N) PROFIBUS: DS101/DB101 (control pannel) failure

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Timeout, trigger fault,...
Remedy: Restart C2 connection.

F00401 (N) Wrong telegram configured in p0922.

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Different configuration in controller and device.
Remedy: • r0949 = 0: Check p0922 and/or PROFINET controller configuration.

F00452 Belt Failure

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Load conditions on motor indicate belt failure or mechanical fault.
• r0949 = 0: trip low torque/speed
• r0949 = 1: trip high torque/speed
Remedy: Check the following:
• No breakage, seizure or obstruction of drive train.
• If using an external speed sensor, check the following parameters for correct function:
• If using the torque envelope, check parameters:
• Apply lubrication if required.

3-388 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F00453 Motor Stalled

Reaction: OFF 2
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • In SLVC or VC (p1300 greater than 20) and Ramp rate too fast
• In SLVC or VC (p1300 greater than 20) and done OFF2 and RUN onto a spinning motor without Flying start
enabled
• In SLVC (p1300 = 20 or 21) and load too large at very low frequency
• In SLVC or VC (p1300 greater than 20) and no motor connected or motor too small for inverter
• In VC, the motor cable phase sequence (U-V-W) and the encoder cable wiring may be wired up incorrectly.
• The speed controller settings are not optimised to the application. This can cause instabilities.
Remedy: • Reduce ramp rate in p1120
• Enable flying start (p1200 equal to 1)
• Increase boost in p1611
• Connect motor or use larger motor for this inverter or use VF mode (p1300 less than 20).
• Correct the wiring to the motor and / or the encoder as required. Confirm the rotation direction in V/f control
mode and compare parameters r0061 and r0021.
• Optimise the speed controller settings (gain and integration time).

A00501 Current Limit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Motor power does not correspond to the inverter power
• Motor leads are too long
• Earth faults
Remedy: Check the following:
• Motor power (P0307) must correspond to inverter power (r0206).
• Cable length limits must not be exceeded.
• Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or earth faults
• Motor parameters must match the motor in use
• Value of stator resistance (P0350) must be correct
• Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded
• Increase Ramp-up time (P1120)
• Reduce Starting boost level (P1312)

A00502 Overvoltage limit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Overvoltage limit is reached. This warning can occur during ramp down, if the Vdc controller is disabled (P1240 = 0).
Remedy: If this warning is displayed permanently, check drive input voltage.

A00503 UnderVoltage Limit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Main supply failed
• Main supply and consequently DC-link voltage (r0026) below specified limit.
Remedy: Check main supply voltage.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-389

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A00504 Inverter OverTemperature

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Warning level of inverter heat sink temperature, warning level of chip junction temperature, or allowed change in tem-
perature on chip junction is exceeded, resulting in pulse frequency reduction and/or output frequency reduction
(depending on parameterization in P0290).
Remedy: Note:
r0037 = 0: Heat sink temperature
r0037 = 1: Chip junction temperature (includes heat sink)
Check the following:
• Ambient temperature must lie within specified limits
• Load conditions and load steps must be appropriate
• Fan must turn when drive is running

A00505 Inverter I2T

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Warning level exceeded, current will be reduced if parameterized (P0610 = 1)
Remedy: Check that load cycle lies within specified limits.

A00506 IGBT junction temperature rise warning

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Overload warning. Difference between heat sink and IGBT junction temperature exceeds warning limits.
Remedy: Check that load steps and shock loads lie within specified limits.

A00507 Inverter temp. signal lost

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Inverter temperature signal loss
Remedy: Check the following:
• the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the control unit
• the setting of p0601

A00511 Motor OverTemperature I2T

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • Motor overloaded.
• Load cycles or load steps too high.
Remedy: Independently of the kind of temperature determination check:
• P0604 motor temperature warning threshold
• P0625 motor ambient temperature
If P0601 = 0 or 1, check the following:
• Check if name plate data are correct? If not perform quick commissioning. Accurate equivalent circuit data can
be found by performing motor identification (P1910=1).
• Check if motor weight (P0344) is reasonable. Change if necessary.
• Via P0626, P0627, P0628 the standard overtemperatures can be changed, if the motor is not a Siemens stan-
dard motor.
If P0601 = 2, Check the following:
• Check if temperature shown in r0035 is reasonable.
• Check if the sensor is a KTY84 (other sensors are not supported)

3-390 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A00523 Output fault

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: One phase of output is disconnected.
Remedy: Check motor connection.

A00525 F3E Dclink Ripple

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Large dclink ripple

Large dclink ripple detected

Remedy:

A00535 Braking Resistor Overload

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The breaking energy is too large.
The breaking resistor is not suited for the application.
Remedy: Reduce the breaking energy.
Use a breaking resistor with a higher rating.

A00541 Motor Data Identification Active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Motor data identification (P1910) selected or running.
Remedy:

A00542 Speed Control Optimisation Active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Speed Control Optimisation (P1960) is selected or running.
Remedy:

A00544 Speed deviation

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The actual speed has exceeded the maximal speed (status bit r2197.12) or the speed deviation is larger than spec-
ified (status bit 2197.7).
Remedy: The motoring or regenerative load is too large.

A00564 MMC Plugged During Operation

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: MMC-PS Plugged During Operation and none was present at startup. Therefore, possible corruption of current
dataset on next power cycle from Automatic Cloning at Startup.
Remedy: Remove MMC-PS from drive.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-391

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A00590 Encoder feedback loss warning

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Signal from Encoder lost; Inverter might have switched to sensorless vector control.
Check also alarm value r0947:
• r0949 = 0: Encoder signal lost.
• r0949 = 5: Encoder not configured in P0400, but required for sensored control (P1300 = 21 or 23).
Remedy: Stop inverter and then
• Check encoder fitted. If encoder fitted and r0949 = 5, select encoder type via P0400.
• If encoder fitted and r0949 = 6, check connections between encoder module and inverter.
• If encoder not fitted and r0949 = 5, select SLVC mode (P1300 = 20 or 22).
• If encoder not fitted and r0949 = 6, set P0400 = 0.
• If encoder fitted, check correct encoder selected (check encoder setup in P0400).
• Check connections between encoder and inverter.
• Check that encoder not faulty (select P1300 = 0, run at fixed speed, check encoder feedback signal in r0061).
• Increase encoder loss threshold in P0492.

A00600 RTOS Overrun Warning

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Internal time slice overrun
Remedy: Contact Service Department

A00700 PROFIBUS: Parameter or configuration error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: wrong parameter and/or configuration telegram
Remedy: check parameter and/or configuration telegram

A00701 PROFIBUS: DoubleWord error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: error in double word reference table
Remedy: power cycle

A00702 PROFIBUS: no bus detection

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: connection error, no bus initialization (no master), no clear bus signal, ...
Remedy: check the cables and the bus hardware

A00703 PROFIBUS: no reference values

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: no or empty control word 1 received
Remedy: check bus transmission

A00704 PROFIBUS: loose of links

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: lost subscriber information
Remedy: temporary, if permanent the fault detection is activated

3-392 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A00705 PROFIBUS: timeout actual value

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: no actual data from CUP
Remedy: temporary, if permanent the fault detection is activated

A00706 PROFIBUS: fatal SW error (e.g. hardware check, communication, V

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: e.g. hardware check, communication, V1SL stack, ...
Remedy: if permanent power cycle, reload firmware

A00707 PROFIBUS: wrong PB address at startup

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: wrong DIP switch or parameter settings for PROFIBUS address
Remedy: check DIP switch and/or P0918

A00708 --- not used ---

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause:
Remedy:

A00709 --- not used ---

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause:
Remedy:

A00710 CB communication error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Communication with CB (communication board) is lost.
Remedy: Check CB hardware

A00711 CB configuration error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: CB (communication board) reports a configuration error.
Remedy: Check CB parameters

A00910 Vdc-max controller de-activated

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Occurs
• if main supply voltage (P0210) is permanently too high.
• if motor is driven by an active load, causing motor to goes into regenerative mode.
• at very high load inertias, when ramping down.
Remedy: Check the following:
• Input voltage must lie within range.
• Load must be match.
• In certain cases apply braking resistor.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-393

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A00911 Vdc-max controller active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Vdc max controller is active; so ramp-down times will be increased automatically to keep DC-link voltage (r0026)
within limits (P2172).
Remedy: Check the following:
• Supply voltage must lie within limits indicated on rating plate.
• Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load.
Note: Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; otherwise, apply braking resistor.

A00912 Vdc-min Controller active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Vdc min controller will be activated if DC-link voltage (r0026) falls below minimum level (P2172).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the drive! So short
mains failures do not necessarily lead to an undervoltage trip.

A00921 AO parameters not set properly

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: AO parameters (P0777 and P0779) should not be set to identical values, since this would produce illogical results.
Remedy: Check the following:
• Parameter settings for output identical
• Parameter settings for input identical
• Parameter settings for output do not correspond to AO type
Set P0777 and P0779 to different values.

A00922 No load applied to inverter

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: No Load is applied to the inverter.
As a result, some functions may not work as under normal load conditions.
Remedy: Check that motor is connected to inverter.

A00923 Both JOG Left and JOG Right are requested

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Both JOG right and JOG left (P1055/P1056) have been requested. This freezes the RFG output frequency at its cur-
rent value.
Remedy: Do not press JOG right and left simulutanously.

A00936 PID Autotuning Active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: PID Autotuning (P2350) selected or running
Remedy: Alarm disappears when PID Autotuning has finished.

A00952 Belt Failure Detected

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Load conditions on motor indicate belt failure or mechanical fault.
Remedy: Check the following:
• No breakage, seizure or obstruction of drive train.
• If using an external speed sensor, check the following parameters for correct function.
• If using the torque envelope, check parameters:
• Apply lubrication if required.

3-394 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01600 passivated STO with drive fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: A passivated safe torque off (passivated STO) has been initiated by hardware due to a drive fault:
• r0949 = 33: passivated STO acknowledge after a drive fault requires the OFF first and then an acknowledge
(ACK) to remove the safety fault! If however ACK is given first and then the OFF command, the alarm handler
clears the fault but the passivated STO is still active.
• r0949 = 100: The signals for the STO signal are not consistent on P1.
• r0949 = 101: Maximum speed exceeded on P1 during activation of the SS1. The estimated speed deviates
from the SBR monitoring ramp. When the drive is in VECTOR mode (with p1300 > 19):
• r0949 = 104: Communication timeout of processor P2 during forced dynamisation. The handshaking via hard-
ware lines has failed.
• r0949 = 106: Error in the mechanical brake or in the brake feedback path of P1.
• r0949 = 107: Error in the gate driver or feedback path of P1. Can happen when either the hardware measure-
ment circuit on the PM is faulty or when P1 and P2 are not synchronised.
• r0949 = 108: Signal debounce error on P1. The safety signals are not consistent for a longer time than parame-
terised in p9650/p9850.
• r0949 = 109: Hardware detection fault on P1. The hardware type (safety or non-safety module) has not been
recognised correctly.
• r0949 = 200: The STO signals are not consistent on P2. Avoid fast periodic activation and deactivation of the
STO.
• r0949 = 201: Maximum frequency exceeded on activation of SS1 on P2.
• r0949 = 202: Maximum frequency exceeded on activation of SLS in P2.
• r0949 = 204: Communication timeout of processor P2 during forced dynamisation. The handshaking via hard-
ware lines has failed.
• r0949 = 206: Error in the mechanical brake or in the brake feedback path of P2
• r0949 = 207: Error in gate driver or feedback path on P2.
• r0949 = 208: Signal debounce error on P2. The safety signals are not consistent for a longer time than parame-
terised in p9650/p9850.
• r0949 = 209: Hardware type could not be detected correctly on P2.
Remedy: • r0949 = 100 or 200
Increase the ramping times p1120/p1121 or the safety tolerance p9691/p9891,
check the motor parameters (p0394 - p0311) or run the motor identification (p1910) again.
Decrease the rate of switching the safety signals or lower the cycle time of the PLC.
• r0949 = 101 or 201
Increase the ramping times p1120/p1121 or the safety tolerance p9691/p9891,
check the motor parameters (p0394 - p0311) or run the motor identification (p1910) again.
• r0949 = 102 or 202
Increase the ramping times (p1120, p1121) so that deviation between reference and actual frequency is mini-
mized.
Increase the safety tolerance p9691/p9891 or run the motor identification (p1910) again for better tuning of the
observer and controllers.
• r0949 = 104 or 204
Acknowledge the fault once more
Power cycle the CU
• r0949 = 106 or 206
Check connection with safe brake module and mechanical brake
Check the 24 V power supply for safe brake module
• r0949 = 107 or 207
Check connection between CU and power module
Power cycle the CU
• r0949 = , 108, or 208
Decrease the rate of switching the safe digital inputs or increase debounce delay time p9650/p9850.
• r0949 = 109 or 209
Power cycle the CU
Change CU

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-395

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01601 System startup error

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: System startup error. Error during the startup initialisation after a PowerCycle or HotSwap.
This error is critical and cannot be acknowledged. A restart (hotswap or power cycle) of the drive is required!

• r0949 = 0: Handshaking error on P1. Either an unexpected reboot by P1 or a synchronisation error during star-
tup. Please power-cycle the inverter module again or perform a hotswap.
• r0949 = 1: Handshaking error on P2. Either a faulty reboot by P2 or a synchronisation error during startup.
Please power-cycle the inverter module or perform a hotswap.
• r0949 = 100: Version error detected by P1. The safety version number is not identical on P1 and P2.
• r0949 = 101: Startup semaphore is wrong on P1. Can happen if commissioning was not finished properly
before performing a power cycle. There might also be a problem of the EEPROM.
• r0949 = 102: Error with semaphore on P1. The drive loads default parameters instead of the user settings.
• r0949 = 103: Error with initial and first hardware type detection on P1. The hardware type (standard or safety
module) could not be identified. Either the control board is faulty or affected by EMC.
• r0949 = 104: Timeout error on P1 while waiting for communication with P2.
• r0949 = 105: Error on P1 during hardware exchange phase. Processors have not agreed on same type of hard-
ware platform.
• r0949 = 106: Timeout error on P1 in hardware detection state. Handshaking with P2 failed.
• r0949 = 107: Checksum error on P1. The safety parameters are not consistent in EEPROM.
• r0949 = 108: Error on P1 during parameter transfer to P2. The correct safety parameters are not available on
P2 due to a communication problem.
• r0949 = 109: Timeout error on P1 during parameter transfer to P2 due to different safety checksums on P1 and
P2. The parameter transfer to P2 has failed.
• r0949 = 110: Timeout error on P1 during forced dynamisation and processor self test.
• r0949 = 111: Timeout error on P1 when leaving the safety commissioning at startup.
• r0949 = 112: Checksum error on P1 during processor initialisation.
• r0949 = 200: Version error detected by P2. The safety version number (see r9770) is not identical on P1 and
P2.
• r0949 = 201: Startup semaphore is wrong on P2. Can happen if commissioning was not finished properly
before performing a power cycle. There might also be a problem of the EEPROM.
• r0949 = 202: Error with semaphore on P2. The drive loads default parameters instead of the user settings.
• r0949 = 203: Error on P2 with initial and first hardware detection. The hardware type (standard or safety mod-
ule) could not be identified. Either the control board is faulty or affected by EMC.
• r0949 = 204: Timeout error on P1 while waiting for communication with P2.
• r0949 = 205: Error on P1 during hardware exchange phase. Processors have not agreed on same type of hard-
ware platform.
• r0949 = 206: Timeout error on P2 during hardware detection. Handshaking with P1 failed.
• r0949 = 207: Checksum error on P2. The safety parameters on P2 are not consistent.
• r0949 = 208: Error on P2 during parameter transfer from P1. The safety parameters on P2 are not valid due to
a communication problem.
• r0949 = 209: Timeout error on P2 during parameter transfer from P1. Possibly due to different checksums on
P1 and P2.
• r0949 = 210: Timeout error on P2 in startup dynamisation phase. The communication failed.
• r0949 = 211: Timeout error on P2 when leaving the initial safety commissioning.
• r0949 = 212: Checksum error on P2 during processor initialisation.
Remedy: • Power-cycle CU (since fault F1601 cannot be acknowledged).
• Make sure that CU is connected correctly to PM.
• Reduce EMC.

3-396 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01610 EEPROM inconsistent

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: EEPROM data inconsistency error:
• r0949 = 100: Safety parameters have not been written correctly to EEPROM on P1. Try to load parameters
again.
• r0949 = 200: EEPROM data inconsistency error on P2.
• r0949 =2011: Safety parameters have not been written correctly to EEPROM.
Remedy: Load safety parameters again.

F01611 Defect in cross comparis

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Data exchange error between processors:
• r0949 = 100: P2 has entered the safe torque off due to a drive fault on P2 or a subsequent fault of F1600/F1630
• r0949 = 102: Dynamic checksums are different on P1. Cross comparison fault or problem with processor com-
munication.
• r0949 = 103: Derived frequency is different on both processors. Cross comparison fault or problem with proces-
sor communication.
• r0949 = 104: Frequency error on P1 caused by VFM.
• r0949 = 201: Frequency check with error on P2.
• r0949 = 202: Dynamic checksums are different on P2. Cross comparison fault or problem with processor com-
munication.
Remedy: • Reduce EMC.
• Perform a forced dynamisation

F01612 Diff. in hardw. detection

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The hardware (safety or non-safety hardware) could no be identified.
• r0949 = 100: Identification error during startup on P1.
• r0949 = 101: Runtime detection error on P1.
• r0949 = 102: Hardware or software configuration error on P1.
• r0949 = 200: Startup error on P2.
• r0949 = 201: Runtime detection error on P2.
• r0949 = 202: Hardware or software configuration error on P2.
Remedy: • Inverter hardware is faulty or problem in processor communication. Perform a power cycle.

F01613 Maximum frequency exceeded

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The maximum frequency has been exceeded.
• r0949 = 100: Frequency error on P1, maximum frequency exceeded.
• r0949 = 200: Maximum frequency exceeded on P2.
Remedy: • Check application or increase safety threshold p9691/p9891.
• See also remedies for F1614.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-397

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01614 Frequency consistency fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Error in frequency detection of the frequency estimation circuit (voltage frequency measurement (VFM) module):
• r0949 = 100: Difference in frequency comparison on P1.
• r0949 = 101: VFM estimated frequency too high on P1.
• r0949 = 102: VFM estimated frequency too low on P1.
• r0949 = 103: Estimated frequency of VFM module was not detected on P1.
• r0949 = 104: Error in cycle-time on P1.
• r0949 = 200: Frequency deviation on P2.
• r0949 = 201: VFM estimated frequency too high on P2.
• r0949 = 202: VFM estimated frequency too low on P2.
• r0949 = 203: Estimated VFM frequency was not detected on P2.
• r0949 = 204: Error in cycle-time on P2.
Error can occur with small ramping times. When the VC or SLVC mode is configured (see p1300) the cause can be
the same as for fault F0453.
Remedy: • Increase ramping times p1120 and p1121.
• Make sure that drive is not at current limit when starting.
• See remedies for F0453.
• Check hardware speed estimation circuit.

F01615 Error in hardw. environm

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • r0949 = 100: Error in supply voltage 3.3 V or 24 V on the control board.
• r0949 = 101: Temperature of control board exceeds the limits.
Remedy: • r0949 = 100:
• Check supply voltage.
• Reduce EMC.
• r0949 = 101:
• Check ambient temperature.

F01616 Processor selftest faulty

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The processor selftest has uncovered an error:
• r0949 = 100: General error on P1.
• r0949 = 101: Error in RAM test on P1.
• r0949 = 102: Error in ROM test on P1.
• r0949 = 103: Error in processor function test on P1.
• r0949 = 200: Error in processor self-test on P2.
The selftest is started together with the forced dynamisation and must be enabled by setting p9601.1 and p9801.1.
Remedy: • Run self-test again (set bit 1 in p9601 and p9801 and enter the STO mode, then leave the STO mode again).

3-398 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01625 Consecutive no. incorr

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The consecutive counter checks the consistency of the communication between P1 and P2:
• r0949 = 100: The consecutive monitoring counter has an error on P1.
• r0949 = 101: Processors are out of synchonism.
• r0949 = 102: Processor communication has failed.
• r0949 = 103: Processor communication has failed or processors are out of synchonism.
• r0949 = 200: The consecutive counter has an error on P2.
Remedy: • Acknowledge safety fault.
• Restart inverter module or check EMC levels on accumulated faults.

F01630 Safe Brake Control faulty

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: An error has been detected with the brake feedback.
• r0949 = 0: Problem with the safe brake.
• r0949 = 100: SB-Module: wire break detected or internal braketests failed during dynamisation.
• r0949 = 200: Internal braketests failed during dynamisation.
Remedy: • Check the wiring of the brake module
• Exchange brake module.

F01640 PROFIsafe Driver Fault

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: An error has been detected with the PROFIsafe driver.
• r0949 = 102: A parameterisation error occured on P1. The parameters received from the bus are not correct.
Check PROFIsafe parameters.
• r0949 = 103: A consecutive number error occured on P1. Current PROFIsafe message has a wrong sign of life.
• r0949 = 104: A CRC error occured on P1. The PROFIsafe message checksum was incorrect.
• r0949 = 105: A watchdog error occured on P1. PROFIsafe driver timed out.
• r0949 = 106: Fail safe values are active on P1.
• r0949 = 107: PROFIsafe default error on P1.
• r0949 = 202: A parameterisation error occured on P2. The parameters received from the bus are not correct.
Check PROFIsafe parameters.
• r0949 = 203: A consecutive number error occured on P2. Current PROFIsafe message has a wrong sign of life.
• r0949 = 204: A CRC error occured on P2. The PROFIsafe message checksum was incorrect.
• r0949 = 205: A watchdog error occured on P2. PROFIsafe driver timed out.
• r0949 = 206: Fail safe values are active on P2.
• r0949 = 207: PROFIsafe default error on P2.
• r0949 = 208: PROFIsafe configuration error on P2. The drive configuration does not match the configuration
from the bus.
Remedy: • Check all PROFIsafe settings (including your higher level failsafe control system).
• Acknowledge PROFIsafe fault.

F01649 Internal software error

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • r0949 = 1: Buffer overflow on checksum calculation for P1 parameter access functions.
• r0949 = 2: Buffer overflow on checksum calculation for P2 parameter access functions.
• r0949 = 3: Endless safety loop on P1.
• r0949 = 4: Endless safety loop on P2.
• r0949 > 100: Signal an internal or unexpected software fault.
Only for Siemens internal diagnostics.
Remedy: Contact hotline.

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-399

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

F01650 Fault in safety parametr

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Error during startup or safety commissioning/reset:
• r0949 = 0: Error during safety commissioning/reset.
• r0949 = 1: Checksum error during safety commissioning or safety reset.
• r0949 = 2: Error during internal parameter transfer.
• r0949 = 3: Error finalizing the buffer transfer.
• r0949 = 4: Failure during saving of parameters to EEPROM.
• r0949 = 5: Error in safety parameter transfer during safety reset.
• r0949 = 11: Communication channel between processors not ready.
• r0949 =2000: Safety commissioning can only be finished by setting parameter p3900.
Remedy: • Perform safety commissioning.
• Try leaving via p3900 = 11.

F01655 Fault at processor reset

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • r0949 = 100: Safety reset timeout on P1.
• r0949 = 200: Safety reset timeout on P2.
Remedy: • Retrigger the safety reset (perform a hot swap of the inverter module).

F01659 Denial of paramet. change

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: A write request for one or more safety parameters was rejected:
• r0949 = 0: Problem during finalization of safety parameters. Drive has reloaded the old data.
• r0949 = 1: Safety password not set correctly.
• r0949 = 3: Tolerance too small (p9691 < p9690). Increase tolerance p9691!
• r0949 = 203: Tolerance too small (p9891 < p9890). Increase tolerance!
Remedy: • Acknowledge fault and enter safety commissioning again. If not possible, leave the safety commissioning with
p3900 = 11 and operate the drive with the old safety settings.

F01660 Wrong safety checksum

Reaction: OFF 2 (OFF 3)
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: • r0949 = 0: Attempt to leave safety commissioning with r9798 != p9799.
• r0949 = 1: Attempt to leave safety commissioning with r9898 != p9899.
• r0949 = 2: Attempt to leave safety commissioning with r9798 != r9898.
Remedy: • Make sure that checksums in p9798 and p9898 are identical. If not, ensure that parametrisation is identical
(p96xx = p98xx).
• Set checksum in p9799 or p9899 correctly.
• If setting the checksums not successful, leave safety commissioning via p3900 = 11 (cancel commissioning).

A01690 Safety parameter changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The warning indicates that at least one parameter has been changed in the safety commissioning or safety reset.
Remedy: Finish safety commissioning by setting p3900 = 10 or p3900 = 11 or wait until safety reset is complete.

3-400 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

A01691 SLS signal inconsistency

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Problem with the consistency of the safety input signals. The drive reduces the frequency according to the settings
of the SS1.
When zero frequency is reached, the passivated STO is entered and a drive fault is issued.
Remedy: Check consistency of safety input signals and acknowledge the following safe torque off due to a drive fault.

A01692 Speed for SLS exceeded

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: a) Output frequency when entering the SLS is higher than p9690 and p9692 is configured to trigger a passivated
STO with a drive fault.
b) Output frequency exceeds the SLS tolerance p9691.
In both cases, the frequency is reduced according to the settings for the SS1, then the passivated STO state is
entered and a fault is generated.
Remedy: ad a) Reduce speed before entering the SLS or change the setting in p9692.
ad b) increase the tolerance in p9691/p9891 compared to p9690/p9890.
In both cases the passivated STO will be entered once zero frequency is reached. Acknowledge the passivated STO
and the drive fault.

A01696 Switch-on is inhibited

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Switching on of the drive not possible and the drive will therefore remain in the READY state (see r0002).
Remedy: Check if a deactivated gate driver or the current safety mode (STO, SS1, SLS) is inhibiting the start. Check the inhibit
bit (r0052.6).

A01697 Wrong safety param. data

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Semaphore problem at startup. Cannot load last safety parameters. Loading default values instead.
Remedy: Restart drive (perform power cycle) to load correct safety data.

A01698 Safety commis./reset act

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: The safety reset or the safety commissioning are currently active (selected via p0010 = 95).
Remedy: Finish commissioning with p3900 = 10 (accept changed) or p3900 = 11 (discard changes) or wait until safety reset
is complete.

A01699 Forced dynamis. required

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: refer to section 3.1
Cause: Dynamisation timer (see r9660) has expired. A new dynamisation test is required.
Remedy: Select and then de-select STO (p9601.bit1 and p9801.bit1 must be set).

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved 3-401

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Faults and Alarms
List of Fault and Alarm messages

3-402 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
ASCII-Table A
The following table contains the decimal and hexadecimal notation of selected
ASCII indications.

Table A-1 ASCII-Table (in part)

Indication Decimal Hexadecimal Indication Dezimal Hexadecimal

Leerzeichen 32 20 H 72 48
- 45 2D I 73 49
0 48 30 J 74 4A
1 49 31 K 75 4B
2 50 32 L 76 4C
3 51 33 M 77 4D
4 52 34 N 78 4E
5 53 35 O 79 4F
6 54 36 P 80 50
7 55 37 Q 81 51
8 56 38 R 82 52
9 57 39 S 83 53
A 65 41 T 84 54
B 66 42 U 85 55
C 67 43 V 86 56
D 68 44 W 87 57
E 69 45 X 88 58
F 70 46 Y 89 59
G 71 47 Z 90 5A

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved A-403

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
ASCII-Table

A-404 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
List of Abbreviations B
Abbreviations used with the SINAMICS G120 Products:

Abbreviation Meaning
A
AC Alternating current
A/D Analog digital converter
ADR Address
AFM Additional frequency modification
AG Automation unit
AI Analog input
AK Request identifier
AO Analog output
AOP Advanced operator panel
ASIC Application specific integrated circuit
ASP Analog setpoint
ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation
B
BCC Block check character
BCD Binary-coded decimal code
BI Binector input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit
BICO Binector/connector
BO Binector output
C
C Commissioning
CB Communication board
CCW Counter-clockwise
CDS Command data set
CI Connector input
CM Configuration management
CMD Command
CO Cconnector output
CO/BO Connector output/Binector output
COM Common (terminal is connected to NO or NC)

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved B-405

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
CT Commissioning, ready to run
CU Control unit
CUT Commissioning, run, ready to run
CW Clockwise
D
D/A Digital analog converter
DC Digital analog converter
DDS Drive data set
DI Digital input
DIP DIP switch
DO Digital output
DP Distributed I/Os
DS Drive state
E
ECD Equivalent circuit diagram
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromagnetic force
ES Engineering System
F
FAQ Frequently asked question
FB Function block
FFB Freely Assignable Function block
FCC Flux current control
FCL Fast current limiting
FF Fixed frequency
FFB Free function block
FOC Field orientated control
FREQ Frequency
FSA Frame size A
FSB Frame size B
FSC Frame size C
FSD Frame size D
FSE Frame size E
FSF Frame size F
G
GSD Device data file (Geräte Stamm Datei)
GSG Getting started guide
GUI ID Global unique identifier

B-406 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
H
HIW Main actual value
HMI Human machine interface
HO High Overload (Constant Torque)
HSW Main setpoint
HTL High-voltage transistor logic
I
I/O In-/output
IBN Commissioning
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IND Sub-index
J
JOG JOG
K
KIB Kinetic buffering
L
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LGE Length
LO Light Overload (Variable Torque)
LWL Fiber Optic conductor
M
MHB Motor holding brake
MLP Multi-Language Pack
MOP Motor operated potentiometer
N
NC Normally closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NO Normally open
O
OLM Optical Link Module
OLP Optical Link Plug
OP Operator Panel
OPI Operating Instructions
P
PID Proportional, integral, derivative controller
PKE Parameter ID
PKW Parameter ID value area (Parameterkennung Wert)
PLC Programmable logic control
PM Power module
PM-IF Power module interface

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved B-407

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
List of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
PNU Parameter Number
PPO Parameter process data object
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
PWE Parameter value
PWM Pulse-width modulation
Pxxxx Write parameter
PZD Process data area (Prozessdaten)
Q
QC Quick commissioning
R
RAM Random-access memory
RCCB Residual current circuit breaker
RCD Residual current device
RFG Ramp-function generator
RFI Radio frequency interference
ROM Read-only memory
RPM Revolutions per minute
rxxxx read-only parameters of analogue signals
S
SBC Safe Break Control
SLVC Sensorless vector control
SLS Safe-Limited Speed
SOL Serial option link
SS1 Safe stop 1
STO Safe torque off
STW Control word
STX Start of text
SVM Space vector modulation
T
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
U
USS Universal serial interface
V
V/f Voltage/frequency
VC Vector control
VT Variable torque
W
WEA Automatic restart
Z
ZSW Status word
ZUSW Additional setpoint

B-408 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 List of Abbreviations

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved B-409

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
List of Abbreviations

B-410 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Index C
Numbers 3310
0010 Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection
Symbols in funktion diagrams, 2-311 (P2216 = 2), 2-333
1100 3400
General Overview, 2-313 PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP),
1200 2-334
Connection of External and Internal Set- 4100
points, 2-314 Monitoring (r2197, bits 00 - 04), 2-336
2000 4110
Digital Inputs (DI), 2-316 Monitoring (r2197, bits 05 - 12, 2-337
2100 4115
Digital OUputs (DO), 2-317 Monitoring (r2197, bits 09 - 10) (only
2200 PM240), 2-338
Analog Inputs (AI), 2-318 4120
2300 Monitoring (r2198, bits 00 - 03), 2-339
Analog Output (AO), 2-319 4130
2400 Monitoring (r2198, bits 04 - 08), 2-340
Basic Operator Panel (BOP), 2-320 4140
2500 Monitoring (r2198, bits 09 - 12), 2-341
USS on RS232, Receiving, 2-321 4150
2510 Control word 1 (r0054), 2-342
USS on RS232, Transmitting, 2-322 4160
2600 Control word 2 (r0055), 2-343
USS on RS485, Receiving, 2-323 4170
2610 Status word 1 (r0052), 2-344
USS on RS485, Transmitting, 2-324 4180
2700 Status word 2 (r0053), 2-345
Fieldbus, Receiving, 2-325 4600
2710 Vdc Control (max, min), 2-346
Fieldbus,Transmitting, 2-326 4800
2800 AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements,
Encoder evaluation, 2-327 2-348
3100 4810
Motor Potentiometer, 2-329 FlipFlops, 2-349
3200 4820
Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection Timers, 2-350
(P1016 = 1), 2-330 4830
3210 Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers,
Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection Comparators, 2-351
(P1016 = 2), 2-331 5000
3300 Setpoint channel and Motor control, 2-353
Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection 5100
(P2216 = 1), 2-332 PID Controller, 2-354

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved C-411

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Index

5150 A
Wobble Generator, 2-355 Active (Parameters), 1-10
5200 Adjustable parameter, 1-8
Additional Frequency Modifications, 2-356 Alarm
5300 Alarm messages, 3-376
Ramp Function Generator, 2-357 List of Alarm messages, 3-377
6100 ASCII-Table, A-403
Overview of V/f Control for inverters with
PM240, 2-359 B
6200 Bit field (Parameters), 1-12
Overview of V/f Control for inverters with
PM250/PM260, 2-360 C
7000 Can be changed (Parameters), 1-11
Overview of Speed Control without En- Contents
coder (SLVC), 2-362 ASCII-Table, A-403
7010 Contents overview, Inhalt-5
Overview of Speed Control with Encoder List of Abbreviations, B-405
(VC), 2-363
7200 D
Overview of Torque Control without En- Data set (Parameters), 1-11
coder (SLVC), 2-364 Data type (Parameters), 1-10
7210 Dependency (Parameters), 1-12
Overview of Torque Control with Encoder Description (Parameters), 1-12
(VC), 2-365
F
7500
Fault messages
Speed Controller without Encoder
List of all Fault messages, 3-377
(SLVC), 2-366
Function diagrams External Interfaces
7510
Analog Inputs (AI), 2-318
Speed Controller with Encoder (VC),
Analog Output (AO), 2-319
2-367
Basic Operator Panel (BOP), 2-320
7700
Digital Inputs (DI), 2-316
Torque Control and Torque Limitation
Digital Ouputs (DO), 2-317
without Encoder (SLVC), 2-368
Encoder evaluation, 2-327
7710
Fieldbus, Receiving, 2-325
Torque Control and Torque Limitation with
Fieldbus, Transmitting, 2-326
Encoder (VC), 2-369
USS on RS232, Receiving, 2-321
7800
USS on RS232, Transmitting, 2-322
Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC), 2-370
USS on RS485, Receiving, 2-323
7900
USS on RS485, Transmitting, 2-324
Current Controller & Observer Model with-
Function diagrams Free Blocks
out Encoder (SLVC), 2-371
Adders, Subtracters, Multipliers, Dividers,
7910
Comparators, 2-351
Current Controller & Observer Model with
AND-, OR-, XOR- and NOT- Elements,
Encoder (VC), 2-372
2-348
8000
FlipFlops, 2-349
Analog outputs and display values, 2-373
Timers, 2-350
Function diagrams General
Symbols in funktion diagrams, 2-311

C-412 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
 Index

Function diagrams Internal Setpoint Source Function diagrams Vector Control

Fixed Frequency (FF) Binary Selection Analog outputs and display values, 2-373
(P1016 = 2), 2-331 Current Controller & Observer Model with
Fixed Frequency (FF) Direct Selection Encoder (VC), 2-372
(P1016 = 1), 2-330 Current Controller & Observer Model with-
Fixed PID setpoint, Binary Selection out Encoder (SLVC), 2-371
(P2216 = 2), 2-333 Flux Setpoint (SLVC and VC), 2-370
Fixed PID setpoint, Direct Selection Overview of Speed Control with Encoder
(P2216 = 1), 2-332 (VC), 2-363
Motor Potentiometer (MOP), 2-329 Overview of Speed Control without En-
PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP), coder (SLVC), 2-362
2-334 Overview of Torque Control with Encoder
Function diagrams Overview (VC), 2-365
Connection of External and Internal Set- Overview of Torque Control without En-
points, 2-314 coder (SLVC), 2-364
General Overview, 2-313 Speed Controller with Encoder (VC),
Function diagrams Setpoint Channel 2-367
Additional Frequency Modifications, 2-356 Speed Controller without Encoder
PID Controller, 2-354 (SLVC), 2-366
Ramp Function Generator, 2-357 Torque Control and Torque Limitation with
Setpoint channel and Motor control, 2-353 Encoder (VC), 2-369
Wobble Generator, 2-355 Torque Control and Torque Limitation
Function diagrams Technology Functions without Encoder (SLVC), 2-368
Control word 1 (r0054), 2-342
Control word 2 (r0055), 2-343 I
Monitoring (r2197, bits 00 - 04), 2-336 Index
Monitoring (r2197, bits 05 - 12, 2-337 Parameters, 1-8
Monitoring (r2197, bits 09 - 10) (only Index (Parameters), 1-12
PM240), 2-338
Monitoring (r2198, bits 00 - 03), 2-339 L
Monitoring (r2198, bits 04 - 08), 2-340 Linked parameter, 1-8
Monitoring (r2198, bits 09 - 12), 2-341 List
Status word 1 (r0052), 2-344 Abbreviations, B-405
Status word 2 (r0053), 2-345 ASCII-Table, A-403
Vdc Control (max, min), 2-346 Binector Input Parameters, 1-297
Function diagrams V/f Control Binector Output Parameters, 1-300
Overview of V/f Control for inverters with Command Data Sets, 1-290
PM240, 2-359 Connector Input Parameters, 1-299
Overview of V/f Control for inverters with Connector Output Parameters, 1-301
PM250/PM260, 2-360 Connector/Binector Output Parameters,
1-304
Drive Data Sets, 1-292
Fault- and Alarm messages, 3-377
Parameters all, 1-13
Quick commissioning, 1-305
List of Abbreviations, B-405

N
Name
Parameters, 1-9
Number
Parameters, 1-8

© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved C-413

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Index

P pxxxx, 1-8
Parameters
Active, 1-10 Q
Binector Input Parameters, 1-297 QuickComm (Parameters), 1-10
Binector Output, 1-300
R
Bit field, 1-12
rxxxx, 1-8
Can be changed, 1-11
Command Data Sets, 1-290 S
Connector Input, 1-299 Seven-segment display, 1-12
Connector Output, 1-301
Connector/Binector Output, 1-304 U
Data set, 1-11 Unit (Parameters), 1-11
Data type, 1-10
Dependency, 1-12 V
Description, 1-12 Values (Parameters), 1-12
Drive Data Sets, 1-292 Visualization parameters, 1-8
Index, 1-8, 1-12
Linked parameter, 1-8
List of all Parameters, 1-13
Long name, 1-9
Name, 1-9
Number, 1-8
Quick commissioning, 1-305
QuickComm, 1-10
Short name, 1-9
Text, 1-9
Unit, 1-11
Values, 1-12

C-414 © Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240E/S, Edition 10/2007
Siemens AG

Automation and Drives

Standard Drives
Postfach 32 69
91050 Erlangen
Deutschland

www.siemens.de/sinamics-g120